Manual Tesys T DeviceNet

TeSys T LTM R DeviceNet Motor Management Controller
Users Manual
05/2008
1639504 v2.0
www.schneider-electric.com
Table of Contents
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Chapter 1 Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System . . . . . 15
Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Description of the LTM R Motor Management Controller with DeviceNet Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 22 26 31 36 37 38 40 41 42 43 43 44 45 45 46 48 49 50 51 52 53 57 59 59 61 61 62
3
Chapter 2
2.1
Metering and Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Currents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Average Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Phase Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermal Capacity Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line-to-Line Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Voltage Imbalance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Average Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Power and Reactive Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Power Consumption and Reactive Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . System and Device Monitoring Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller Internal Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller Internal Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Command Error Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time to Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LTM E Configuration Fault and Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Fault and Warning Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Introducing Fault and Warning Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 All Faults Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 All Warnings Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Auto-Reset Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Protection Faults and Warnings Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Control Command Errors Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Wiring Faults Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Communication Loss Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Internal Fault Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Fault History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Motor History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Motor Starts Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Motor Starts Per Hour Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Load Sheddings Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Auto Restart Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Motor Last Start Current Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Motor Last Start Duration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Operating Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Maximum Internal Controller Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 System Operating Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Motor State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Minimum Wait Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Chapter 3
3.1
Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Motor Protection Functions Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Motor Protection Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Thermal and Current Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Thermal Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Thermal Overload - Inverse Thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Thermal Overload - Definite Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Current Phase Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Current Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Current Phase Reversal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Long Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Undercurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Ground Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Internal Ground Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 External Ground Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Motor Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Motor Temperature Sensor - PT100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3.2
3.3
3.4
Motor Temperature Sensor - NTC Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rapid Cycle Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Phase Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Phase Reversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Dip Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Shedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Underpower. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overpower. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Over Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Channels and Operating States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Predefined Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Wiring and Fault Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overload Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Independent Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reverser Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Step Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Speed Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Management - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault and Warning Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LTM R Controller and Expansion Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to an HMI Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
122 124 126 127 130 133 134 137 139 140 143 148 149 151 153 155 158 159 162 165 169 170 171 174 176 179 183 187 193 198 199 200 203 205 210 212 214 214 215 218 223 226
5
Chapter 4
4.1
Motor Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
4.2
4.3
Chapter 5
5.1
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
5.2
Wiring - General Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Wiring - Current Transformers (CTs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Wiring - Ground Fault Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Wiring - Temperature Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Recommended Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Wiring of the DeviceNet Communication Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 DeviceNet Communication Wiring Terminal Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 DeviceNet Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Chapter 6
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 First Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Required and Optional Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 FLC (Full Load Current) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 DeviceNet Communication Checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Verifying System Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Verify Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Chapter 7
7.1 7.2
Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Using the LTM R Controller Alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Hardware Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Stand Alone Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Configuring the Magelis XBTN410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Installing Magelis XBT L1000 Programming Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Download 1-to-1 and 1-to-many Software Application Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI . . . . . . . . . 277 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI (1-to-1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Physical Description (1-to-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 LCD Display (1-to-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Navigating the Menu Structure (1-to-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Editing Values (1-to-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Menu Structure (1-to-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Sys Config Menu (1-to-1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Main Menu (1-to-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Main Menu - Settings (1-to-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Main Menu - Statistics (1-to-1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Main Menu - Services (1-to-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Main Menu - Product ID (1-to-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Monitoring Using the Scrolling HMI Display (1-to-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Fault Management (1-to-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 HMI Keypad Control (1-to-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Physical Description (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Command Lines (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Navigating the Menu Structure (1-to-many). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Editing Values (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
Executing a Value Write Command (1-to-many). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Structure (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Structure - Home Page (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Structure - All LTM R Controllers and the HMI (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . Motor Starter Page (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Statistics (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product ID (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Management (1-to-many). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Commands (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using PowerSuite Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Services Using PowerSuite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metering and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Self Test and Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the DeviceNet Communication Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DeviceNet Protocol Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connections and Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simplified Control and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of the LTM R Network Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Profiles and EDS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the DeviceNet network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PKW Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identity Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Router Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DeviceNet Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Supervisor Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overload Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DeviceNet Interface Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Register Map - Organization of Communication Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identification Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Statistics Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Logic Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
328 330 331 332 335 336 342 346 347 348 349 350 351 351 354 357 357 360 361 362 364 365 366 367 369 370 385 389 390 392 393 394 398 401 405 407 409 411 412 420 421 431 439 450 451
Chapter 8
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Detecting Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Communication Warnings and Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Appendices
Appendix A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Technical Specifications of the LTM E Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Characteristics of the Metering and Monitoring Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Appendix B
Configurable Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Motor and Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Thermal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Current Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Voltage Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Power Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Communication and HMI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Appendix C
C.1
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

IEC Format Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 Two-Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Two-Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Single Winding (Consequent Pole) . . . . . 530 Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Separate Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
C.2
Glossary Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Safety Information
Important Information
NOTICE Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that an electrical hazard exists, which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not followed. This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result in injury or equipment damage.
1639504 05/2008
Safety Information
PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material. 2008 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.
10
1639504 05/2008
About the Book
At a Glance
Document Scope This manual describes the DeviceNet network protocol version of the TeSys T LTM R motor management controller and LTM E expansion module. The purposes of this manual are twofold: to describe and explain the monitoring, protection, and control functions of the LTM R controller and expansion module to give you the information you need to implement and support a solution that best meets your application requirements The manual describes the 4 key parts of a successful system implementation: installing the LTM R controller and expansion module commissioning the LTM R controller by setting essential parameter values using the LTM R controller and expansion module, both with and without additional human-machine interface devices maintaining the LTM R controller and expansion module This manual is intended for: design engineers system integrators system operators maintenance engineers
1639504 05/2008
11
About the Book
Validity Note
This publication is in version 2. It encompasses new features: Protection functions: Voltage dip management, Automatic restart, PT100 temperature sensor Metering function: external fault Self-test command with motor on. Schneider Electric assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication, please notify us. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, without express written permission of Schneider Electric. The data and illustrations found in this documentation are not binding. We reserve the right to modify our products in line with our policy of continuous product development. The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Schneider Electric.
12
1639504 05/2008
About the Book
Related Documents
Title of Documentation TeSys T LTM R DeviceNet Motor Management Controller Quick Start Guide TeSys T LTM R Instruction Sheet TeSys T LTM E Instruction Sheet TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit Users Manual TeSys T LTM CU Instruction Sheet TeSys T LTM R Motor Management Controller Custom Logic Editor Users Manual XBT-N User Manual XBT-N Instruction Sheet Reference Number 1639575 1639508 1639509 1639581 1639582 1639507 1681029 1681014
You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website at www.schneider-electric.com. User Comments We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at techpub@schneider-electric.com
1639504 05/2008
13
About the Book
14
1639504 05/2008
Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System
At a Glance
Overview This chapter introduces the TeSys T Motor Management System and its companion devices. This chapter contains the following topics:
Page 15 22 26 31
What's in this Chapter?

Topic
Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System System Selection Guide Physical Description of the LTM R Motor Management Controller with DeviceNet Protocol Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module
Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System

Aim of the Product The TeSys T Motor Management System offers increased protection, control, and monitoring capabilities for single-phase and 3-phase AC induction motors. The system is flexible and modular and can be configured to meet the need of applications in industry. The system is designed to meet the needs for integrated protections systems with open communications and global architecture. More accurate sensors and solid-state full motor protection ensures better utilization of the motor. Complete monitoring functions enable analysis of motor operating conditions and faster reaction to prevent system downtime. The system offers diagnostic and statistics functions and configurable warnings and faults, allowing better prediction of component maintenance, and provides data to continuous improvement of the entire system.
1639504 05/2008
15
Introduction
Examples of Supported Machine Segments
The motor management system supports the following machine segments:

Machine segment Process and special machine segments Examples Water and waste water treatment water treatment (blowers and agitators) Metal, Minerals and Mining cement glass steel ore extraction Oil and gas oil and gas processing petrochemical refinery, offshore platform Microelectronic Pharmaceutical Chemical industry cosmetics detergents fertilizers paint Transportation industry automotive transfer lines airports Other industry tunnel machines cranes Complex machine segments Includes highly automated or coordinated machines used in: pumping systems paper conversion printing lines HVAC
16
1639504 05/2008
Introduction
Supported Industries
Industry Building
The motor management system supports the following industries and associated business sectors:
Sectors office buildings shopping centers industrial buildings ships hospitals cultural facilities airports metal, mineral, and mining: cement, glass, steel, ore-extraction microelectronic petrochemical ethanol chemical: pulp and paper industry pharmaceutical food and beverage water treatment and transportation transportation infrastructure for people and freight: airports, road tunnels, subways and tramways power generation and transport Application Control and manage the building facilities: critical HVAC systems water air gas electricity steam control and monitor pump motors control ventilation control load traction and movements view status and communicate with machines process and communicate the data captured remotely manage data for one or several sites via Internet control and monitor pump motors control ventilation remotely control wind turbine remotely manage data for one or several sites via the internet
Industry
Energy and Infrastructure
TeSysT Motor Management System
The 2 main hardware components of the system are the LTM R Controller and the LTM E Expansion Module. The system can be configured and controlled using an HMI (Human Machine Interface) device (Magelis XBT or TeSys T LTM CU), a PC with PowerSuite software, or remotely over the network using a PLC. Components such as external load current transformers and ground current transformers add additional range to the system.
1639504 05/2008
17
Introduction
LTM R Controller
The range includes 6 LTM R controller models using DeviceNet communication protocol. The microprocessor-based LTM R controller is the central component in the system that manages the control, protection and monitoring functions of singlephase and 3-phase AC induction motors. The LTM R controller is designed to work over various fieldbus protocols. This manual focuses only on systems designed to communicate over the DeviceNet protocol.
Functional description current sensing 0.4...100 A single-phase or 3-phase current inputs 6 discrete logic inputs 4 relay outputs: 3 SPST, 1 DPST connections for a ground current sensor connection for a motor temperature sensor connection for network connection for HMI device or expansion module current protection, metering and monitoring functions motor control functions power indicator fault and warning LED indicators network communication and alarm indicators HMI communication LED indicator test and reset function Reference number LTMR08DBD (24 Vdc, 0.4...8 A FLC) LTMR27DBD (24 Vdc, 1.35...27 A FLC) LTMR100DBD (24 Vdc, 5...100 A FLC) LTMR08DFM (100...240 Vac, 0.4...8 A FLC) LTMR27DFM (100...240 Vac, 1.35...27 A FLC) LTMR100DFM (100...240 Vac, 5...100 A FLC)
LTM R controller
LTM E Expansion Module

LTM E expansion module
The range includes 2 models of the expansion module that provide voltage monitoring functionality and 4 additional logic inputs. The expansion module is powered by the LTM R controller via a connector cable.
Functional description Voltage sensing 110...690 Vac 3 phase voltage inputs 4 additional discrete logic inputs additional voltage protection, metering and monitoring functions power LED indicator logic input status LED indicators Additional components required for an optional expansion module: LTM R controller to LTM E connection cable Reference number LTMEV40BD (24 Vdc) LTMEV40FM (100...240 Vac)
18
1639504 05/2008
Introduction
HMI Device: Magelis XBTN410 HMI

Magelis XBT HMI
The system uses the Magelis XBTN410 HMI device with a liquid crystal display and navigation buttons for metering, configuring and operating the LTM R controller. This HMI device is compact in size for door-mounted applications. It must be programmed using XBTL1000 programming software.
Functional description commission the system through menu entries configure the system through menu entries display warnings and faults Additional components required for an optional HMI device: separate power source LTM R/LTM E to HMI communication cable Magelis XBTL1000 programming software Reference number XBTN410 (HMI) XBTZ938 (cable) XBTL1000 (software)
HMI Device: LTM CU Control Operator Unit
The system uses the TeSysT LTM CU Control Operator Unit HMI device with a liquid crystal display and contextual navigation keys. The LTM CU is internally powered by the LTM R. It has a separate Users Manual
Reference number LTM CU VW3A1104R.0 (HMI communication cable) commission the system through menu entries configure the system through menu entries display warnings and faults
LTM CU Control Operator Unit Functional description
Additional components required for an optional HMI device: VW3A8106 (PC communication cable) LTM R/LTM E to HMI communication cable HMI to PC communication cable
PowerSuite Software
PowerSuite software is a Microsoft Windows-based application that enables you to configure and commission the LTM R controller from a PC. You can also use PowerSuite software to modify default logic or create new logic using pre-made function blocks and elements.
Functional description commission the system through menu entries configure the system through menu entries display warnings and faults provide logic customization Additional components required for PowerSuite software: a PC separate power source LTM R/LTM E to PC communication cable Reference number PowerSuite VW3A8106 (PC communications cable)
PowerSuite software
1639504 05/2008
19
Introduction
Current Transformers
External load current transformers expand the current range for use with motors greater than 100 full load Amperes. External ground current transformers measure ground fault conditions. External current transformers expand the current range for use with motors greater than 100 full load Amperes.
Telemecanique current transformers
Primary 100 200 400 800
Secondary 1 1 1 1
Inside diameter mm 35 35 35 35 in 1.38 1.38 1.38 1.38
Reference number LT6CT1001 LT6CT2001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT8001
Note: The following current transformers are also available: Telemecanique LUTC0301, LUTC0501, LUTC1001, LUTC2001, LUTC4001, and LUTC8001.
External ground current transformers measure ground fault conditions.

Merlin Vigirex ground current transformers Gerin Type TA30 PA50 IA80 MA120 SA200 PA300 Maximum current 65 A 85 A 160 A 250 A 400 A 630 A Inside diameter mm 30 50 80 120 200 300 in 1.18 1.97 3.15 4.72 7.87 11.81 Transformation Reference ratio number 1000:1 50437 50438 50439 50440 50441 50442
Lug-lug kit provides bus bars and lug terminals that adapt the pass through wiring windows and provide line and load terminations for the power circuit.
Square D Lug-lug Kit Description Square D Lug-lug Kit Reference number MLPL9999
20
1639504 05/2008
Introduction
Cables
Cable
System components require cables to connect to other components and communicate with the network.
Description Reference number LTM R to LTM E connector cable 40mm (1.57 in) length (closely couples the LTMCC004 expansion module to the left side of the LTM R controller)
LTM R to LTM E RJ45 connector cable 0.3m (11.81 in) length LTM R to LTM E RJ45 connector cable 1.0m (3.28 ft) length
LU9R03 LU9R10
LTM R / LTM E to Magelis HMI device communication cable 2.5m (8.20 ft) XBTZ938 length
LTM R / LTM E to LTM CU HMI device connection cable 1.0 m (3.28 ft) or 3.0 m (9.84 ft) length
VW3A1104R10 VW3A1104R30
PowerSuite cable kit, includes LTM E / LTM R to PC communication cable 1.0m (3.28 ft) length
VW3A8106
1639504 05/2008
21
Introduction
System Selection Guide

Overview This section describes the LTM R controller with and without the optional LTM E expansion module for metering and monitoring, protection, and control functions Metering and Monitoring functions measurement fault and warning counters system and device monitoring faults motor history system operating status Protection functions thermal motor protection current motor protection voltage and power motor protection Control functions control channels (local/remote control source selection) operating modes fault management Metering Functions The following table lists the equipment required to support the metering functions of the motor management system:
Function Measurement Line currents Ground current Average current Current phase imbalance Thermal capacity level Motor temperature sensor Frequency Line-to-line voltage Line voltage imbalance Average voltage Power factor Active power Reactive power X 22 the function is available the function is not available
1639504 05/2008
LTM R controller X X X X X X
LTM R with LTM E X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Introduction Function Active power consumption Reactive power consumption System and Device Monitoring Faults Controller internal faults Controller internal temperature Control command error diagnostic Wiring fault - Temperature sensor connections Wiring fault - Current connections Wiring fault - Voltage connections Configuration checksum Communication loss Time to trip Fault and warning counters Protection fault counts Protection warning counts Diagnostic fault counts Motor control function counts Fault history Motor History Motor starts / O1 starts / O2 starts Operating time Motor starts per hour Motor last start current ratio Motor last start duration System Operating Status Motor running Motor ready Motor starting Minimum wait time X the function is available the function is not available X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X LTM R controller LTM R with LTM E X X
1639504 05/2008
23
Introduction
Protection Functions
The following table lists the equipment required to support the protection functions of the motor management system:
Functions Thermal overload Current phase imbalance Current phase loss Current phase reversal Long start Jam Undercurrent Overcurrent Ground current Motor temperature sensor Rapid cycle lockout Voltage phase imbalance Voltage phase loss Voltage phase reversal Undervoltage Overvoltage Load shedding Underpower Overpower Under power factor Over power factor X the function is available the function is not available LTM R controller X X X X X X X X X X X LTM R with LTM E X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
24
1639504 05/2008
Introduction
Control Functions
The following table lists the equipment required to support the control functions of the motor management system:
Control functions Motor control channels Terminal strip HMI Remote Operating mode Overload Independent Reverser Two-step Two-speed Fault Management Manual reset Automatic reset Remote reset X the function is available the function is not available X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X LTM R controller LTM R with LTM E
1639504 05/2008
25
Introduction
Physical Description of the LTM R Motor Management Controller with DeviceNet Protocol
Overview The microprocessor-based LTM R controller provides control, protection and monitoring for single-phase and 3-phase AC induction motors. The LTM R controller includes internal current transformers for measuring the motor load phase current directly from the motor load power cables or from secondaries of external current transformers.
Phase Current Inputs
Windows for phase current measurement
26
1639504 05/2008
Introduction
Features of the Front Face
The LTM R controller front face includes the following features:

4 5
A1 A2 I.1 C
I.2 I.3
I.4
I.5 C
I.6
97 98 95 96 NC NO
Telemecanique LTMR100DBD
DeviceNet
HMI Comm
Power
Alarm
Fallback
MNS Test / Reset
NO NO NO 13 14 23 24 33 34
Z1 Z2 T1 T2 V+ CAN_H S CAN_L V-
6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Test/Reset button HMI port with RJ45 connector connecting the LTM R controller to an HMI, PC or expansion module Status-indicating LEDs Plug-in terminal: control power, logic Input, and common Plug-in terminal: double pole/single throw (DPST) relay output Plug-in terminal relay output Plug-in terminal: ground fault input and temperature sensor input Plug-in terminal: PLC network
1639504 05/2008
27
Introduction
Test/Reset Button
Function: Fault reset Self-test (See p. 459)
The Test/Reset button performs a fault reset, performs a self test or induces an internal fault, as follows:
Description: Resets all faults that can be reset. See Overview, p. 200 for more information about resetting faults. Performs a self-test if: motor is stopped no faults exist self-test function is enabled. Procedure: Press the button and release within 3 s. Press and hold the button for more than 3 s up to and including 15 s.
Induce a fault
Puts the LTM R controller into internal fault condition. Press and hold the button down for more than 15 s.
HMI Device/ Expansion Module/PC Port
This port connects the LTM R controller to the following devices using an RJ45 connector: an expansion module a PC running PowerSuite PLC programming software a Magelis XBT410 This port provides communication between the LTM R controller and a network PLC via terminal wiring.
Network Port
28
1639504 05/2008
Introduction
LEDs
LED name
LTM R controller LED descriptions:

Describes Appearance flashing yellow off solid green flashing green off Status communication no communication power on, motor off, no internal faults power on, motor on, no internal faults power off or internal faults exist internal or protection fault warning load shed or rapid cycle no faults, warnings, load shed or rapid cycle (when power is on) fallback no power (not in fallback) communication no communication
HMI Comm Communication between LTM R controller and HMI device, PC, or expansion module Power LTM R controller power or internal fault condition
Alarm
Protection warning or fault, or internal fault solid red flashing red 2 X per second flashing red 5 X per second off
Fallback
Indicates communications loss between the LTM R controller and network or HMI control source indicates network status
solid red off red green
MNS
1639504 05/2008
29
Introduction
Plug-in Terminals and Pin Assignments

Terminal block
The LTM R controller has the following plug-in terminals and pin assignments:
Pin
Description supply voltage input (+ / ) the negative of a power supply for DC models, or the grounded secondary of a control power transformer for AC models ( / ) Logic Input 1 Logic Input 2 Logic Input 3 Logic Input 4 Logic Input 5 Logic Input 6 Input common NC contact NO contact
Control Voltage, Logic Input, and A1 Common Source Terminals A2 For information on logic input behavior, see p. 172. I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 C DPST Relay Output Terminals For information on logic output behavior, see p. 173. 9798 9596
Note: The 9798 contacts and the 9596 contacts are on the same relay, so the open/closed status of one pair of contacts is always the opposite of the status of the other pair. LO1: 1314 LO1: 2324 LO1: 3334 NO NO NO connection for external ground fault current transformer connection for embedded motor temperature sensing elements DeviceNet common pin DeviceNet CAN.L pin (dominant low) DeviceNet shield pin DeviceNet CAN.H pin (dominant high) DeviceNet external power supply pin
Relay Output Terminals
Ground Fault Input, Temperature Z1Z2 Sensor Input, and PLC Terminals T1T2 VCAN.L S CAN.H V+
30
1639504 05/2008
Introduction
Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module

Overview The LTM E expansion module extends the functionality of the LTM R controller by providing voltage monitoring and additional input terminals: 3 phase voltage inputs 4 additional discrete logic inputs Note: Logic inputs are externally powered according to input voltage ratings.
LTM E Expansion module LTM E expansion module connected to an LTM R controller
1639504 05/2008
31
Introduction
Front Face
The LTM E expansion module front face includes the following features:.
4
LV1
LV2
LV3
Telemecanique LTMEV40FM
Power I.7 I.8 I.9 I.10 I.7 C7 I.8 C8 I.9 C9 I.10 C10
5 1 2 3 4 5 HMI or PC RJ45 Port Port with RJ45 connector to LTM R controller Status indicating LEDs Plug-in terminal: voltage inputs Plug-in terminal: logic inputs and common
32
1639504 05/2008
Introduction
LEDs
The LTM E expansion module LEDs indicate the following behaviors:

LED name Power Description Power/Fault status Appearance green red off I.7 I.8 I.9 I.10 Logic Input I.7 status Logic Input I.8 status Logic Input I.9 status Logic Input I.10 status yellow off yellow off yellow off yellow off Status power on, no faults power on, faults not powered activated not activated activated not activated activated not activated activated not activated
Plug-in Terminals and Pin Assignments
The LTM E expansion module has the following plug-in terminals and pin assignments:
Terminal block Voltage Inputs Pin LV1 LV2 LV3 Logic Inputs and Common Terminals LI7 C7 LI8 C8 LI9 C9 LI10 C10 Description phase 1 input voltage phase 2 input voltage phase 3 input voltage Logic Input 7 Common for LI7 Logic Input 8 Common for LI8 Logic Input 9 Common for LI9 Logic Input 10 Common for LI10
1639504 05/2008
33
Introduction
34
1639504 05/2008
Metering and Monitoring Functions
At a Glance
Overview The LTM R controller provides measurement, metering, and monitoring in support of the current, temperature and ground fault protection functions. When connected to an LTM E expansion module, the LTM R controller also provides voltage and power measurement functions. This chapter contains the following sections:
Section 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 Topic Measurement System and Device Monitoring Faults Fault and Warning Counters Motor History System Operating Status Page 36 50 63 69 73
1639504 05/2008
35
2.1
At a Glance
Overview
Measurement
The LTM R controller uses these measurements to perform protection, control, monitoring, and logic functions. Each measurement is described in detail in this section. The measurements may be accessed via: a PC with PowerSuite software an HMI device a PLC via the network port.
What's in this Section?
This section contains the following topics:

Topic Line Currents Ground Current Average Current Current Phase Imbalance Thermal Capacity Level Motor Temperature Sensor Frequency Line-to-Line Voltages Line Voltage Imbalance Average Voltage Power Factor Active Power and Reactive Power Active Power Consumption and Reactive Power Consumption Page 37 38 40 41 42 43 43 44 45 45 46 48 49
36
1639504 05/2008
Line Currents
Description The LTM R controller measures line currents and provides the value of each phase in amperes and as a percentage of Full Load Current (FLC). The line currents function returns the rms value in amperes of the phase currents from the 3 CT inputs: L1: phase 1 current L2: phase 2 current L3: phase 3 current The LTM R controller performs true rms calculations for line currents up to the 7th harmonic. Single-phase current is measured from L1 and L3. Line Current Characteristics The line currents function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value A +/- 1 % for 8 A and 27 A models +/- 2 % for 100 A models 0.01A 100 ms
Line Current Ratio Line Current Ratio Formulas
The L1, L2, and L3 Current Ratio parameter provides the phase current as a percentage of FLC. The line current value for the phase is compared to the FLC parameter setting, where FLC is FLC1 or FLC2, whichever is active at that time.
Calculated measurement Line current ratio Formula 100 x Ln / FLC
Where: FLC = FLC1 or FLC2 parameter setting, whichever is active at the time Ln = L1, L2 or L3 current value in amperes
Line Current Ratio Characteristics
The line current ratio function has the following characteristics:

Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value % of FLC See Line Current Characteristics, p. 37 1% FLC 100 ms
1639504 05/2008
37
Ground Current
Description The LTM R controller measures ground currents and provides values in amperes and as a percentage of FLCmin. The internal ground current (Igr) is calculated by the LTM R controller from the 3 line currents measured by the load current transformers. It reports 0 when the current falls below 10% of FLCmin. The external ground current (Igr) is measured by the external ground current transformer. Configurable Parameters The control channel configuration has the following configurable parameter setting:
Parameter Ground Current Mode Ground Current Ratio Setting range Internal External None 100:1 200:1.5 1000:1 2000:1 Other Ratio 165,535 165,535 Factory setting Internal None
Ground CT Primary Ground CT Secondary
1 1
External Ground Current Formula
The external ground current value depends on the parameter settings:

Formula (Ground CT Secondary) x (Ground CT Primary) / (Ground CT Secondary)
Calculated measurement External ground current
38
1639504 05/2008
Ground Current Characteristics

Characteristic Unit Accuracy LTM R 08xxx
The ground current function has the following characteristics:

Value Internal ground current (Igr) External ground current (Igr) A Igr 0.3 A 0.2 A Igr 0.3 A 0.1 A Igr 0.2 A Igr < 0.1 A +/- 10 % +/- 15 % +/- 20 % N/A1 +/- 10 % +/- 15 % +/- 20 % N/A1 +/- 10 % +/- 15 % +/- 20 % N/A1 0.01 A 100 ms 0.01 A 100 ms A the greater of +/- 5 % or +/0.01 A
LTM R 27xxx
Igr 0.5 A 0.3 A Igr 0.5 A 0.2 A Igr 0.3 A Igr < 0.2 A
LTM R 100xxx
Igr 1.0 A 0.5 A Igr 1.0 A 0.3 A Igr 0.5 A Igr < 0.3 A
Resolution Refresh interval
1.. For currents of this magnitude or lower, the internal ground current function should not be used. Instead, use external ground current transformers.
Ground Current Ratio Ground Current Ratio Formulas
The Ground Current Ratio parameter provides the ground current value as a percentage of FLCmin. The ground current value is compared to FLCmin.
Calculated measurement Ground current ratio Formula 100 x ground current / FLCmin
Ground Current Ratio Characteristics
The ground current ratio function has the following characteristics:

Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value 02,000% of FLCmin See ground current characteristics, above. 0.1% FLCmin 100 ms
1639504 05/2008
39
Average Current
Description The LTM R controller calculates average current and provides the value for phase in amperes and as a percentage of FLC. The average current function returns the rms value of the average current. Average Current Formulas The LTM R controller calculates the average current using the measured line currents. The measured values are internally summed using the following formula:
Calculated measurement Average current, 3-phase motor Average current, single-phase motor Formula Iavg = (L1 + L2 + L3) / 3 Iavg = (L1 + L3) / 2
Average Current Characteristics
The average current function has the following characteristics:

Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value A +/- 1 % for 8 A and 27 A models +/- 2 % for 100 A models 0.01 A 100 ms
Average Current Ratio Average Current Ratio Formulas
The Average Current Ratio parameter provides the average current value as a percentage of FLC. The average current value for the phase is compared to the FLC parameter setting, where FLC is FLC1 or FLC2, whichever is active at that time.
Calculated measurement Average current ratio Formula 100 x lavg / FLC
Where: FLC = FLC1 or FLC2 parameter setting, whichever is active at the time lavg = average current value in amperes
40
1639504 05/2008
Average Current Ratio Characteristics
The average current ratio function has the following characteristics:

Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value % of FLC See average current, above. 1 % FLC 100 ms
Current Phase Imbalance

Description The current phase imbalance function measures the maximum percentage of deviation between the average current and the individual phase currents. The current phase imbalance measurement is based on imbalance ratio calculated from the following formulas:
Calculated measurement Imbalance ratio of current in phase 1 (in %) Imbalance ratio of current in phase 2 (in %) Imbalance ratio of current in phase 3 (in %) Current imbalance ratio for 3-phase (in %) Formula Ii1 = (| L1 - Iavg | x 100) / Iavg Ii2 = (| L2 - Iavg | x 100) / Iavg Ii3 = (| L3 - Iavg | x 100) / Iavg Iimb = Max(Ii1, Ii2, Ii3)
Formulas
Characteristics
The line current imbalance function has the following characteristics:

Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value % +/- 1.5% for 8 A and 27 A models +/- 3% for 100 A models 1% 100 ms
1639504 05/2008
41
Thermal Capacity Level

Description The thermal capacity level function uses 2 thermal models to calculates the amount of thermal capacity used: one for copper stator and rotor windings of the motor and the other for the iron frame of the motor. The thermal model with the maximum utilized capacity is reported. This function also estimates and displays: the time remaining before a thermal overload fault is triggered (see Time to Trip, p. 61), and the time remaining until the fault condition is cleared, after a thermal overload fault has been triggered (see Minimum Wait Time, p. 74). Trip Current Characteristics The Thermal capacity level function uses one of the following selected trip current characteristics (TCCs): definite time inverse thermal (default) Thermal Capacity Level Models Thermal Capacity Level Characteristics Both copper and iron models use the maximum measured phase current and the Motor trip class parameter value to generate a non-scaled thermal image. The reported thermal capacity level is calculated by scaling the thermal image to FLC. The thermal capacity level function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value % +/ 1 % 1% 100 ms
42
1639504 05/2008
Motor Temperature Sensor

Description The motor temperature sensor function displays the resistance value in ohms measured by resistance temperature sensor. Refer to the product documentation for the specific temperature sensor being used. One of 4 types of temperature sensors can be used: PTC Binary PT100 PTC Analog NTC Analog Characteristics The motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value +/- 2 % 0.1 500 ms
Frequency
Description The frequency function displays the value measured based on the line voltage measurements. If the frequency is unstable (+/ 2 Hz variations), the value reported will be 0 until the frequency stabilizes. If no LTM E expansion module is present, the frequency value is 0. Characteristics The frequency function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value Hz +/ 2% 0.1 Hz 30 ms
1639504 05/2008
43
Line-to-Line Voltages
Description The line-to-line voltages function displays the rms value of the phase-to-phase voltage (V1 to V2, V2 to V3, and V3 to V1): L1-L2 voltage: phase 1 to phase 2 voltage L2-L3 voltage: phase 2 to phase 3 voltage L3-L1 voltage: phase 3 to phase 1 voltage The expansion module performs true rms calculations for line-to-line voltage up to the 7th harmonic. Single phase voltage is measured from L1 and L3. Characteristics The line-to-line voltages function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value Vac +/- 1 % 1 Vac 100 ms
44
1639504 05/2008
Line Voltage Imbalance

Description The line voltage imbalance function displays the maximum percentage of deviation between the average voltage and the individual line voltages. The line voltage imbalance calculated measurement is based on the following formulas:
Calculated measurement Imbalance ratio of voltage in phase 1 in % Imbalance ratio of voltage in phase 2 in % Imbalance ratio of voltage in phase 3 in % Voltage imbalance ratio for 3-phase in % Formula Vi1 = 100 x | V1 - Vavg | / Vavg Vi2 = 100 x | V2 - Vavg | / Vavg Vi3 = 100 x | V3 - Vavg | / Vavg Vimb = Max (Vi1, Vi2, Vi3)
Formulas
Where: V1 = L1-L2 voltage (phase 1 to phase 2 voltage) V2 = L2-L3 voltage (phase 2 to phase 3 voltage) V3 = L3-L1 voltage (phase 3 to phase 1 voltage) Vavg = average voltage
Characteristics
The line voltage imbalance function has the following characteristics:

Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value % +/- 1.5% 1% 100 ms
Average Voltage
Description The LTM R controller calculates average voltage and provides the value in volts. The average voltage function returns the rms value of the average voltage.
1639504 05/2008
45
Formulas
The LTM R controller calculates average voltage using the measured line-to-line voltages. The measured values are internally summed using the following formula:
Calculated measurement Average voltage, 3-phase motor Average voltage, single-phase motor Formula Vavg = (L1-L2 voltage + L2-L3 voltage + L3-L1 voltage) / 3 Vavg = L3-L1 voltage
Characteristics
The average voltage function has the following characteristics:

Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value Vac +/- 1% 1 Vac 100 ms
Power Factor
Description The power factor function displays the phase displacement between the phase currents and phase voltages.
46
1639504 05/2008
Formula
The Power Factor parameteralso called cosine phi (or cos )represents the absolute value of the ratio of Active Power to Apparent Power. The following diagram displays an example of the average rms current sinusoidal curve lagging slightly behind the average rms voltage sinusoidal curve, and the phase angle difference between the 2 curves: 360 voltage +1 current
t -1 phase angle () After the phase angle () is measured, the power factor can be calculated as the cosine of the phase angle ()the ratio of side a (Active Power) over the hypotenuse h (Apparent Power): +1
h -1 a +1
-1
1639504 05/2008
47
Characteristics
The active power function has the following characteristics:

Characteristic Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value +/- 3 % for cos 0.6 0.01 30 ms (typical) 1
1. The refresh interval depends on the frequency.
Active Power and Reactive Power

Description The calculation of the active power and reactive power is based on the: average rms phase voltage of L1, L2, L3 average rms phase current of L1, L2, L3 power factor number of phases. Active poweralso known as true powermeasures average rms power. It is derived from the following formulas:
Calculated measurement Active power for 3-phase motor Active power for single-phase motor where: Iavg = Average rms current Vavg = Average rms voltage Formula 3 x lavg x Vavg x cos lavg x Vavg x cos
Formulas
The reactive power measurement is derived from the following formulas:

Calculated measurement Reactive power for 3-phase motor Reactive power for single-phase motor where: Iavg = Average rms current Vavg = Average rms voltage Formula 3 x lavg x Vavg x sin lavg x Vavg x sin
48
1639504 05/2008
Characteristics
The active and reactive power functions have the following characteristics:
Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Active power kW +/- 5 % 0.1 kW 100 ms Reactive power kVAR +/- 5 % 0.1 kVAR 100 ms
Active Power Consumption and Reactive Power Consumption

Description The active and reactive power consumption functions display the accumulated total of the active and reactive electrical power delivered, and used or consumed by the load. The active and reactive power consumption functions have the following characteristics:
Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Active power consumption Reactive power consumption kWh +/- 5 % 0.1 kWh 100 ms kVARh +/- 5 % 0.1 kVARh 100 ms
Characteristics
1639504 05/2008
49
2.2
At a Glance
Overview
System and Device Monitoring Faults
The LTM R controller and the expansion module detect faults which affect the LTM R controllers ability to work properly (internal controller check and check of communications, wiring and configuration errors). The system and device monitoring fault records may be accessed via: a PC with PowerSuite software an HMI device a PLC via the network port.

Topic Controller Internal Fault Controller Internal Temperature Control Command Error Diagnostic Wiring Faults Configuration Checksum Communication Loss Time to Trip LTM E Configuration Fault and Warning External Fault Page 51 52 53 57 59 59 61 61 62
50
1639504 05/2008
Controller Internal Fault

Description The LTM R controller detects and records faults that are internal to the device itself. Internal faults can be either major or minor. Major and minor faults can change the state of output relays. Cycling power to the LTM R controller may clear an internal fault. When an internal fault occurs, the Controller Internal Fault parameter is set. Major Internal Faults During a major fault, the LTM R controller is unable to reliably execute its own programming and can only attempt to shut itself down. During a major fault, communication with the LTM R controller is not possible. Major internal faults include: stack overflow fault stack underflow fault watchdog time out firmware checksum failure CPU failure internal temperature fault (at 100 C / 212 F) RAM test error Minor Internal Faults Minor internal faults indicate that the data being provided to the LTM R controller is unreliable and protection could be compromised. During a minor fault, the LTM R controller continues to attempt to monitor status and communications, but does not accept any start commands. During a minor fault condition, the LTM R controller continues to detect and report major faults, but not additional minor faults. Minor internal faults include: internal network communications failure EEPROM error A/D out of range error Reset button stuck internal temperature fault (at 85 C / 185 F) invalid configuration error (conflicting configuration) improper logic function action (for example, attempting to write to a read-only parameter
1639504 05/2008
51
Controller Internal Temperature

Description The LTM R controller monitors its Controller Internal Temperature, and reports warning, minor fault, and major fault conditions. Fault detection cannot be disabled. Warning detection can be enabled or disabled. The controller retains a record of the highest attained internal temperature. For information about the Controller Internal Temperature Max parameter, see p. 72. The maximum internal temperature value is not cleared when factory settings are restored using the Clear All Command, or when statistics are reset using a Clear Statistics Command. Characteristics The Controller Internal Temperature measured values have the following characteristics:
Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value C +/- 4 C (+/- 7.2 F) 1 C (1.8 F) 100 ms
Parameters
The Controller Internal Temperature function includes one editable parameter:

Parameter Controller internal temperature warning enable Setting range Enable Disable Factory setting Enable
The Controller Internal Temperature function includes the following fixed warning and fault thresholds:
Condition Internal temperature warning Internal temperature minor fault Internal temperature major fault Fixed Threshold Value 80 C (176 F) 85 C (185 F) 100 C (212 F) Sets this parameter Controller Internal Temperature Warning Controller Internal Fault
A warning condition ceases when LTM R Controller Internal Temperature falls below 80 C.
52
1639504 05/2008
Block Diagram
Controller Internal Temperature warning and fault: T > 80 C Controller internal temperature warning
T > 85 C
Controller internal temperature minor fault
T > 100 C
Controller internal temperature major fault
T Temperature T > 80 C (176 F) Fixed warning threshold T > 85 C (185 F) Fixed minor fault threshold T > 100 C (212 F) Fixed major fault threshold
Control Command Error Diagnostic

Description The LTM R controller performs diagnostic tests that detect and monitor the proper functionality of control commands. There are 4 control command diagnostic functions: Start Command Check Run Check Back Stop Command Check Stop Check Back Parameter Settings All 4 diagnostic functions are enabled and disabled as a group. The configurable parameter settings are:
Parameters Diagnostic Fault Enable Diagnostic Warning Enable Setting range Yes/No Yes/No Factory setting Yes Yes
1639504 05/2008
53
Start Command Check
The Start Command Check begins after a Start command, and causes the LTM R controller to monitor the main circuit to ensure that current is flowing. The Start Command Check: reports a Start Command fault or warning, if current is not detected after a delay of 1 second, or ends, if the motor is in Run state and the LTM R controller detects current 10% of FLCmin
Run Check Back
The Run Check Back causes the LTM R controller to continuously monitor the main circuit to ensure current is flowing. The Run Check Back: reports a Run Check Back fault or warning if average phase current is not detected for longer than 0.5 seconds without a Stop command, or ends, when a Stop command executes
Stop Command Check
The Stop Command Check begins after a Stop command, and causes the LTM R controller to monitor the main circuit and ensure that no current is flowing.The Stop Command Check: reports a Stop Command fault or warning if current is detected after a delay of 1 second, or ends, if the LTM R controller detects current 5% of FLCmin
Stop Check Back
The Stop Check Back causes the LTM R controller to continuously monitor the main circuit to ensure no current is flowing. The Stop Check Back: reports a Stop Check Back fault or warning if average phase current is detected for longer than 0.5 seconds without a Run command, or ends, when a Run command executes
54
1639504 05/2008
Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Start Command Check and Stop Command Check:
Start Command
Start Command Check
3
Stop Command Stop Command Check
4
Main Circuit Current
1 1 2 3 4 5 6
Normal operation Fault or warning condition The LTM R controller monitors the main circuit to detect current The LTM R controller monitors the main circuit to detect no current The LTM R controller reports a Start Command Check fault and/or warning if current is not detected after 1 second The LTM R controller reports a Stop Command Check fault and or warning if current is detected after 1 second
1639504 05/2008
55
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Run Check Back and Stop Check Back:
Start Command Run Check Back Stop Command Stop Check Back
4
Main Circuit Current
7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 2
Normal operation Fault or warning condition After the motor enters the run state, the LTM R controller continuously monitors the main circuit to detect current until a stop command is given or the function is disabled The LTM R controller continuously monitors the main circuit to detect no current until a Start command is given or the function is disabled The LTM R controller reports a Run Check Back fault and/or warning if the current is not detected for longer than 0.5 seconds without a Stop command The LTM R controller reports a Stop Check Back fault or warning if the current is detected for longer than 0.5 seconds without a Start command No current flowing for less than 0.5 seconds Current flowing for less than 0.5 seconds
56
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Faults
Description The LTM R controller checks external wiring connections and reports a fault, when it detects incorrect or conflicting external wiring. The LTM R controller can detect 4 wiring errors: CT Reversal Error Phase Configuration Error Motor Temperature Sensor Wiring Errors (short-circuit or open-circuit) Enabling Fault Detection
Protection CT Reversal Phase Configuration Motor Temperature Sensor Wiring
Wiring diagnostics are enabled using the following parameters:

Enabling parameters Wiring Fault Enable Motor Phases, if set to single-phase Motor Temperature Sensor Type, if set to a sensor type, and not to None Setting range Yes No single-phase 3-phase None PTC binary PT100 PTC analog NTC analog Factory setting Yes 3-phase None Fault Code 36 60 34 (short circuit) 35 (open circuit)
CT Reversal Error
When individual external load CTs are used, they must all be installed in the same direction. The LTM R controller checks the CT wiring and reports an error if it detects one of the current transformers is wired backwards, when compared to the others. This function can be enabled and disabled.
Phase Configuration Error
The LTM R controller checks all 3 motor phases for On Level current, then checks the Motor Phases parameter setting, The LTM R controller reports an error if it detects current in phase 2, if the LTM R controller is configured for single-phase operation. This function is enabled when the LTM R controller is configured for single-phase operation. It has no configurable parameters.
1639504 05/2008
57
Motor Temperature Sensor Errors
When the LTM R controller is configured for motor temperature sensor protection, the LTM R controller provides short-circuit and open-circuit detection for the temperature sensing element. The LTM R controller signals an error when calculated resistance at the T1 and T2 terminals: falls below the fixed short-circuit detection threshold, or exceeds the fixed open-circuit detection threshold The fault must be reset according to the configured Reset Mode: manual, automatic or remote. Short-circuit and open-circuit detection thresholds have no fault time delay. There are no warnings associated with the short-circuit and the open-circuit detection. Short-circuit and open-circuit detection of the motor temperature sensing element is available for all operating states. This protection is enabled when a temperature sensor is employed and configured, and cannot be disabled. The motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic Unit Normal operating range Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value 156500 at 15 : +/- 10 % at 6500 : +/- 5 % 0.1 100 ms
The fixed thresholds for the open-circuit and short-circuit detection functions are:
Detection function Short-circuit detection Open-circuit detection threshold re-closing threshold re-closing Fixed results for PTC Binary, or PT100, or PTC/NTC Analog 15 20 6500 6000 Accuracy +/ 10 % +/ 10 % +/ 5 % +/ 5 %
58
1639504 05/2008
Configuration Checksum
Description The LTM R controller calculates a checksum of parameters based on all configuration registers. No faults are reported.
Communication Loss
Description The LTM R controller monitors communication through: the network port the HMI port Network Port Parameter Settings The LTM R controller monitors network communications and can report both a fault and a warning when network communications is lost. The network port communications has the following configurable settings:
Parameter Network port fault enable Network port warning enable Network port fallback setting 1 Setting Range Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Hold Run O.1, O.2 off O.1, O.2 on O.1 off O.2 off Factory Setting Enable Enable O.1, O.2 off
1. The operating mode affects the configurable parameters for the network port fallback settings.
HMI Port Parameter Settings
The LTM R controller monitors HMI port communications and reports both a warning and a fault if no valid communication has been received by the HMI port for longer than 7 seconds. The HMI port communication has the following fixed and configurable settings:
Parameter HMI port fault enable HMI port warning enable HMI port fallback setting
1
Setting Range Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Hold Run O.1, O.2 off O.1, O.2 on O.1 off O.2 off
Factory Setting Enable Enable O.1, O.2 off
1. The operating mode affects the configurable parameters for the HMI port fallback settings.
1639504 05/2008
59
Fallback Condition
When communication between the LTM R controller and either the network or the HMI is lost, the LTM R controller is in a fallback condition. The behavior of logic outputs O.1 and O.2 following a communication loss is determined by: the operating mode (see p. 169), and the Network Port Fallback Setting and HMI Port Fallback Setting parameters. Fallback setting selection can include:
Port Fallback Setting Description Hold (O.1, O.2) Run O.1, O.2 Off O.1, O.2 On O.1 On O.2 On Directs the LTM R controller to hold the state of logic outputs O.1 and O.2 as of the time of the communication loss. Directs the LTM R controller to perform a Run command for a 2-step control sequence on the communication loss. Directs the LTM R controller to turn off both logic outputs O.1 and O.2 following a communication loss. Directs the LTM R controller to turn on both logic outputs O.1 and O.2 following a communication loss. Directs the LTM R controller to turn on only logic output O.1 following a communication loss. Directs the LTM R controller to turn on only logic output O.2 following a communication loss.
The following table indicates which fallback options are available for each operating mode:
Port Fallback Setting Hold (O.1, O.2) Run O.1, O.2 Off O.1, O.2 On O.1 On O.2 On Operating Mode Overload Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Independent Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Reverser Yes No Yes No Yes Yes 2-step Yes Yes Yes No No No 2-speed Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Custom Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Note: When you select a network or HMI fallback setting, your selection must identify an active control source.
60
1639504 05/2008
Time to Trip
Description When a thermal overload condition exists, the LTM R controller reports the time to trip before the fault occurs in the Time To Trip parameter. When the LTM R controller is not in a thermal overload condition, to avoid the appearance of being in a fault state, the LTM R controller reports the time to trip as 9999. If the motor has an auxiliary fan and the Motor Aux Fan Cooled parameter has been set, the cooling period is 4 times shorter. Characteristics The time to trip function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value s +/ 10 % 1s 100 ms
LTM E Configuration Fault and Warning

Description The LTM R controller controls the presence of the LTM E expansion module. Its absence will generate a System and Device Monitoring Fault. LTM E configuration fault: If LTM E based protection faults are enabled but no LTM E expansion module is present, this will cause an LTM E configuration fault. It does not have any delay setting. The fault condition will clear when no protection fault requiring an LTM E is enabled, or when the LTM R has been power-cycled with an appropriate LTM E being present. LTM E configuration warning: If LTM E based protection warnings are enabled but no LTM E expansion module is present, this will cause an LTM E configuration warning. The warning will clear when no protection warning requiring an LTM E is enabled, or when the LTM R has been power-cycled with an appropriate LTM E being present.
LTM E Configuration Fault
LTM E Configuration Warning
1639504 05/2008
61
External Fault
Description The LTM R controller has an external fault feature, which detects if an error happened on an external system linked to it An external fault can be triggered by setting a bit in a register (see table below). This external fault is mainly used by custom logic to put the controller into a fault state based on different parameters in the system. An external fault can be reset only by clearing the external fault bit in the register. External Fault Parameter Settings
Parameter External system fault Fault code
Description allows to read Custom logic external fault command parameter Number is 16: External fault set by PCODE
Custom logic external fault command the value is written
62
1639504 05/2008
2.3
At a Glance
Overview
Fault and Warning Counters
The LTM R controller counts and records the number of faults and warnings that occur. In addition, it counts the number of auto-reset attempts. This information can be accessed to assist with system performance and maintenance. Fault and warning counters may be accessed via: a PC with PowerSuite software an HMI device a PLC via the network port.

Topic Introducing Fault and Warning Counters All Faults Counter All Warnings Counter Auto-Reset Counter Protection Faults and Warnings Counters Control Command Errors Counter Wiring Faults Counter Communication Loss Counters Internal Fault Counters Fault History Page 64 64 65 65 66 66 67 67 67 68
1639504 05/2008
63
Introducing Fault and Warning Counters

Detecting Warnings If a warning detection function is enabled, the LTM R controller detects a warning immediately when the monitored value rises above, or falls below, a threshold setting. Each warning parameter contains the total number of warnings that occurred since the Clear All Statistics Command last executed. Detecting Faults Before the LTM R controller will detect a fault, certain preconditions must exist. These conditions can include: the fault detecting function must be enabled a monitored valuefor example, current, voltage, or thermal resistancemust rise above, or fall below, a threshold setting the monitored value must remain above or below the threshold setting for a specified time duration Each fault parameter contains the total number of faults that occurred since the Clear All Statistics Command last executed. Counters When a fault occurs, the LTM R controller increments at least 2 counters: a counter for the specific fault detecting function, and a counter for all faults When a warning occurs, the LTM R controller increments a single counter for all warnings. However, when the LTM R controller detects a thermal overload warning, it also increments the thermal overload warnings counter. A counter contains a value from 0 to 65535 and increments by a value of 1 when a fault, warning or reset event occurs. A counter stops incrementing when it reaches a value of 65,535. When a fault is automatically reset, the LTM R controller increments only the autoresets counter. Counters are saved on power loss. Clearing Counters All fault and warning counters are reset to 0 by executing the Clear Statistics Command.
All Faults Counter

Description The Faults Count parameter contains the number of faults that have occurred since the Clear All Statistics Command last executed. The Faults Count parameter increments by a value of 1 when the LTM R controller detects any fault.
64
1639504 05/2008
All Warnings Counter

Description The Warnings Count parameter contains the number of warnings that have occurred since the Clear All Statistics Command last executed. The Warnings Count parameter increments by a value of 1 when the LTM R controller detects any warning.
Auto-Reset Counter
Description The Auto-Reset Count parameter contains the number of times the LTM R controller attemptedbut failedto auto-reset a fault. If an auto-reset attempt is successful (defined as the same fault not recurring within 60 s), this counter is reset to zero. If a fault is reset either manually or remotely, the counter is not incremented. For information on fault management, see p. 199.
1639504 05/2008
65
Protection Faults and Warnings Counters

Protection Fault Counts Protection function counters include: Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count Current Phase Loss Faults Count Current Phase Reversal Faults Count Ground Current Faults Count Jam Faults Count Long Start Faults Count Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count Over Power Factor Faults Count Overcurrent Faults Count Overpower Faults Count Overvoltage Faults Count Thermal Overload Faults Count Under Power Factor Faults Count Undercurrent Faults Count Underpower Faults Count Undervoltage Faults Count Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count Voltage Phase Loss Faults Count Voltage Phase Reversal Faults Count The Thermal Overload Warnings Count parameter contains the total number of warnings for the thermal overload protection function. When any warning occurs, including a thermal overload warning, the LTM R controller increments the Warnings Count parameter.
Protection Warning Counts
Control Command Errors Counter

Description A Diagnostic Fault occurs when the LTM R controller detects any of the following control command errors: Start Command Check errors Stop Command Check errors Stop Check Back errors Run Check Back errors For information on these control command functions, see Control Command Error Diagnostic , p. 53
66
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Faults Counter

Description The Wiring Faults Count parameter contains the total number of the following wiring faults that have occurred since the Clear Statistics Command last executed: Wiring Fault, which is triggered by a: CT Reversal Error Phase Configuration Error Motor Temperature Sensor Wiring Error Voltage Phase Reversal Fault Current Phase Reversal Fault The LTM R controller increments the Wiring Faults Count parameter by a value of 1 each time any one of the above 3 faults occurs. For information on connection errors and related faults, see Wiring Faults, p. 57.
Communication Loss Counters

Description
Counter HMI Port Faults Count Network Port Internal Faults Count Network Port Config Faults Count Network Port Faults Count
Faults detected for the following communication functions:

Contains The number of times communications via the HMI port was lost. The number of internal faults experienced by the network module, reported by the network module to the LTM R controller. The number of major faults experienced by the network module, exclusive of network module internal faults, reported by the network module to the LTM R controller. The number of times communicaitons via the network port was lost.
Internal Fault Counters

Description
Counter
Faults detected for the following internal faults:

Contains
Controller Internal Faults Count The number of major and minor internal faults. For information on internal faults, see p. 51 Internal Port Faults Count The number of LTM R controller internal communication faults, plus the number of failed attempts to identify the network communication module.
1639504 05/2008
67
Fault History
Fault History The LTM R controller stores a history of LTM R controller data that was recorded at the time of the last 5 detected faults. Fault n-0 contains the most recent fault record, and fault n-4 contains the oldest retained fault record. Each fault record includes: Fault Code Date and Time Value of Settings Motor Full Load Current Ratio (% of FLCmax) Value of Measurements Thermal Capacity Level Average Current Ratio L1, L2, L3 Current Ratio Ground Current Ratio Full Load Current Max Current Phase Imbalance Voltage Phase Imbalance Power Factor Frequency Motor Temp Sensor Average Voltage L3-L1 Voltage, L1-L2 Voltage, L2-L3 Voltage Active Power
68
1639504 05/2008
2.4
At a Glance
Overview
Motor History
The LTM R controller tracks and saves motor operating statistics. Motor statistics can be accessed using: a PC with PowerSuite software an HMI device a PLC via the network port.

Topic Motor Starts Counters Motor Starts Per Hour Counter Load Sheddings Counter Auto Restart Counters Motor Last Start Current Ratio Motor Last Start Duration Operating Time Maximum Internal Controller Temperature Page 70 70 70 71 71 72 72 72
1639504 05/2008
69
Motor Starts Counters

Description The LTM R controller tracks motor starts and records the data as a statistic that can be retrieved for operational analysis. The following statistics are tracked: Motor Starts Count Motor LO1 Closings Count (logic output O.1 starts) Motor LO2 Closings Count (logic output O.2 starts) The Clear Statistics Command resets the Motor Starts Count parameter to 0. Note: The Motor LO1 Closings Count and Motor LO2 Closings Count parameters cannot be reset to 0, because these parameters together indicate the usage of the relay outputs over time.
Motor Starts Per Hour Counter

Description The LTM R controller tracks the number of motor starts during the past hour and records this figure in the Motor Starts Per Hour Count parameter. The LTM R controller sums starts in 5 minute intervals with an accuracy of 1 interval (+0/ 5 minutes), which means that the parameter will contain the total number of starts within either the previous 60 minutes or the previous 55 minutes. This function is used as a maintenance function to avoid thermal strain on the motor. Characteristics The motor starts per hour function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value 5 minutes (+ 0/ 5 minutes) 5 minutes 100 ms
Load Sheddings Counter

Description The Load Sheddings Count parameter contains the number of times the load sheddings protection function has been activated since the last Clear Statistics Command. For information on the Load Sheddings protection function, see p. 140.
70
1639504 05/2008
Auto Restart Counters

Description There are 3 types of counting statistics: Auto restart immediate count Auto restart delayed count Auto restart manual count For information on the Auto restart protection function, see p. 143.
Motor Last Start Current Ratio

Description The LTM R controller measures the maximum current level reached during the last start of the motor and reports the value in the Motor Last Start Current Ratio parameter for analysis of the system for maintenance purposes. This value may also be used to help configure the long start threshold setting in the long start protection function. The value is not stored in the non volatile memory: it will be lost at power cycle. Characteristics The motor last start current ratio function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value % of FLC +/- 1 % for 8 A and 27 A models +/- 2 % for 100 A models 1 % FLC 100 ms
1639504 05/2008
71
Motor Last Start Duration

Description The LTM R controller tracks the duration of the last motor start and reports the value in the Motor Last Start Duration parameter for analysis of the system for maintenance purposes. This value may also be useful in setting the long start delay timeout used in the long start and definite trip overload protection functions. The value is not stored in the non volatile memory: it will be lost at power cycle. Characteristics The motor last start duration function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value s +/ 1 % 1s 1s
Operating Time
Description The LTM R controller tracks motor operating time and records the value in the Operating Time parameter. Use this information to help schedule motor maintenance, such as lubrication, inspection, and replacement.
Maximum Internal Controller Temperature

Description The Controller Internal Temperature Max parameter contains the highest internal temperatureexpressed in Cdetected by the LTM R controllers internal temperature sensor. The LTM R controller updates this value whenever it detects an internal temperature greater than the current value. For information about internal temperature measurement, including the detection of internal temperature faults and warnings, see Characteristics table on p. 52.
72
1639504 05/2008
2.5
At a Glance
Overview
System Operating Status
The LTM R controller monitors the motor operating state and the minimum time to wait to restart the motor. The Motor states can be accessed via: a PC with PowerSuite software an HMI device a PLC via the network port

Topic Motor State Minimum Wait Time Page 74 74
1639504 05/2008
73
Motor State
Description The LTM R controller tracks the motor state and reports the following states by setting the corresponding boolean parameters:
Motor state Run Ready Start Parameter Motor Running System Ready Motor Starting
Minimum Wait Time

Description The LTM R controller tracks the time remaining to restart the motor according to one of the following events: automatic reset (see p. 205) thermal overload (see p. 82) rapid cycle lockout (see p. 124) load shedding (see p. 140) automatic restart (see p. 143) transition time. If more than one timer is active, the parameter displays the maximum timer, which is the minimum wait for the fault response or the control function to reset. Note: Even with an LTM R powered off, time is tracked down for at least 30 mn.
Characteristics
The Minimum Wait Time function has the following characteristics:

Characteristic Unit Accuracy Resolution Refresh interval Value s +/ 1 % 1s 1s
74
1639504 05/2008
Motor Protection Functions
At a Glance
Overview This chapter describes the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller. This chapter contains the following sections:
Section 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Topic Motor Protection Functions Introduction Thermal and Current Motor Protection Functions Voltage Motor Protection Functions Power Motor Protection Functions Page 76 81 126 148
1639504 05/2008
75
3.1
At a Glance
Overview
Motor Protection Functions Introduction
This section introduces you to the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller, including protection parameters and characteristics. This section contains the following topics:
Topic Definitions Motor Protection Characteristics Page 77 79
76
1639504 05/2008
Definitions
Predefined Functions and Data The LTM R controller monitors current, ground-current and motor temperature sensor parameters. When the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module, it also monitors voltage and power parameters. The LTM R controller uses these parameters in protection functions to detect fault and warning conditions.The LTM R controllers response to fault and warning conditions is fixed for the predefined operating modes. Logic output O.4 activates on a fault, and logic output O.3 activates on a warning. For more information about pre-defined operating modes, see p. 169. You can configure these motor protection functions to detect the existence of undesirable operating conditions that, if not resolved, can cause motor and equipment damage. All motor protection functions include fault detection, and most protection functions also include warning detection. Customized Functions and Data In addition to using the protection functions and parameters included in a predefined operating mode, you can use the Custom Logic Editor in PowerSuite software to create a new, customized operating mode. To create a custom operating mode, select any pre-defined operating mode, then edit its code to meet the needs of your application. Using the Custom Logic Editor, you can create a customized operating mode by: modifying the LTM R controllers responses to protection faults or warnings creating new functions, based on either pre-defined or newly created parameters
1639504 05/2008
77
Faults
A fault is a serious undesirable operating condition. Fault-related parameters can be configured for most protection functions. The response of the LTM R controller to a fault include the following: output O.4 contacts: contact 95-96 is open contact 97-98 is closed fault LED is On (steady red) fault status bits are set in a fault parameter a text message is displayed in an HMI screen (if an HMI is attached) a fault status indicator is displayed in the configuration software, if connected. The LTM R controller counts and records the number of faults for each protection function. After a fault has occurred, merely resolving the underlying condition does not clear the fault. To clear the fault, the LTM R controller must be reset. See Fault Management - Introduction, p. 200.
Warnings
A warning is a less-serious, though still undesirable, operating condition. A warning indicates corrective action may be required to prevent a problem condition from occurring. If left unresolved, a warning may lead to a fault condition. Warning-related parameters can be configured for most protection functions. The response of the LTM R controller to a warning include the following: output O.3 is closed fault LED flashes red 2 times per second warning status bits are set in a warning parameter a text message is displayed in an HMI screen (if attached) a warning status indicator is displayed in the configuration software Note: For some protection functions, warning detection shares the same threshold as fault detection. For other protection functions, warning detection has a separate warning threshold. The LTM R controller clears the warning whenever the measured value no longer exceeds the warning thresholdplus or minus a 5% hysteresis band.
78
1639504 05/2008
Motor Protection Characteristics

Operation The following diagram describes the operation of a typical motor protection function. This diagram, and the following diagrams, are expressed in terms of current. However, the same principles apply to voltage.
I I > Is1 Inst Timer I > Is2 Inst T 0 Fault Warning
I Measurement of the monitored parameter Is1 Warning threshold setting Is2 Fault threshold setting T Fault timeout setting Inst Instantaneous warning/fault detection
Settings
Some protection functions include configurable settings, including: Fault threshold: A limit setting for the monitored parameter that triggers a protection function fault. Warning threshold: A limit setting for the monitored parameter that triggers a protection function warning. Fault timeout: A time delay that must expire before the protection function fault is triggered. The behavior of a timeout depends on its trip current characteristic profile. Trip curve characteristic (TCC): The LTM R controller includes a definite trip characteristic for all protection functions, except the Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal protection function, which has both an inverse trip and definite trip curve characteristic, as described below: Definite TCC: The duration of the fault timeout remains a constant regardless of changes in the value of the measured quantity (current), as described in the following diagram:
t
No operation
Delayed operation
Delay
Is
1639504 05/2008
79
Inverse TCC: The duration of the time delay varies inversely with the value of the measured quantity (here, thermal capacity). As the measured quantity increases, the potential for harm also increases, thereby causing the duration of the time delay to decrease, as described in the following diagram:
t
No operation
Delayed operation
Delay
s2
10 x s2
Hysteresis
To improve stability, motor protection functions apply a hysteresis value that is added to or subtracted from limit threshold settings before a fault or warning response is reset. The hysteresis value is calculated as a percentagetypically 5%of the limit threshold and is: subtracted from the threshold value for upper limit thresholds added to the threshold value for lower limit thresholds. The following diagram describes the logic result of measurement processing (Inst) when hysteresis is applied to an upper limit threshold:
I
Is2 (1-d) x Is2 t
Inst 1
hysteresis percentage
80
1639504 05/2008
3.2
At a Glance
Overview
Thermal and Current Motor Protection Functions
This section describes the thermal and current motor protection functions of the LTM R controller. This section contains the following topics:
Topic Thermal Overload Thermal Overload - Inverse Thermal Thermal Overload - Definite Time Current Phase Imbalance Current Phase Loss Current Phase Reversal Long Start Jam Undercurrent Overcurrent Ground Current Internal Ground Current External Ground Current Motor Temperature Sensor Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Binary Motor Temperature Sensor - PT100 Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Analog Motor Temperature Sensor - NTC Analog Rapid Cycle Lockout Page 82 83 88 91 95 98 99 101 103 105 107 108 111 114 115 117 120 122 124
1639504 05/2008
81
Thermal Overload
Overview The LTM R controller can be configured to provide thermal protection, by selecting one of the following settings: Inverse Thermal (default) Definite Time Each setting represents a Trip Curve Characteristic. The LTM R controller stores the selected setting in its Thermal Overload Mode parameter. Only one setting can be activated at a time. See the topics that immediately follow, for information on the operation and configuration of each setting. Parameter Settings The Thermal Overload function has the following configurable parameter settings, which apply to every trip current characteristic:
Parameters Mode Fault enable Warning enable Motor auxiliary fan cooled Setting range Inverse thermal Definite time Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Factory setting Inverse thermal Enable Enable Disable
82
1639504 05/2008
Thermal Overload - Inverse Thermal

Description When you set the Thermal Overload Mode parameter to Inverse Thermal and select a motor trip class, the LTM R controller monitors the motors utilized thermal capacity and signals: a warning when utilized thermal capacity exceeds a configured warning threshold. a fault when utilized thermal capacity continuously exceeds a calculated fault threshold, based on the Motor Trip Class setting.
CAUTION
RISK OF MOTOR OVERHEATING The Motor Trip Class parameter must be set to the thermal heating characteristics of the motor. Refer to the motor manufacturers instructions before setting this parameter. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. There is no time delay for the thermal overload warning. The LTM R controller calculates the Thermal Capacity Level in all operating states. When power to the LTM R controller is lost, the LTM R controller retains the last measurements of the motors thermal state for a period of 30 minutes, permitting it to re-calculate the motors thermal state when power is re-applied. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
1639504 05/2008
83
Reset for Emergency Restart
You can use the Clear Thermal Capacity Level Commandissued from the PLC or an HMIto re-start an overloaded motor in an emergency situation. This command resets the thermal capacity utilization value to 0 and bypasses the cooling period required by the thermal model before the motor can be restarted. This command also resets the Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout to allow an immediate restart without lock. The Clear All command does not perform a Clear Thermal Capacity Level.
WARNING
LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and fire. Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection should be limited to applications where immediate restart is vital. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage. The Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command will not reset the fault response. Instead: only an action external to the LTM R controller (for example, a reduction in the motor load) can clear the fault condition only a reset command, from the valid reset means configured in the Fault Reset Mode parameter, will reset the fault response.
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION A reset command may re-start the motor if the LTM R controller is used in a 2-wire control circuit. Equipment operation must conform to local and national safety regulations and codes. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
84
1639504 05/2008
Operation
The thermal overload inverse thermal protection function is based on a thermal model of the motor that combines 2 thermal images: a copper-based image representing the thermal state of the stator and rotor windings, and an iron-based image representing the thermal state of the motor frame Using measured current and the input motor trip class setting, the LTM R controller considers only the highest thermal stateiron or copperwhen calculating thermal capacity utilized by the motor, as described below:
Heating Cooling
cu
Copper
fe
Iron Copper Iron
Trip
thermal value fe iron tripping threshold cu copper tripping threshold t Time
1639504 05/2008
85
When inverse thermal fault mode is selected, the Thermal Capacity Level parameter indicating utilized thermal capacity due to load currentis incremented during both start and run states. When the LTM R controller detects that the thermal capacity level () exceeds the fault threshold (s), it triggers a thermal overload fault, as described below:
Starting/Running Fault state - cooling Starting/Running Fault state - cooling
Trip
Trip
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. The LTM R controller will clear a thermal overload fault or warning when the utilized thermal capacity falls below 95% of the threshold. Functional Characteristics The Thermal Overload inverse thermal functions include the following features: 1 motor trip class setting: Motor Trip Class 4 configurable thresholds: Motor Full Load Current Ratio (FLC1) Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio (FLC2) Thermal Overload Warning Threshold Thermal Overload Fault Reset Threshold 2 function outputs: Thermal Overload Warning Thermal Overload Fault 2 counting statistics: Thermal Overload Faults Count Thermal Overload Warnings Count 1 setting for an external auxiliary motor cooling fan: Motor Aux Fan Cooled 1 measure of utilized thermal capacity: Thermal Capacity Level Note: For LTM R controllers configured for 2-speed predefined operating mode, 2 fault thresholds are used: FLC1 and FLC2.
86
1639504 05/2008
Block Diagram
I1
I2
Imax
max > s1
I3
motor auxiliary fan cooled

max > 100 %
motor trip class (TC)
Imax maximum current max thermal capacity level s1 thermal overload warning threshold
Parameter Settings
Parameters FLC1, FLC2
The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following configurable parameter settings:
Setting range 0.4...8.0 A in increments of 0.08 A for LTMR08 1.35...27.0 A in increments of 0.27 A for LTMR27 5...100 A in increments of 1 A for LTMR100 10...100 % of thermal capacity 5...30 in increments of 5 50...999 in 1 s increments 35...95 % of thermal capacity 5 120 s 75 % of thermal capacity Factory setting 0.4 A for LTMR08 1.35 A for LTMR27 5 A for LTMR100 85 % of thermal capacity
Warning threshold Motor trip class Fault reset timeout Fault reset threshold
The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following non-configurable parameter settings:
Parameter Thermal overload fault threshold Fixed setting 100 % of thermal capacity
Technical Characteristics
The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following characteristics:
Characteristics Hysteresis Trip time accuracy Value -5 % of thermal overload warning threshold +/ 0.1 s
1639504 05/2008
87
Thermal Overload - Definite Time

Description When you set the Thermal Overload Mode parameter to Definite Time, the LTM R controller signals: a warning when measured maximum phase current exceeds a configurable threshold (OC1 or OC2). a fault when the maximum phase current continuously exceeds the same threshold (OC1 or OC2) for a set time delay. The thermal overload definite time fault includes a time delay of constant magnitude - following a start command - before the protection is active and a fault timeout duration, as described below:
t
Fault - no operation
T2 Delay
T1 I Is
Is Fault and warning threshold (OC1 or OC2) T1 Start command T2 Elapsed time delay
There is no time delay for the thermal overload definite time warning. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. The definite time protection function is disabled following a start by a delay defined by the Long Start Fault Timeout setting. The LTM R controller, when configured for overload predefined operating mode, uses the change in state from off to on level current to begin the Start state. This delay allows the motor to draw current on startup required to overcome the inertia of the motor at rest. Note: Configuration of this protection function requires configuration of the Long Start protection functionincluding the Long Start Fault Timeout parameter.
88
1639504 05/2008
Functional Characteristics
The thermal overload definite time function includes the following features: 2 configurable threshold settings; one setting (OC1) is used for single speed motors, both settings are required for 2-speed motors: OC1(Motor Full Load Current Ratio) or OC2 (Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio) 1 time delay: Overcurrent Time (O-Time, set by the Thermal Overload Fault Definite Timeout parameter) 2 function outputs: Thermal Overload Warning Thermal Overload Fault 2 counting statistics: Thermal Overload Faults Count Thermal Overload Warnings Count
Block Diagram
Thermal overload warning and fault:
I1 I2 I3
Run state
Imax > Is &
Thermal overload warning (Definite time)
Imax
Imax
AND
Imax > Is
Thermal overload fault (Definite time)
I1 I2 I3 Is T
Phase 1 current Phase 2 current Phase 3 current Fault and warning threshold (OC1 or OC2) Fault timeout
1639504 05/2008
89
Parameter Settings
Parameters
The definite time thermal overload function has the following configurable parameter settings:
Setting range 5...100% of FLCmax, in 1% increments. Note: OC1 and OC2 settings can be set directlyin Amperesin the Settings menu of an HMI, or in the Settings branch of PowerSuite software. Factory setting 5% FLCmax
Fault threshold: Motor full load current ratio (OC1) - or Motor high speed full load current ratio (OC2)
Thermal overload fault definite timeout (O-time or 1...300 s in 1 s increments over-current time) Thermal overload warning threshold Long start fault
1
10 s 80 % of OC 10 s
20...800 % of OC in 1 % increments 1...200 s in 1 s increments
timeout1
(D-time)
The definite time thermal overload function requires the simultaneous use of the Long start motor protection function, both of which employ the Long start fault timeout setting.
The definite time thermal overload function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics Hysteresis Trip time accuracy Value -5 % of warning and fault thresholds +/ 0.1 s
Example
The following diagram describes a definite time thermal overload fault:

I Start state Run state Fault condition
OC
O-time (Fault timeout)
t D-time (Long start fault timeout)
OC Fault threshold (OC1 or OC2)
90
1639504 05/2008

Description The current phase imbalance function signals: a warning when the current in any phase differs by more than a set percentage from the average current in all 3 phases. a fault when the current in any phase differs by more than a separately set percentage from the average current in all 3 phases for a set period of time.
CAUTION
RISK OF MOTOR OVERHEATING The Current Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold must be properly set to protect the wiring and motor equipment from harm caused by motor overheating. The setting you input must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes. Refer to the motor manufacturers instructions before setting this parameter. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. Note: Use this function to detect and guard against smaller current phase imbalances. For larger imbalancesin excess of 80% of the average current in all 3 phasesuse the current phase loss motor protection function. This function has 2 adjustable fault time delays: one applies to current imbalances occurring while the motor is in start state, and one applies to current imbalances occurring after startup while the motor is in run state Both timers begin if the imbalance is detected in start state. The function identifies the phase causing a current imbalance. If the maximum deviation from the 3 phase current average is the same for 2 phases, the function identifies both phases. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. The function applies only to 3-phase motors.
1639504 05/2008
91
The current phase imbalance function includes the following features: 2 thresholds: Warning Threshold Fault Threshold 2 fault time delays: Fault Timeout Starting Fault Timeout Running 2 function outputs: Current Phase Imbalance Warning Current Phase Imbalance Fault 1 counting statistic: Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count 3 indicators identifying the phase or phases with the highest current imbalance: L1 Current Highest Imbalance L2 Current Highest Imbalance L3 Current Highest Imbalance
92
1639504 05/2008
Block Diagram
Current phase imbalance warning:
I1
| I1-Iavg | x 100 / Iavg > Is1
I2
| I2-Iavg | x 100 / Iavg > Is1 | I3-Iavg | x 100 / Iavg > Is1
OR
u1
Current phase imbalance warning
I3
Imax
Ln current highest imbalance
Current phase imbalance fault:
I1
| I1-Iavg | x 100 / Iavg > Is2
Start state
& I2
T1
Current phase imbalance fault (motor starting)
| I2-Iavg | x 100 / Iavg > Is2 | I3-Iavg | x 100 / Iavg > Is2
u1
AND Current phase imbalance fault (motor running)
I3
&
OR Run state AND
T2
Imax
Ln current highest imbalance
I1 Phase 1 current I2 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Is1 Warning threshold Is2 Fault threshold Ln Line number or numbers with greatest deviation from Iavg Iavg 3 phase current average T1 Fault timeout starting T2 Fault timeout running
1639504 05/2008
93
Parameter Settings
Parameters Fault enable Fault timeout starting Fault timeout running Fault threshold Warning enable Warning threshold
The current phase imbalance function has the following parameters:

Setting range Enable/Disable 0.2...20 s in 0.1 s increments 0.2...20 s in 0.1 s increments 10...70 % of the calculated imbalance in 1% increments Enable/Disable 10...70 % of the calculated imbalance in 1% increments Factory setting Enable 0.7 s 5s 10 % Disable 10 %
The current phase imbalance function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Hysteresis Trip time accuracy Value -5 % of fault or warning threshold +/0.1 s or +/5 %
Example
The following diagram describes the detection of a current phase imbalance occurring during run state
Fault timeout starting Fault timeout running
Is2
t Start state Run state
I Percentage difference between current in any phase and the 3 phase current average Is2 Fault threshold
94
1639504 05/2008
Current Phase Loss

Description The current phase loss function signals: a warning when the current in any phase differs by more than a 80 % from the average current in all 3 phases. a fault when the current in any phase differs by more than 80 % from the average current in all 3 phases for a set period of time. Note: Use this function to detect and guard against large current phase imbalances in excess of 80% of the average current in all 3 phases. For smaller current imbalances, use the current phase imbalance motor protection function. This function has a single adjustable fault time delay, which is applied when the motor is in start state or run state. The function identifies the phase experiencing a current loss. If the maximum deviation from the 3 current average is the same for 2 phases, the function identifies both phases. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. The function applies only to 3-phase motors. Functional Characteristics The current phase loss function includes the following features: 1 fixed fault and warning threshold equal to 80 % of the 3 phase average current. 1 fault time delay: Current Phase Loss Timeout 2 function outputs: Current Phase Loss Warning Current Phase Loss Fault 1 counting statistic: Current Phase Loss Faults Count 3 indicators identifying the phase or phases experiencing the current loss: L1 Current loss L2 Current loss L3 Current loss
1639504 05/2008
95
Block Diagram
Current phase loss fault and warning: Start state Run state I1
u1
OR & 0 Current phase loss fault
| I1 Iavg | x 100 / Iavg >80%
I2
| I2 Iavg | x 100 / Iavg > 80% | I3 Iavg | x 100 / Iavg > 80%
OR
u1
AND Current phase loss warning
I3
Imax
Ln current phase loss
I1 Phase 1 current I2 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Ln Line current number or numbers with the greatest deviation from Iavg Iavg 3 phase current average T Fault timeout
Parameter Settings
The current phase loss function has the following configurable parameters:
Parameters Fault enable Timeout Warning enable Setting range Enable/Disable 0.1...30 s in 0.1 s increments Enable/Disable Factory setting Enable 3s Enable
The current phase loss function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Hysteresis Trip time accuracy Value 75 % of the 3 phase average current +/0.1 s or +/5 %
96
1639504 05/2008
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a current phase loss fault of a motor in run state
% Fault timeout Fault timeout
80%
%I Percentage difference between current in any phase and the 3 phase current average
1639504 05/2008
97
Current Phase Reversal

Description The current phase reversal function signals a fault when it detects that the current phases of a 3-phase motor are out of sequence with the Motor Phases Sequence parameterABC or ACB. Note: When the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module, phase reversal protection is based on voltage phase sequence before the motor starts, and on current phase sequence after the motor starts. This function: is active when the motor is in start state or run state applies only to 3-phase motors has no warning and no timer. This function can be enabled or disabled. Functional Characteristics Parameter Settings The current phase reversal function adds to one counting statisticWiring Faults Count.
The current phase reversal function has the following configurable parameters:
Parameters Fault enable Phase sequence Setting range Enable/Disable A-B-C A-C-B Factory setting Disable A-B-C
The current phase reversal function has the following characteristics:

Characteristic Trip time at motor startup Trip time accuracy Value within 0.2 s of motor startup +/0.1 s or +/5%
98
1639504 05/2008
Long Start
Description The long start function detects a locked or stalled rotor in start state and signals a fault when current continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for the same period of time. Each predefined operating mode has its own current profile, representing a successful start cycle for the motor. The LTM R controller detects a long start fault condition whenever the actual current profileoccurring after a start command varies from the expected profile. Fault monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. This function has no warning. Start Cycle The configurable parameters for the Long Start protection functionLong Start Fault Threshold and Long Start Fault Timeoutare used by the LTM R controller in defining and detecting the motors start cycle. See p. 165. The long start function includes the following features: 1 threshold: Fault Threshold 1 fault time delay: Fault Timeout 1 function outputs: Long Start Fault 1 counting statistic: Long Start Faults Count
Block Diagram
Long start fault: I1 I2 I3 Iavg Iavg > Is2 Start state AND & T 0 Long start fault
I1 I2 I3 Is2 T
Phase 1 current Phase 2 current Phase 3 current Fault threshold Fault timeout
1639504 05/2008
99
Parameter Settings
The long start function has the following parameters:

Parameters Fault enable Fault timeout Fault threshold Setting range Enable/Disable 1...200 s in 1 s increments 100...800 % of FLC Factory setting Enable 10 s 100 % of FLC
The long start function has the following characteristics:

Characteristic Hysteresis Trip time accuracy Value -5 % of Fault threshold +/ 0.1 s or +/ 5%
Example
The following describes the occurrence of a single threshold cross long start fault:
I
Is2
10% FLCmin Long start fault timeout Fault condition t
Is2 Long start fault threshold
100
1639504 05/2008
Jam
Description The jam function detects a locked rotor during run state and signals: a warning when current in any phase exceeds a set threshold, after the motor has reached run state. a fault when current in any phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a specified period of time, after the motor has reached run state. The jam function is triggered when the motor is jammed during run state and stops, or is suddenly overloaded and draws excessive current. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. Functional Characteristics The jam function includes the following features: 2 thresholds: Warning Threshold Fault Threshold 1 fault time delay: Fault Timeout 2 function outputs: Jam Warning Jam Fault 1 counting statistic: Jam Faults Count
Block Diagram
Jam warning and fault: Imax > Is1 Imax Imax > Is2 Run state AND Run state & AND T 0 Jam warning
I1 I2 I3
&
Jam fault
I1 I2 I3 Is1 Is2 T
Phase 1 current Phase 2 current Phase 3 current Warning threshold Fault threshold Fault timeout
1639504 05/2008
101
Parameter Settings
The jam function has the following parameters:

Parameters Fault enable Fault timeout Fault threshold Warning enable Warning threshold Setting range Enable/Disable 1...30 s in 1 s increments 100...800 % of FLC in 1 % increments Enable/Disable 100...800 % of FLC in 1 % increments Factory setting Enable 5s 200 % of FLC Disable 200 % of FLC
The jam function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Hysteresis Trip time accuracy Value -5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold +/0.1 s or +/ 5 %
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a jam fault.

Is2 Jam fault timeout
Is2 Jam fault threshold
102
1639504 05/2008
Undercurrent
Description The undercurrent function signals: a warning when the 3-phase Average Current falls below a set threshold, after the motor has reached run state. a fault when the 3-phase Average Current falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set period of time, after the motor has reached run state. The undercurrent function is triggered when the motor current falls below the desired level for the driven loadfor example, if a drive belt or shaft has broken, allowing the motor to run free rather than under load. This function has a single fault time delay. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. Functional Characteristics The undercurrent function includes the following features: 2 thresholds: Warning Threshold Fault Threshold 1 fault time delay: Fault Timeout 2 function outputs: Undercurrent Warning Undercurrent Fault 1 counting statistic: Undercurrent Faults Count
Block Diagram
Undercurrent warning and fault: Run state
I1 I2 I3 Iavg
Iavg < Is1
&
AND
Undercurrent warning
Iavg < Is2

Run state
&
AND
Undercurrent fault
Iavg Average current Is1 Warning threshold Is2 Fault threshold T Fault timer delay
1639504 05/2008
103
Parameter Settings
The undercurrent function has the following parameters:

Parameters Fault enable Fault timeout Fault threshold Warning enable Warning threshold Setting range Enable/Disable 1...200 s in 1 s increments 30...100 % of FLC in 1 % increments Enable/Disable 30...100 % of FLC in 1 % increments Factory setting Disable 1s 50 % of FLC Disable 50 % of FLC
The undercurrent function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Hysteresis Trip time accuracy Value -5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold +/ 0.1 s or +/- 5 %
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an undercurrent fault.

Undercurrent fault timeout Is2
Is2 Undercurrent fault threshold
104
1639504 05/2008
Overcurrent
Description The overcurrent function signals: a warning when current in a phase exceeds a set threshold, after the motor has reached run state. a fault when current in a phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of time, after the motor has reached run state. The overcurrent function can be triggered when the equipment is overloaded or a process condition is detected causing current to increase beyond the set threshold. This function has a single fault time delay. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. Functional Characteristics The overcurrent function includes the following features: 2 thresholds: Warning Threshold Fault Threshold 1 fault time delay: Fault Timeout 2 function outputs: Overcurrent Warning Overcurrent Fault 1 counting statistic: Overcurrent Faults Count
Block Diagram
Overcurrent warning and fault: Run state
I1 I2 I3 Imax Imax > Is2 Imax > Is1 &
Overcurrent warning
AND
T 0
&
Overcurrent fault
Run state AND
I1 I2 I3 Is1 Is2 T
Phase 1 current Phase 2 current Phase 3 current Warning threshold Fault threshold Fault timeout
1639504 05/2008
105
Parameter Settings
The overcurrent function has the following parameters:

Parameters Fault enable Fault timeout Fault threshold Warning enable Warning threshold Setting range Enable/Disable 1...250 s in 1 s increments 20...800 % of FLC in 1 % increments Enable/Disable 20...800 % of FLC in 1 % increments Factory setting Disable 10 s 80 % of FLC Disable 80 % of FLC
The overcurrent function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Hysteresis Trip time accuracy Value -5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold +/ 0.1 s or +/ 5%
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overcurrent fault.

Is2 Overcurrent fault timeout
Is2 Overcurrent fault threshold
106
1639504 05/2008
Ground Current
Overview The LTM R controller can be configured to detect ground current: internally, by summing the 3-phase current signals from the secondary of the internal current transformers. externally, by measuring the current delivered by the secondary of an external ground fault current transformer. Use the Ground Current Mode parameter to select either internal or external ground fault protection. Only one of these ground current mode settings can be activated at a time. Parameter Settings The ground current protection function has the following configurable parameter settings, which apply to both internal and external ground current protection:
Parameters Ground current mode Fault enable Warning enable Setting range Internal External Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Factory setting Internal Enable Enable
1639504 05/2008
107
Internal Ground Current

Description The internal ground current function is enabled when the Ground Current Mode parameter is set to Internal and disabled when set to External.
DANGER
IMPROPER FAULT DETECTION Internal ground current function will not protect people from harm caused by ground current. Ground fault thresholds must be set to protect the motor and related equipment. Ground fault settings must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. The internal ground current function sums the current readings from the secondary of the internal current transformers and signals: a warning when the summed current exceeds a set threshold. a fault when the summed current continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of time. The internal ground current function has a single fault time delay. The internal ground current function can be enabled when the motor is in ready state, start state, or run state. When the LTM R controller is operating in custom mode, this function can be configured so that it is disabled during start state, and enabled only during ready state and run state. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
108
1639504 05/2008
The internal ground current function includes the following features: 1 measure of ground current in amperes: Ground Current 1 measure of ground current as a % of FLCmin: Ground Current Ratio 2 thresholds: Warning Threshold Fault Threshold 1 fault time delay: Fault Timeout 2 function outputs: Internal Ground Current Warning Internal Ground Current Fault 1 counting statistic: Ground Current Faults Count
Block Diagram
Internal ground current warning and fault:
I > Is1 I1 I2 I3 I > Is2
Internal ground current warning
Internal ground current fault
I1 Phase 1 current I2 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current I Summed current Is1 Warning threshold Is2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout
Parameter Settings
Parameters
The internal ground current function has the following parameters:

Setting range 0.5...25 s in 0.1 s increments 20...500 % of FLCmin in 1 % increments 20...500 % of FLCmin in 1 % increments Factory setting 1s 30 % of FLCmin 30 % of FLCmin
Internal ground current fault timeout Internal ground current fault threshold Internal ground current warning threshold
1639504 05/2008
109
The internal ground current function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Hysteresis Trip time accuracy Value -5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold +/ 0.1 s or +/5 %
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an internal ground current fault occurring during run state.
Is2
Fault timeout
Is2 internal ground current fault threshold
110
1639504 05/2008
External Ground Current

Description The external ground current function is enabled when: the Ground Current Mode parameter is set to External, and a current transformation ratio is set. When Ground Current Mode is set to Internal, the external ground current function is disabled.
DANGER
IMPROPER FAULT DETECTION Internal ground current function will not protect people from harm caused by ground current. Ground fault thresholds must be set to protect the motor and related equipment. Ground fault settings must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. The LTM R controller has 2 terminalsZ1 and Z2that can be connected to an external ground current transformer. The external ground current function measures ground current delivered by the secondary of the external current transformer and signals: a warning when the delivered current exceeds a set threshold. a fault when the delivered current continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of time. The external ground current function has a single fault time delay. The external ground current function can be enabled when the motor is in ready state, start state, or run state. When the LTM R controller is operating in custom mode, this function can be configured so that it is disabled only during start state, and enabled during ready state and run state. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
1639504 05/2008
111
The external ground current function includes the following features: 1 measure of ground current in amperes: Ground Current 2 thresholds: Warning Threshold Fault Threshold 1 fault time delay: Fault Timeout 2 function outputs: External Ground Current Warning External Ground Current Fault 1 counting statistic: Ground Current Faults Count
Block Diagram
External ground current warning and fault: Igr > Igr s1 Igr Igr > Igr s2 T 0 External ground current fault External ground current warning
Igr Ground current from external ground CT Igr s1 Warning threshold Igr s2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout
Parameter Settings
Parameters
The external ground current function has the following parameters:

Setting range 0.1...25 s in 0.01 s increments 0.02...10 A in 0.01 A increments 0.02...10 A in 0.01 A increments Factory setting 0.5 s 1A 1A
External ground current fault timeout External ground current fault threshold External ground current warning threshold
112
1639504 05/2008
The external ground current function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Hysteresis Trip time accuracy Value -5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold +/ 0.1 s or +/5%
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a external ground current fault occurring during run state.
Igr Start state Run state Fault condition
Igr s2
Fault timeout
Igr s2 External ground current fault threshold
1639504 05/2008
113
Motor Temperature Sensor

Overview The LTM R controller has 2 terminalsT1 and T2that can be connected to a motor temperature sensing element to provide protection for motor windings by detecting high temperature conditions that could lead to damage or degradation. These protections are activated when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to one of the following settings: PTC Binary PT100 PTC Analog NTC Analog Only one of these motor protection sensing elements can be enabled at a time. Note: Motor temperature sensor protection is based in ohms. PTC Binary protection thresholds are pre-set to IEC standards and are non-configurable. PTC Analog and NTC Analog protection functions may require that you scale the resistance value to the corresponding threshold level in degrees, based on the properties of the selected sensing element. When a sensor type is changed, the LTM R controllers motor temperature sensing configuration settings revert to their default values. If a sensor type is replaced with another sensor of the same type, the setting values are retained. Parameter Settings The motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings, which apply to the selected motor temp sensor type:
Parameters Sensor type Setting range None PTC Binary PT100 PTC Analog NTC Analog Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Factory setting None
Fault enable Warning enable
Disable Disable
114
1639504 05/2008
Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Binary

Description The PTC Binary motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to PTC Binary and the LTM R controller is connected to a binary positive temperature coefficient thermistor embedded in the motor. The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals: a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance exceeds a fixed threshold. a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance exceeds the same fixed threshold. The fault and warning conditions continue until measured resistance falls below a separate fixed motor temperature sensor re-closing threshold. Motor temperature sensing fault thresholds are factory pre-set and are not configurable. Fault monitoring can be enabled or disabled. The function is available for all operating states. Functional Characteristics The PTC Binary motor temperature sensor function includes the following features: 2 function output: Motor Temp Sensor Warning Motor Temp Sensor Fault 1 counting statistic: Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count
Block Diagram
Motor temperature sensor fault/warning:
> 2900
Motor temperature sensor fault/warning (PTC Binary)
Temperature sensing element resistance
Parameter Settings
The PTC binary motor temperature sensor function has the following nonconfigurable parameter settings:
Parameter Fault/Warning threshold Fault/Warning re-closing threshold Fixed settings 2900 1575 Accuracy +/ 2 % +/ 2 %
1639504 05/2008
115
The PTC binary motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic Detection time Detection time accuracy Value 0.5...0.6 s +/ 0.1 s
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a PTC binary motor temp sensor fault with an automatic reset:
Run state Fault and warningcondition Run state (resume)
2900 1575
Reset
2900 Fault threshold 1575 Fault re-closing threshold Reset This marks the time after which a reset can be executed. A start command is required before run state can be resumed. In this example, auto-reset has been enabled.
116
1639504 05/2008
Motor Temperature Sensor - PT100

Description The PT100 motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temperature Sensor Type parameter is set to PT100 and the LTM R controller is connected to a PT100 sensor embedded in the motor. The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals: a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured temperature exceeds a configurable warning threshold. a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured temperature exceeds a separately set fault threshold. The LTM R directly measures the temperature with a PT100 sensor. The temperature measured by the PT100 sensor, either in C (default) or in F, is displayed on the HMI or PowerSuite, according to the Motor Temperature Sensor Display Degree CF parameter: The fault or warning condition continues until the measured temperature falls below 95 % of the fault or warning threshold. There is a fixed detection time of 0.5 s to 0.6 s to the motor temperature sensor fault or warning. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. The function is available for all operating states. Note: The temperature is derived from the following equation: T = 2.6042 * R - 260.42, where R = resistance (). Note: To connect a 3-wire PT100 sensor to an LTM R controller, simply do not wire the compensation pin of the 3-wire PT100 sensor.
1639504 05/2008
117
The PT100 motor temperature sensor function includes the following features: 2 configurable thresholds: Motor Temperature Sensor Warning Threshold Degree Motor Temperature Sensor Fault Threshold Degree 2 function outputs: Motor Temperature Sensor Warning Motor Temperature Sensor Fault 1 counting statistic: Motor Temperature Sensor Faults Count 1 display configuration: Motor Temperature Sensor Display Degree CF
Block Diagram
Motor temperature sensor warning:
> s1
Motor temperature sensor warning (PT100)
Motor temperature sensor fault:
> s2
Motor temperature sensor fault (PT100)
Temperature measured by the PT100 sensor s1 Motor temperature sensor warning threshold s2 Motor temperature sensor fault threshold
Parameter Settings
The PT100 motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings:
Parameters Fault threshold degree Warning threshold degree Setting range Factory setting 0...200 C in 1 C increments 0 C 0...200 C in 1 C increments 0 C C
Motor temperature sensor display degree CF C (0) F (1)
The PT100 motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic Hysteresis Detection time Trip time accuracy Value -5 % of Warning threshold and Fault threshold 0.5...0.6 s +/0.1 s
118
1639504 05/2008
Example
The following diagram describes a Motor temperature sensor PT100 fault with automatic reset and an active Run command:
Run state Fault condition Run state (resume)
s2 s3
Reset
s2 Fault threshold s3 Fault re-closing threshold (95% of fault threshold)
1639504 05/2008
119
Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Analog

Description The PTC Analog motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to PTC Analog and the LTM R controller is connected to an analog PTC thermistor embedded in the motor. The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals: a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance exceeds a configurable warning threshold. a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance exceeds a separately set fault threshold. The fault or warning condition continues until the measured resistance falls below 95 % of the fault or warning threshold. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. The function is available for all operating states. Functional Characteristics The PTC Analog motor temperature sensor function includes the following features: 2 configurable thresholds: Motor Temp Sensor Warning Threshold Motor Temp Sensor Fault Threshold 2 function outputs: Motor Temp Sensor Warning Motor Temp Sensor Fault 1 counting statistic: Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count
Block Diagram
> s1
Motor temperature sensor warning (PTC Analog)
> s2
Motor temperature sensor fault (PTC Analog)
Temperature sensing element resistance s1 Motor temperature sensor warning threshold s2 Motor temperature sensor fault threshold
120
1639504 05/2008
Parameter Settings
The PTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings:
Parameters Fault threshold Warning threshold Setting range 20...6500 in 0.1 increments 20...6500 in 0.1 increments Factory setting 20 20
The PTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic Hysteresis Detection time Value -5 % of Warning threshold and Fault threshold 0.5...0.6 s
Detection time accuracy +/0.1 s
Example
The following diagram describes a Motor temperature sensor PTC analog fault with automatic reset and an active Run command:
s2 s3
Reset
s2 Fault threshold s3 Fault re-closing threshold (95% of fault threshold)
1639504 05/2008
121
Motor Temperature Sensor - NTC Analog

Description The NTC Analog motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to NTC Analog and the LTM R controller is connected to an analog NTC thermistor embedded in the motor. The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals: a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance falls below a configurable warning threshold. a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance falls below a separately set fault threshold. The fault or warning condition continues until the measured resistance exceeds 105 % of the fault or warning threshold. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. The function is available for all operating states. Functional Characteristics The NTC Analog motor temperature sensor function includes the following features: 2 configurable thresholds: Warning Threshold Fault Threshold 2 function outputs: Motor Temp Sensor Warning Motor Temp Sensor Fault 1 counting statistic: Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count
Block Diagram
< s1
Motor temperature sensor warning (NTC Analog)
< s2
Motor temperature sensor fault (NTC Analog)
Temperature sensing element resistance s1 Motor temperature sensor warning threshold s2 Motor temperature sensor fault threshold
122
1639504 05/2008
Parameter Settings
The NTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings:
Parameters Fault threshold Warning threshold Setting range 20...6500 in 0.1 increments 20...6500 in 0.1 increments Factory setting 20 20
The NTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics Hysteresis Detection time Detection time accuracy Value + 5 % of Warning threshold and Fault thresholds 0.5...0.6 s +/ 0.1 s
Example
The following diagram describes a Motor temperature sensor NTC analog fault with automatic reset:
s3 s2
Reset
r2 Fault threshold r3 Fault re-closing threshold (105% of fault threshold)
1639504 05/2008
123
Rapid Cycle Lockout

Description The rapid cycle lockout function prevents potential harm to the motor caused by repetitive, successive inrush currents resulting from too little time between starts. The rapid cycle lockout function provides a configurable timer, which begins its count when the LTM R controller detects On Level Currentdefined as 10 % of FLC. At the same time the Rapid Cycle Lockout bit is set. If the LTM R controller detects a Run command before the rapid cycle lockout has elapsed, the: Rapid Cycle Lockout bit remains set LTM R controller ignores the Run command. It prevents the motor from restarting HMI device (if attached) displays "WAIT" LTM R controller Alarm LED flashes red 5 times per second, indicating the LTM R controller has disabled motor outputs thereby preventing an undesirable condition caused by starting the motor LTM R controller monitors the wait timeif more than 1 timer is active, the LTM R controller reports the minimum wait time before the longest timer elapses On power loss, the LTM R controller saves the state of the lockout timer in nonvolatile memory. When the LTM R controller next powers up, the timer restarts its count and again ignores Run commands until the timer completes the timeout. Setting the Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout parameter to 0 disables this function. The Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout setting can be edited when the LTM R controller is in its normal operating state. If an edit is made while the timer is counting, the edit is effective when the timer finishes counting. This function has no warning and no fault. Note: The Rapid Cycle Lockout function is not active when the overload operating mode is selected.
The rapid cycle lockout function includes the following parameters: 1 time delay: Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout 1 status bit: Rapid Cycle Lockout In addition, the Rapid Cycle Lockout function: disables motor outputs causes the LTM R Alarm LED to flash 5 times per second
124
1639504 05/2008
Parameter Settings
The rapid cycle lockout function has the following parameters:

Parameters Rapid cycle lockout timeout Setting range 0...999.9 s in increments of 0.1 s Factory setting 0s
The rapid cycle lockout function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Trip time accuracy Value +/ 0.1 s or +/ 5%
Example
I Rapid cycle lockout timeout
Run commands ignored 10% FLC
Run commands acknowledged
1639504 05/2008
125
3.3
At a Glance
Overview
Voltage Motor Protection Functions
This section describes the voltage motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller. This section contains the following topics:
Topic Voltage Phase Imbalance Voltage Phase Loss Voltage Phase Reversal Undervoltage Overvoltage Voltage Dip Management Load Shedding Automatic Restart Page 127 130 133 134 137 139 140 143
126
1639504 05/2008
Voltage Phase Imbalance

Description The voltage phase imbalance function signals: a warning when the voltage in any composed phase differs by more than a set percentage from the average voltage in all 3 phases a fault when the voltage in any composed phase differs by more than a separately set percentage from the average voltage in all 3 phases for a set period of time Note: A composed phase is the combined measure of 2 phases: L1 + L2, L2 + L3, or L3 + L1. This function has 2 adjustable fault time delays: one applies to voltage imbalances occurring while the motor is in start state, and one applies to voltage imbalances occurring while the motor is in run state, or when the long start time duration expires Both timers begin if the imbalance is detected in start state. Note: Use this function to detect and guard against smaller voltage phase imbalances. For larger imbalancesin excess of 40 % of the average voltage in all 3 phasesuse the voltage phase loss motor protection function. This function is available in start state and run state, when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. The function applies only to 3-phase motors. Functional Characteristics The voltage phase imbalance function includes the following features: 2 thresholds: Warning Threshold Fault Threshold 2 fault time delays: Fault Timeout Starting Fault Timeout Running 2 function outputs: Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault 1 counting statistic: Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count 3 indicators identifying the phase with the highest voltage imbalance: L1-L2 Highest Imbalance L2-L3 Highest Imbalance L3-L1 Highest Imbalance
1639504 05/2008
127
Block Diagram
Voltage phase imbalance warning: Start state
V1
| V1-Vavg | x 100 / Vavg > Vs1
Run state
u1
OR
&
Voltage phase imbalance warning
V2
| V2-Vavg | x 100 / Vavg > Vs1 | V3-Vavg | x 100 / Vavg > Vs1
OR
u1
AND
V3
Vmax
Ln voltage imbalance
Voltage phase imbalance fault:
V1
| V1-Vavg | x 100 / Vavg > Vs2
Start state
& V2
T1
Voltage phase imbalance fault (motor starting)
| V2-Vavg | x 100 / Vavg > Vs2 | V3-Vavg | x 100 / Vavg > Vs2
OR
u1
AND Voltage phase imbalance fault (motor running)
V3
&
Run state AND
T2
Vmax
Ln voltage imbalance
V1 L1-L2 voltage V2 L2-L3 voltage V3 L3-L1 voltage Ln Line number or numbers with greatest deviation from Vavg Vs1 Warning threshold Vs2 Fault threshold Vavg 3 phase voltage average T1 Fault timeout starting T2 Fault timeout running
128
1639504 05/2008
Parameter Settings
Parameters Fault enable Fault timeout starting Fault timeout running Fault threshold Warning enable Warning threshold
The voltage phase imbalance function has the following parameters:

Setting range Enable/Disable 0.2...20 s in 0.1 s increments 0.2...20 s in 0.1 s increments 3...15 % of the calculated imbalance in 1 % increments Enable/Disable 3...15 % of the calculated imbalance in 1 % increments Factory setting Disable 0.7 s 2s 10 % Disable 10 %
The voltage phase imbalance function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Hysteresis Trip time accuracy Value -5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold +/ 0.1 s or +/ 5 %
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a voltage phase imbalance:

V%
Vs2 Fault timeout running
Fault timeout starting
V% Percentage difference between voltage in any phase and the 3 phase average voltage Vs2 Fault threshold
1639504 05/2008
129
Voltage Phase Loss

Description The voltage phase loss function is based on the Voltage Phase Imbalance function and signals: a warning when the voltage in any phase differs by more than a 38 % from the average voltage in all 3 phases. a fault when the voltage in any phase differs by more than 38 % from the average voltage in all 3 phases for a set period of time. This function has a single adjustable fault time delay. Note: Use this function to detect and guard against large voltage phase imbalancesin excess of 40 % of the average voltage in all 3 phases. For smaller voltage imbalances, use the voltage phase imbalance motor protection function. This function is available in ready state, when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module. The voltage phase loss function is available during start state and run state. The function identifies the phase experiencing a voltage loss. If the maximum deviation from the 3 phase voltage average is the same for 2 phases, the function identifies both phases. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. The function applies only to 3-phase motors. Functional Characteristics The voltage phase loss function includes the following features: A fixed fault and warning threshold equal to 38 % of the 3 phase average voltage. A single, adjustable fault time delay: Voltage Phase Loss Timeout 2 function outputs: Voltage Phase Loss Warning Voltage Phase Loss Fault 1 counting statistic: Voltage Phase Loss Faults Count 3 indicators identifying the phase experiencing the voltage loss: L1-L2 Voltage loss L2-L3 Voltage loss L3-L1 Voltage loss
130
1639504 05/2008
Block Diagram
Voltage phase loss fault and warning: V1
| V1-Vavg | > 0.38 x Vavg
Ready state & T 0 Voltage phase loss fault
V2
| V2-Vavg | > 0.38 x Vavg | V3-Vavg | > 0.38 x Vavg
u1
V3
AND OR
Voltage phase loss warning
Vmax
Ln voltage phase loss
V1 L1-L2 voltage V2 L2-L3 voltage V3 L3-L1 voltage Ln Line voltage number or numbers with the greatest deviation from Vavg Vavg 3 phase average voltage T Fault timeout
Parameter Settings
The voltage phase loss function has the following configurable parameters:
Parameters Fault enable Fault timeout Warning enable Setting range Enable/Disable 0.1...30 s in 0.1 s increments Enable/Disable Factory setting Enable 3s Enable
The voltage phase loss function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Hysteresis Trip time accuracy Value 45 % of the 3 phase average voltage +/ 0.1 s or +/ 5%
1639504 05/2008
131
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a voltage phase loss fault of a motor in run state:
%V
40%
Fault timeout
Fault timeout
V% Percentage difference between voltage in any phase and the 3 phase average voltage
132
1639504 05/2008
Voltage Phase Reversal

Description The voltage phase reversal function signals a fault when it detects that the voltage phases of a 3-phase motor are out of sequence, usually indicating a wiring error. Use the Motor Phases Sequence parameter to configure the directionABC or ACBin which the motor will turn. This function: is active when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module is available when the motor is in ready state, start state and run state applies only to 3-phase motors has no warning and no timer. This function can be enabled or disabled. Functional Characteristics Parameter Settings The voltage phase reversal function adds one counting statisticWiring Faults Count. The voltage phase reversal function has the following configurable parameters:
Parameters Fault enable Motor phases sequence Setting range Enable/Disable A-B-C A-C-B Factory setting Disable A-B-C
The voltage phase reversal function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Trip time Trip time accuracy Value within 0.2 s +/ 0.1 s
1639504 05/2008
133
Undervoltage
Description The undervoltage function signals: a warning when voltage in a phase falls below a set threshold. a fault when voltage in a phase falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set period of time. This function has a single fault time delay. Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a percentage of the Motor Nominal Voltage (Vnom) parameter setting. The undervoltage function is available only in ready state and run state, when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. Functional Characteristics The undervoltage function includes the following features: 2 thresholds: Warning Threshold Fault Threshold 1 fault time delay: Fault Timeout 2 function outputs: Undervoltage Warning Undervoltage Fault 1 counting statistic: Undervoltage Faults Count
134
1639504 05/2008
Block Diagram
Undervoltage warning and fault: Ready state Run state
u1
& Undervoltage warning
OR V1 V2 V3 Vmax Vmax < Vs2 Vmax < Vs1
AND
Ready state Run state
&
Undervoltage fault
u1
AND
OR
V1 L1-L2 voltage V2 L2-L3 voltage V3 L3-L1 voltage Vs1 Warning threshold Vs2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout
Parameter Settings
The undervoltage function has the following parameters:

Parameters Fault enable Fault timeout Fault threshold Warning enable Setting range Enable/Disable 0.2...25 s in 0.1 s increments 70...99 % of Motor nominal voltage in 1 % increments Enable/Disable Factory setting Disable 3s 85 % Disable
Warning threshold 70...99 % of Motor nominal voltage in 1 % increments 85 %
1639504 05/2008
135
The undervoltage function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Hysteresis Trip time accuracy Value -5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold +/ 0.1 s or +/ 5 %
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a undervoltage fault.

V
Fault timeout Vs2
Vs2 Undervoltage fault threshold
136
1639504 05/2008
Overvoltage
Description The overvoltage function signals: a warning when voltage in a phase exceeds a set threshold. a fault when voltage in a phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a specified period of time. This function has a single fault time delay. Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a percentage of the Motor Nominal Voltage (Vnom) parameter setting. The overvoltage function is available in ready state and run state, when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. Functional Characteristics The overvoltage function includes the following features: 2 thresholds: Warning Threshold Fault Threshold 1 fault time delay: Fault Timeout 2 function outputs: Overvoltage Warning Overvoltage Fault 1 counting statistic: Overvoltage Faults Count
1639504 05/2008
137
Block Diagram
Overvoltage warning and fault: Ready state Run state
u1
& Overvoltage warning
OR V1 V2 V3 Vmax Vmax > Vs2 Vmax > Vs1
AND
& Ready state Run state OR AND
Overvoltage fault
u1
V1 L1-L2 voltage V2 L2-L3 voltage V3 L3-L1 voltage Vs1 Warning threshold Vs2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout
Parameter Settings
The overvoltage function has the following parameters:

Parameters Fault enable Fault timeout Fault threshold Warning enable Setting range Enable/Disable 0.2...25 s in 0.1 s increments Enable/Disable Factory setting Disable 3s Disable 110 %
101...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in 1 % increments 110 %
Warning threshold 101...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in 1 % increments
The overvoltage function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Hysteresis Trip time accuracy Value -5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold +/0.1 s or +/ 5%
138
1639504 05/2008
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overvoltage fault.

V
Vs2
Fault timeout
Vs2 Overvoltage fault threshold
Voltage Dip Management

Overview When a voltage dip is detected, the LTM R can perform 2 different functions to shed and reconnect automatically the load: Load shedding Automatic restart. Selection is done via the Voltage dip mode parameter:
If Voltage dip mode is... 0 1 2 Then... Nothing happens Load shedding function is enabled Automatic restart function is enabled
Load Shedding and Automatic Restart functions exclude each other.
1639504 05/2008
139
Load Shedding
Description The LTM R controller provides load shedding, which you can use to deactivate noncritical loads if voltage level is substantially reduced. For example, use load shedding when power is transferred from a main utility supply to a backup generator system, where the backup generator system can supply power only to a limited number of critical loads. The LTM R only monitors load shedding when Load Shedding is selected. With the load shedding function enabled, the LTM R controller monitors the average phase voltage and: reports a load shedding condition and stops the motor when voltage falls below a configurable Voltage dip threshold and stays below the threshold for the duration of a configurable load shedding timer, clears the load shedding condition when voltage rises above a configurable Voltage dip restart threshold and remains above the threshold for the duration of a configurable Load shedding restart timer. When the LTM R controller clears the load shedding condition: in 2-wire (maintained) configuration, it issues a Run command to re-start the motor, in 3-wire (impulse) configuration, it does not automatically re-start the motor. In Overload motor operating mode, load shedding conditions do not affect O.1 and O.2 operating states. In Independent motor operating mode, load shedding conditions do not affect O.2 state. If your application includes another device that externally provides load shedding, the LTM R controllers load shedding function should not be enabled. All voltage dip thresholds and timers can be adjusted when the LTM R controller is in its normal operating state. When a load shedding timer is counting at the time it is adjusted, the new duration time does not become effective until the timer expires. This function is available only when your application includes an LTM E expansion module.
140
1639504 05/2008
The load shedding function includes the following features: 2 thresholds: Voltage Dip Threshold Voltage Dip Restart Threshold 2 time delays: Load Shedding Timeout Voltage Dip Restart Timeout 1 status flag Load Shedding 1 counting statistic: Load Sheddings Count In addition, the load shedding function: disables logic outputs O.1 and O.2 causes the alarm LED to flash 5 times per second
Parameter Settings
The load shedding function has the following parameters:

Parameters Voltage dip mode Setting range 0 = None 1 = Load shedding 2 = Auto restart 1...9999 s in increments of 1 s 50...115 % of Motor nominal voltage 1...9999 s in increments of 1 s 65...115 % of Motor nominal voltage Factory setting 0 = None
Load shedding timeout Voltage dip threshold Voltage dip restart timeout Voltage dip restart threshold
10 s 70 % 2s 90 %
The load shedding function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Trip time accuracy Value +/ 0.1 s or +/ 5%
1639504 05/2008
141
Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the load shedding function, for a 2-wire configuration with automatic restart:
Vavg
Voltage dip restart threshold Voltage dip threshold t
Load shedding timeout Voltage dip restart timeout
Load shedding bit Motor On
1 2 3
Motor running Load shed; motor stopped Load shed cleared; motor auto-restart (2-wire operation)
142
1639504 05/2008
Automatic Restart
Description The LTM R controller provides automatic restart. With the automatic restart function enabled, the LTM R controller monitors the instantaneous phase voltage and detects voltage dip conditions. The voltage dip detection shares some parameters with the Load shedding function. 3 restart sequences are managed by the function according to the duration of the voltage dip: Immediate restart: the motor restarts automatically. Delayed restart: the motor restarts automatically after a timeout. Manual restart: the motor restarts manually. A Run command is necessary. All automatic restart timers can be adjusted when the LTM R controller is in its normal operating state. When an automatic restart timer is counting at the time it is adjusted, the new duration time does not become effective until the timer expires. This function is available only when your application includes an LTM E expansion module. Functional Characteristics The automatic restart function includes the following features: 3 time delays: Auto Restart Immediate Timeout Auto Restart Delayed Timeout Voltage Dip Restart Timeout 5 status flags: Voltage Dip Detection: the LTM R is in a dip condition Voltage Dip Occurred: a dip has been detected in the last 4.5 seconds Auto Restart Immediate Condition Auto Restart Delayed Condition Auto Restart Manual Condition 3 counting statistics: Auto Restart Immediate Count Auto Restart Delayed Count Auto Restart Manual Count
1639504 05/2008
143
Parameter Settings
Parameters Voltage dip mode
The automatic restart function has the following parameters:

Setting range 0 = None 1 = Load shedding 2 = Auto restart 50...115 % of Motor nominal voltage 65...115 % of Motor nominal voltage 0...0.4 s in increments of 0. 1 s 0...300 s: timeout setting in increments of 1 s 301 s: timeout infinite 0...9999 s in increments of 1 s Factory setting 0 = None
Voltage dip threshold Voltage dip restart threshold Auto restart immediate timeout Auto restart delayed timeout Voltage dip restart timeout
65 % 90 % 0.2 s 4s 2s
The automatic restart function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Timing accuracy Value +/ 0.1 s or +/ 5%
Automatic Restart Behavior
The automatic restart behavior is characterized by the voltage dip duration, that is the amount of time passed from the voltage loss until the voltage restoration. The 2 possible settings are: immediate restart timeout, delayed restart timeout (with delay defined by Restart Delay Time). The following diagram shows the automatic restart phases:
Immediate Restart Auto restart immediate timeout Delayed Restart Manual Restart
Auto restart delayed timeout
If the voltage dip duration is less than the immediate restart timeout and if the voltage dip is the second one occurring within 1 second, then the motor will require a delayed restart. When a delayed restart is active (the delay timer is running): the timer is paused for the duration of the dip if a voltage dip occurs, the delayed restart is cancelled if a start or stop command occurs.
144
1639504 05/2008
Timing Sequence Immediate Restart

Voltage Dip Detection
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence when an immediate restart occurs:
1 0 1 0 1 0
Voltage Dip Occurred
Immediate Restart
Delayed Restart
Manual Restart Auto Restart Immediate Timeout Auto Restart Timeout Output Delayed
0 1 0 1 0 1
Motor Current
1 0
1 2 3
Motor running Voltage dip detected, motor stopped Voltage dip cleared, motor automatic restart
1639504 05/2008
145
Timing Sequence Delayed Restart

The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence when a delayed restart occurs:
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Immediate Restart
Delayed Restart
Manual Restart Auto Restart Immediate Timeout Auto Restart Timeout Delayed
0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Voltage Dip Restart Timeout
Output
1 0 1 0
Motor Current
1 2 3
146
1639504 05/2008
Timing Sequence Manual Restart

The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence when a manual restart occurs:
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Immediate Restart
Delayed Restart
Manual Restart Auto Restart Immediate Timeout Auto Restart Timeout Delayed
Run Command
1 0 1 0 1 0
Output
Motor Current
1 2 3
1639504 05/2008
147
3.4
At a Glance
Overview
Power Motor Protection Functions
This section describes the power motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller. This section contains the following topics:
Topic Underpower Overpower Under Power Factor Over Power Factor Page 149 151 153 155
148
1639504 05/2008
Underpower
Description The underpower function signals: a warning when the value of active power falls below a set threshold. a fault when the value of active power falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set period of time. This function has a single fault time delay. Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a percentage of the Motor Nominal Power parameter setting (Pnom). The underpower function is available only in run state, when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. Functional Characteristics The underpower function includes the following features: 2 thresholds: Underpower Warning Threshold Underpower Fault Threshold 1 fault time delay: Underpower Fault Timeout 2 function outputs: Underpower Warning Underpower Fault 1 counting statistic: Underpower Faults Count
Block Diagram
Underpower warning and fault: Run state
& Vavg Iavg Power Factor P P < Ps2 & T 0 P < Ps1
Underpower warning
AND
Underpower fault
Run state AND
Vavg Average rms voltage Iavg Average rms current P Power Ps1 Warning threshold Ps2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout
1639504 05/2008
149
Parameter Settings
Parameters Fault enable Fault timeout Fault threshold Warning enable Warning threshold
The underpower function has the following parameters:

Setting range Enable/Disable 1...100 s in 1 s increments 20...800 % of Motor nominal power in 1 % increments Enable/Disable 20...800 % of Motor nominal power in 1 % increments Factory setting Disable 60 s 20 % Disable 30 %
The underpower function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Hysteresis Accuracy Value -5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold +/ 5%
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an underpower fault.

P
Fault timeout Ps2
Ps2 Underpower fault threshold
150
1639504 05/2008
Overpower
Description The overpower function signals: a warning when the value of active power exceeds a set threshold. a fault when the value of active power exceeds a separately set threshold and remains above that threshold for a set period of time. This function has a single fault time delay. Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a percentage of the Motor Nominal Power parameter setting (Pnom). The overpower function is available only in run state, when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. Functional Characteristics The overpower function includes the following features: 2 thresholds: Overpower Warning Threshold Overpower Fault Threshold 1 fault time delay: Overpower Fault Timeout 2 function outputs: Overpower Warning Overpower Fault 1 counting statistic: Overpower Faults Count
Block Diagram
Overpower warning and fault: Run state P > Ps1 P P > Ps2 & Run state AND T 0 Overpower fault & AND Overpower warning
Vavg Iavg Power Factor
Vavg Average rms voltage Iavg Average rms current P Power Ps1 Warning threshold Ps2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout
1639504 05/2008
151
Parameter Settings
The overpower function has the following parameters:

Parameters Fault enable Fault timeout Fault threshold Warning enable Setting range Enable/Disable 1...100 s in 1 s increments Enable/Disable Factory setting Disable 60 s Disable
20...800 % of Motor nominal power in 1 % increments 150 %
Warning threshold 20...800 % of Motor nominal power in 1 % increments 150 %
The overpower function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Hysteresis Accuracy Value -5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold +/ 5 %
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overpower fault.

P
Ps2
Fault timeout
Ps2 Overpower fault threshold
152
1639504 05/2008
Under Power Factor

Description The under power factor protection function monitors the value of the power factor and signals: a warning when the value of the power factor falls below a set threshold. a fault when the value of the power factor falls below a separately set threshold and remains below that threshold for a set period of time. This function has a single fault time delay. The under power factor protection function is available only in run state, when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. Functional Characteristics The under power factor function includes the following features: 2 thresholds: Under Power Factor Warning Threshold Under Power Factor Fault Threshold 1 fault time delay: Under Power Factor Fault Timeout 2 function outputs: Under Power Factor Warning Under Power Factor Fault 1 counting statistic: Under Power Factor Faults Count
Block Diagram
Under power factor warning:
Run state & cos < coss1 AND Under power factor warning
Power Factor
Under power factor fault: Power Factor cos < coss2 & Run state AND T 0 Under power factor fault
coss1 Under power factor warning threshold coss2 Under power factor fault threshold T Under power factor fault timeout
1639504 05/2008
153
Parameter Settings
The under power factor function has the following parameters:

Parameters Fault enable Fault timeout Fault threshold Warning enable Warning threshold Setting range Enable/Disable 1...25 s in 0.1 s increments 0...1 x Power factor in 0.01 increments Enable/Disable 0...1 x Power factor in 0.01 increments Factory setting Disable 10 s 0.60 Disable 0.60
The under power factor function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Hysteresis Accuracy Trip time accuracy Value -5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold +/2 or +/ 3 % (for Power Factors > 0.6) +/ 0.1 s or +/ 5 %
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an under power factor fault.
cos
coss2 Fault timeout
coss2 under power factor fault threshold
154
1639504 05/2008
Over Power Factor

Description The over power factor protection function monitors the value of the power factor and signals: a warning when the value of the power factor exceeds a set threshold. a fault when the value of the power factor exceeds a separately set threshold and remains above that threshold for a set period of time. This function has a single fault time delay. The over power factor protection function is available only in run state, when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled. Functional Characteristics The over power factor function includes the following features: 2 thresholds: Over Power Factor Warning Threshold Over Power Factor Fault Threshold 1 fault time delay: Over Power Factor Fault Timeout 2 function outputs: Over Power Factor Warning Over Power Factor Fault 1 counting statistic: Over Power Factor Faults Count
Block Diagram
Over power factor warning:
Run state & cos > coss1 AND Over power factor warning
Power Factor
Over power factor fault: Power Factor cos > coss2 & Run state AND T 0 Over power factor fault
coss1 Over power factor warning threshold coss2 Over power factor fault threshold T Over power factor fault timeout
1639504 05/2008
155
Parameter Settings
The over power factor function has the following parameters:

Parameters Fault enable Fault timeout Fault threshold Warning enable Warning threshold Setting range Enable/Disable 1...25 s in 0.1 s increments 0...1 x Power factor in 0.01 increments Enable/Disable 0...1 x Power factor in 0.01 increments Factory setting Disable 10 s 0.90 Disable 0.90
The over power factor function has the following characteristics:

Characteristics Hysteresis Accuracy Trip time accuracy Value -5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold +/ 2 or +/ 3 % (for Power Factors > 0.6) +/0.1 s or +/ 5 %
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an over power factor fault.
cos
coss2 fault timeout
coss2 over power factor fault threshold
156
1639504 05/2008
Motor Control Functions
At a Glance
Overview The topics in this chapter describe the LTM R controllers operating states which determine the operating modes, and the fault reset mode (manual, remote, automatic). This chapter also introduces custom operating mode, which you can use to either tailor a predefined control program or create a new program to meet the needs of your specific application. What's in this Chapter? This chapter contains the following sections:
Section 4.1 4.2 4.3 Topic Control Channels and Operating States Operating Modes Fault Management Page 158 169 199
1639504 05/2008
157
4.1
At a Glance
Overview
Control Channels and Operating States
This section describes: how to configure control of the LTM R controller outputs, and the LTM R controllers operating states, including: how the LTM R controller transitions between operating states during startup, and the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller in each operating state
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems. Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program, install, alter and apply this product. Follow all local and national safety codes and standards. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Topic Control Channels Operating States Start Cycle Page 159 162 165
158
1639504 05/2008
Control Channels
Overview The LTM R can be configured for 1 control channel out of 3: Terminal strip: Input devices wired to the input terminals on the front face of the LTM R controller HMI: An HMI device connected to the LTM R controllers HMI port Network: A network PLC connected to the controller network port. You can easily select between 2 control channels, assigning one channel to be the local control source and the second channel to be the remote control source. The possible channel assignments are:
Control channel Terminal strip (default) HMI Network Local Yes Yes No Remote Only with an LTM CU present Only with an LTM CU present Yes
Control Channel Selection
In local control, the control channel selection (Terminal strip or HMI) is determined by setting the Control local channel setting in the Control setting register. In remote control, the control channel selection is always Network, unless an LTM CU is present. In this case, the control channel selection is determined by setting the Control remote channel setting in the Control setting register. If an LTM CU is present, the logic input I.6 and the local/remote button on the LTM CU are used together to select between local and remote control source:
Logic input I.6 Inactive Active LTM CU local/remote status Local Remote (or not present) Active control source Local Local Remote
Note: The Network control channel is always considered as 2-wire control, regardless of the operating mode selected. In 3-wire mode, Stop commands can be disabled using bits 11-12 of register 683. In 2-wire mode, Stop commands given by the non-controlling channel shall always be ignored. Run commands from a channel other than the selected control channel shall be ignored. For a predefined operating mode, only one control source may be enabled to direct the outputs. You can use the custom logic editor to add one or more additional control sources.
1639504 05/2008
159
Terminal Strip
In Terminal Strip control, the LTM R controller commands its outputs according to the state of its inputs. This is the default control channel setting when logic input I.6 is inactive. The following conditions apply to Terminal Strip control channel: Any terminal inputs assigned to start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor operating mode. HMI and network start commands are ignored.
HMI
In HMI control, the LTM R controller commands its outputs in response to start and stop commands received from an HMI device connected to the HMI port. The following conditions apply to HMI control channel: Any HMI start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor operating mode. Network start commands and terminal strip start commands are ignored.
Network
In Network control, a remote PLC sends commands to the LTM R controller through the network communication port. The following conditions apply to Network control channel: Any network start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor operating mode. The HMI unit can read (but not write) the LTM R controller parameters.
Control Transfer Mode
Select the Control Transfer Mode parameter to enable bumpless transfer when changing the control channel; clear this parameter to enable bump transfer. The configuration setting for this parameter determines the behavior of logic outputs O.1 and O.2, as follows:
LTM R controller behavior when changing control channel Logic outputs O.1 and O.2 open (if closed) or remain open (if already open) until the next valid signal occurs. The motor stops. Note: In overload predefined operating mode, logic outputs O.1 and O.2 are user-defined and therefore may not be affected by a Bump transfer. Logic outputs O.1 and O.2 are not affected and remain in their original position until the next valid signal occurs. The motor does not stop.
Control Transfer Mode setting Bump
Bumpless
Note: The selection of the transfer mode (Bump or Bumpless) only applies to transfer from Remote to Local control. The transfer mode from Local to Remote shall always be bumpless, regardless of the transfer mode selected.
160
1639504 05/2008
CAUTION
FAILURE TO STOP AND RISK OF UNINTENDED OPERATION LTM R controller operation cannot be stopped from the terminals when control channel is changed to Terminal Strip control channel if the LTM R controller is: operating in Overload operating mode - and configured in Bumpless -and operated over a network using Network control channel -and operating in Run state - and configured for 3-wire (impulse) control. See instructions below. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. Whenever control channel is changed to Terminal Strip control channel, operation of the LTM R controller cannot be stopped from the terminals because no terminal input is assigned to a STOP command. If this behavior is not intended, the control channel must be changed to either Network control channel or HMI control channel to command a STOP. To implement this change, take one of the following precautionary steps: the commissioner should configure the LTM R controller for either bump transfer of control channel or 2-wire control the installer should provide the LTM R controller with a means of interrupting current to the contactor coil - for example, a push button station wired in series with the LTM R controller outputs the controls engineer should assign a terminal input to disable the Run command using Custom Configuration Mode assignments. Fallback Transitions The LTM R controller enters a fallback state when communication with the control source is lost, and exits the fallback state when communication is restored. The transition into and out of the fallback state is as follows:
Transition Entering the fallback state Exiting the fallback state Control source transfer bumpless, when the Control Direct Transition bit is on determined by the settings for Control Transfer Mode (bump or bumpless) and Control Direct Transition (on or off)
For information on how to configure communications fallback parameters, refer to the topic Communication Loss (see p. 60).
1639504 05/2008
161
Operating States
Introduction The LTM R controller responds to the state of the motor and provides control, monitoring and protection functions appropriate to each of the motors operating states. A motor can have many operating states. Some operating states are persistent while others are transitional. A motors primary operating states are:
Operating state Ready Description The motor is stopped. The LTM R controller: detects no fault is not performing load shedding is not counting down the rapid cycle timer is ready to start The motor is stopped. The LTM R controller: detects a fault is performing load shedding is counting down the rapid cycle timer The motor starts. The LTM R controller: detects that current has reached the On Level Current threshold detects that current has not both crossed and re-crossed the long start fault threshold continues to count down the long start fault timer. The motor is running. The LTM R controller detects that current has both crossed and re-crossed the long start fault threshold before the LTM R controller fully counted down the long start fault timer.
Not Ready
Start
Run
162
1639504 05/2008
Operating State Chart
The operating states of the LTM R controller firmwareas the motor progresses from Off to Run stateare described below. The LTM R controller verifies current in each operating state. The LTM R controller can transition to an internal fault condition from any operating state.
System Config (initial state)
Yes
Yes
Config needed?
Config complete? No fault, no load shed, rapid cycle timer expired?
Config needed?
Yes
Yes
Not Ready Fault or load shed?
Ready
Yes Yes
Iavg < 5%FLCmin?
Iavg > 10% FLCmin?
Yes
Start
Start complete?
Yes
Run
1639504 05/2008
163
Protection Monitoring by Operating States

Protection Category Diagnostic
The motor operating statesand the fault and warning protections provided by the LTM R controller while the motor is in each operating state (denoted with an X)are described below. It can transition to an internal fault condition from any operating state.
Monitored Fault/Warning Run Command Check Stop Command Check Run Check Back Stop Check Back Operating states Sys Config Ready X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Not Ready X X X X X X X X X X X X Start X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Run X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Wiring / configuration errors
PTC connection CT Reversal Voltage Phase Loss Phase Configuration
Internal faults Motor temp sensor
Minor Major PTC Binary PT100 PTC Analog NTC Analog
Thermal overload Current
Definite Inverse Thermal Long Start Jam Current Phase Imbalance Current Phase Loss Overcurrent Undercurrent Ground Fault (Internal) Ground Fault (External)
Voltage
Overvoltage Level Undervoltage Level Voltage Phase Imbalance
Power / Power Factor
Over Power Factor Level Under Power Factor Level Overpower Level Underpower Level
X. Monitored . Not monitored
164
1639504 05/2008
Start Cycle
Description The start cycle is the time period allowed for the motor to reach its normal FLC level. The LTM R controller measures the start cycle in seconds, beginning when it detects On Level Currentdefined as maximum phase current equal to 10% of FLC. During the start cycle, the LTM R controller compares: detected current against the configurable Long Start Fault Threshold parameter, and elapsed start cycle time against the configurable Long Start Fault Timeout parameter. There are 3 start cycle scenarios, each based on the number of times0, 1or 2 maximum phase current crosses the Long Start Fault Threshold. A description of each scenario is described below. For information on the statistics the LTM R controller retains describing motor starts, see Main Menu - Statistics (1-to-1), p. 302. For information about the long start protection function, see p. 99. Start Cycle Operating States
Step Event 1 2 3 4 5 LTM R controller receives a start command input signal. The LTM R controller confirms that all startup preconditions exist (e.g. no faults, load shedding, or rapid cycle timer). The LTM R controller closes the appropriate output contacts designated as terminals 1314 or 23-24, thereby closing the control circuit of the motor starting contactors. The LTM R controller detects that current rises above and then falls below the Long Start Fault Threshold before the Long Start Fault Timeout timer expires.
During the start cycle, the LTM R controller transitions through the motors operating states as follows:
Operating state Ready Ready Ready
The LTM R controller detects that maximum phase current exceeds the On Level Current threshold. Start Run
1639504 05/2008
165
2 Threshold Crosses
In this start cycle scenario, the start cycle executes successfully: Current rises above, then drops below, the fault threshold. The LTM R controller reports the actual start cycle time, i.e. the time elapsed from detection of On Level Current until the maximum phase current drops below the fault threshold. Start cycle with 2 threshold crosses, single step:
I
Is
Start time Long start fault timeout t Ready state Start state Run state
10% FLC
Is Long start fault threshold
Start cycle with 2 threshold crosses, 2 step:

Adjustable transition timer I
First step
Second step
Is
Start time 10% FLC Long start fault timeout t Ready state Start state Run state
166
1639504 05/2008
1 Threshold Cross
In this start cycle scenario, the start cycle fails: Current rises above, but fails to drop below, the Long Start Fault Threshold. If Long Start protection is enabled, the LTM R controller signals a fault when the Long Start Fault Timeout is reached If Long Start protection is disabled, the LTM R controller does not signal a fault and the run cycle begins after the Long Start Fault Timeout has expired. Other motor protection functions begin their respective duration times after the Long Start Fault Timeout. The LTM R controller reports start cycle time as 9999, indicating that current exceeded and remained above the fault threshold. The LTM R controller reports the maximum current detected during the start cycle. Start cycle with 1 threshold cross:
I
Is
10% FLC
Start time Long start fault timeout t Ready state Start state Fault condition
1639504 05/2008
167
0 Threshold Cross
In this start cycle scenario, the start cycle fails: Current never rises above the fault threshold. If Long Start protection is enabled, the LTM R controller signals a fault when the Long Start Fault Timeout is reached If Long Start protection is disabled, the LTM R controller does not signal a fault and the run cycle begins after the Long Start Fault Timeout has expired. Other motor protection functions begin their respective duration times after the Long Start Fault Timeout. The LTM R controller reports both the start cycle time and the maximum current detected during start cycle as 0000, indicating current never reached the fault threshold. Start cycle with 0 threshold crosses:
I
Is
10% FLC
Start time Long start fault timeout t Ready state Start state Fault condition
Is Long start fault threshold
168
1639504 05/2008
4.2
At a Glance
Overview
Operating Modes
The LTM R controller can be configured to 1 of 10 predefined operating modes. Selecting custom operating mode allows you to select one of the 10 predefined operating modes and tailor it to your specific application, or to create an entirely new control program. The selection of a predefined operating mode determines the behavior of all LTM R controller inputs and outputs. Each predefined operating mode selection includes a control wiring selection: 2-wire (maintained), or 3-wire (impulse)

Topic Control Principles Predefined Operating Modes Control Wiring and Fault Management Overload Operating Mode Independent Operating Mode Reverser Operating Mode Two-Step Operating Mode Two-Speed Operating Mode Custom Operating Mode Page 170 171 174 176 179 183 187 193 198
1639504 05/2008
169
Control Principles
Overview The LTM R controller performs control and monitoring functions for single-phase and 3-phase electric motors. These functions are predefined and fit the applications most frequently used. They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter setting after the LTM R controller has been commissioned. The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the custom logic editor in PowerSuite software to: edit protection functions change the operation of control and monitoring functions alter the default LTM R controller I/O logic Operating Principle The processing of control and monitoring functions has 3 parts: acquisition of input data: the output of protection function processing external logic data from logic inputs telecommunication commands (TC) received from the control source logic processing by the control or monitoring function utilization of the processing results: activation of logic outputs display of predefined messages activation of LEDs telecommunication signals (TS) sent via a communications link. The control and monitoring function process is displayed below:
Logic Inputs TS TC Predefined Control/Monitoring Functions LTM R Logic Functions OutputCommands System Status HMI commands Protection Functions Signal LEDs Logic Outputs
TC
Custom Logic Equations
TS
I/O Control Logic Predefined messages
170
1639504 05/2008
Logic Inputs and Outputs
The LTM R controller provides 6 logic inputs, 2 logic outputs, 1 warning relay and 1 fault relay. By adding an expansion module, you can add 4 more logic inputs. Selecting a predefined operating mode automatically assigns the logic inputs to functions and defines the relationship between logic inputs and outputs. Using the custom logic editor, you can change these assignments.
Predefined Operating Modes

Overview The LTM R controller can be configured in 1 out of 10 predefined operating modes. Each operating mode is designed to meet the requirements of a common application configuration. When you select an operating mode, you specify both the: operating mode type, which determines the relationship between logic inputs and logic outputs, and control circuit type, which determines logic input behavior, based on the control wiring design Operating Mode Types
Overload
There are 10 types of operating modes:
Operating mode type Best used for: All motor starter applications in which the user defines assignment of: logic inputs I.1, I.2, I.3 and I.4 logic outputs O.1 and O.2 Aux1, Aux2 and Stop commands from the XBTN410 HMI. The I/O can be defined using a control program managed by the master network controller in remote control, by an HMI tool, or by using custom logic. Independent Reverser Two-Step Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage non-reversing motor starting applications Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage reversing motor starting applications Reduced voltage starting motor applications, including: Wye-Delta Open Transition Primary Resistor Open Transition Autotransformer Two-speed motor applications for motor types, including: Dahlander (consequent pole) Pole Changer
Two-Speed
1639504 05/2008
171
Logic Input Behavior
When you select an operating mode, you also specify that logic inputs are wired for either 2-wire (maintained) or 3-wire (impulse) control. Your selection determines the valid start and stop commands from the various control sources, and sets the behavior of the input command following the return of power after an outage:
The LTM R controller, after detecting the rising edge on the input assigned to start the motor, issues a run command. The run command remains active only while the input is active. The signal is not latched. The LTM R controller: after detecting the rising edge on the input assigned to start the motor, latches the run command, and after a stop command, disables the run command to disable the output relay wired in series with the coil of the contactor that turns the motor on or off following a stop, must detect a rising edge on the input to latch the run command.
Control Circuit Type Behavior of logic inputs I.1 and I.2 2-wire (maintained) 3-wire (impulse)
Control logic assignments for logic inputs I.1, I.2, I.3 and I.4 are described in each of the predefined motor operating modes. Note: In Network control channel, network commands behave as 2-wire control commands, regardless of the control circuit type of the selected operating mode. For information on Control Channels, see p. 159. In each pre-defined operating mode, logic inputs I.3, I.4, I.5 and I.6 behave as follows:
Logic Input Behavior I.3 When it is configured to be used as the external system ready input (Logic Input 3 External Ready Enable = 1), this input provides a feedback on the system state (Ready or not): If I.3 = 0, the external system is not ready. System Ready bit (455.0) is set to 0. If I.3 = 1, the external system is ready. System Ready bit (455.0) can be set to 1 depending on other conditions on the system. When it is not configured to be used as the external system ready input (Logic Input 3 External Ready Enable = 0), this input is user defined and only sets a bit in a register. In 3-wire (impulse) control: a Stop command. Note that this stop command can be disabled in terminal strip control using bit 11 of register 683. In 2-wire (maintained) control: a user-defined input that can be configured to send information to a PLC address over the network. Note: In Overload operating mode, logic input I.4 is not used and can be user-defined. I.5 A Fault Reset command is recognized when this input receives the rising edge of a signal. Note: this input must first become inactive, and then receive the rising edge of a subsequent signal, for another reset to occur. Local/Remote control of the LTM R controllers outputs: Active: Remote control (can be associated to any Control channel). Inactive: Local control through either the terminal strip or the HMI port, as determined by the Control Local Channel Setting parameter.
I.4
I.6
172
1639504 05/2008
WARNING
LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION IN HMI CONTROL If the terminal strip Stop is disabled, the fault output (terminal NC 95-96) must be wired in series with the contactor coil. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Logic Output Behavior
The behavior of logic outputs O.1 and O.2 is determined by the selected operating mode. See the topics that follow for a description of the 10 pre-defined operating mode types and the behavior of logic outputs O.1 and O.2. When the LTM R controller has lost communication with either the network or the HMI, the LTM R controller enters a fallback condition. When it receives a stop command in a fallback condition, logic outputs O.1 and O.2 behave as follows:
Control Circuit Type Response of logic outputs O.1 and O.2 to a stop command 2-wire (maintained) A stop command overrides the fallback condition and turns off logic outputs O.1 and O.2 while the stop command is active. After the stop command is no longer active, logic outputs O.1 and O.2 return to their programmed fallback state. A stop command overrides the fallback condition and turns off logic outputs O.1 and O.2. The outputs remain off after the stop command is removed and do not return to their programmed fallback state.
3-wire (impulse)
For more information about configuring fallback parameters, refer to the Fallback Condition (see p. 60) portion of the topic describing Communication Loss. In all operating mode types, the following logic outputs behave as described below:
Logic Output O.3 O.4 Behavior Activated by any enabled protection warning: Terminals NO 33-34 Activated by any enabled protection fault: Terminals NC 95-96 Terminals NO 97-98 Note: When control voltage is too low or off: NC 95-96 open NO 97-98 close
1639504 05/2008
173
Control Wiring and Fault Management

Overview When Overload predefined operating mode is selected, the LTM R controller does not latch logic output commands unless directed by either a PLC master control program or the LTM R controllers custom logic program. For all other predefined operating modesIndependent, Reverser, 2-Step, and 2Speedthe predefined control logic in the LTM R controller is designed to meet the the objectives of many common motor starting applications. This includes managing motor behavior in response to: start and stop actions, and fault and reset actions Because the LTM R controller can be used in special applicationssuch as fire pumps that require the motor to run despite a known external fault conditionthe predefined control logic is designed so that the control circuit, and not the predefined control logic, determines how the LTM R controller interrupts current flow to the contactor coil. Control Logic Action on Starts and Stops Predefined control logic acts upon start and stop commands as follows: For all 3-wire (impulse) control wiring diagrams, when input 4 is configured as a stop command, the LTM R controller must detect input current at logic input I.4 in order to act on a start command. If logic input I.4 is active and a user start action initiates current at logic inputs I.1 or I.2, the LTM R controller detects the rising edge of the current and sets an internal (firmware) latch command that directs the appropriate relay output to close and remain closed until the latch command is disabled. A stop action that interrupts current at logic input I.4, causes the LTM R controller to disable the latch command. Disabling the firmware latch causes the output to openand remain openuntil the next valid start condition. For all 2-wire (maintained) control wiring diagrams, the LTM R controller detects the presence of current at logic inputs I.1 or I.2 as start commands, and the absence of current disables the start command. Predefined control logic manages faults and reset commands as follows: Logic output O.4 opens in response to a fault condition. Logic output O.4 closes in response to a reset command.
Control Logic Action on Faults and Resets
174
1639504 05/2008
Control Logic and Control Wiring Together Managing Faults
The control circuits, shown in the wiring diagrams in this chapter and in the Appendix, indicate how the LTM R controllers control logic and the control circuit combine to stop a motor in response to a fault: For 3-wire (impulse) control circuits, the control strategy links the state of logic output O.4 to the state of the current at logic input I.4: Control logic opens logic output O.4 in response to a fault. Logic output O.4 opening interrupts current at logic input I.4, disabling the control logic latch command on logic output O.1. Logic output O.1 opens due to control logic described aboveand stops the flow of current to the contactor coil. In order to restart the motor, the fault must be reset and a new start command must be issued. For 2-wire (maintained) control circuits, the control strategy links the state of logic output O.4 directly with the logic inputs I.1 or I.2. Control logic opens logic output O.4 in response to a fault. Logic output O.4 opening interrupts current to the logic inputs I.1 or I.2 Control logic disables the start commands opening logic outputs O.1 or O.2. In order to restart the motor, the fault must be reset and the state of Start/Stop operators determines the state of logic inputs I.1 or I.2. The control circuits needed to run a motor - during a motor protection fault, are not shown in the wiring diagrams that follow. However, the control strategy is to not link the state of logic output O.4 to the state of the input commands. In this way, fault conditions may be annunciated, while control logic continues to manage Start and Stop commands.
1639504 05/2008
175
Overload Operating Mode

Description Use Overload operating mode when motor load monitoring is required and motor load control (start/stop) is performed by a mechanism other than the LTM R controller. The Overload operating mode includes the following features: Accessible only in Network control channel. Logic output O.4 opens in response to a diagnostic error. The LTM R controller sets a bit in a status word when it detects an active signal in: logic inputs I.1, I.2, I.3, or I.4, or the Aux 1, Aux 2, or Stop buttons on the HMI keypad. Note: When a bit is set in the input status word, it can be read by a PLC which can write a bit to the LTM R controllers command word. When the LTM R controller detects a bit in its command word, it can turn on the respective output (or outputs). Note: The LTM R controller does not latch logic output commands unless directed by a PLC master control program, or a custom logic program.
176
1639504 05/2008
Overload Application Diagram
The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control overload application.
3
KM1
+/~ -/~ Stop Start KM1 KM
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
M
For additional examples of overload operating mode IEC diagrams, see p. 497. For examples of overload operating mode NEMA diagrams, see p. 516.
1639504 05/2008
177
I/O Assignment
Overload operating mode provides the following logic inputs:

Logic inputs I.1 I.2 I.3 I.4 I.5 I.6 Assignment Free Free Free Free Reset Local (0) or Remote (1)
Overload operating mode provides the following logic outputs:

Logic outputs O.1 (13 and 14) O.2 (23 and 24) O.3 (33 and 34) O.4 (95, 96, 97, and 98) Assignment Responds to network control commands Responds to network control commands Warning signal Fault signal
Overload operating mode uses the following HMI keys:

HMI keys Aux 1 Aux 2 Stop Assignment Free Free Free
Parameters
Overload operating mode requires no associated parameter settings.
178
1639504 05/2008
Independent Operating Mode

Description Use Independent operating mode in single direct-on-line (across-the-line) fullvoltage, non-reversing motor starting applications. This function includes the following features: Accessible in 3 control channels: Terminal Strip, HMI, and Network. The LTM R controller does not manage the relationship between logic outputs O.1 and O.2. In terminal strip control channel, logic input I.1 controls logic output O.1, and logic input I.2 controls logic output O.2. In network or HMI control channels, the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic output O.1 and the Logic Output 23 Command parameter controls logic output O.2. Logic input I.3 is not used in the control circuit, but can be configured to set a bit in memory. Logic outputs O.1 and O.2 deactivateand the motor stopswhen control voltage becomes too low. Logic outputs O.1 and O.4 deactivateand the motor stopsin response to a diagnostic error. Note: See Control Wiring and Fault Management, p. 174 for information about the interaction between: the LTM R controllers predefined control logic, and the control wiring, an example of which appears in the following diagram
1639504 05/2008
179
Independent Application Diagram
The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control independent application.
3
KM1 +/~ -/~ Start Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
KM1
M
For additional examples of independent operating mode IEC diagrams, see p. 501. For examples of independent operating mode NEMA diagrams, see p. 520.
180
1639504 05/2008
I/O Assignment
Independent operating mode provides the following logic inputs:

Logic inputs I.1 I.2 I.3 I.4 I.5 I.6 2-wire (maintained) assignment Start/Stop motor Open/Close O.2 Free Free Reset Local (0) or Remote (1) 3-wire (impulse) assignment Start motor Close O.2 Free Stop motor and open O.1 and O.2 Reset Local (0) or Remote (1)
Independent operating mode provides the following logic outputs:

Logic outputs O.1 (13 and 14) O.2 (23 and 24) O.3 (33 and 34) O.4 (95, 96, 97, and 98) Assignment KM1 contactor control Controlled by I.2 Warning signal Fault signal
Independent operating mode uses the following HMI keys:

HMI keys Aux 1 Aux 2 Stop 2-wire (maintained) assignment Control motor Control O.2 Stop motor and open O.2 while pressed 3-wire (impulse) assignment Start motor Close O.2 Stop motor and open O.2
1639504 05/2008
181
Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Independent operating mode that shows the inputs and outputs for a 3-wire (impulse) configuration:
I.1 (Start)
I.2 (optional) I.4 (Stop)
O.1 (KM1)
O.2 (optional)
1 1 2 Normal operation Start command ignored: stop command active
Parameters
Independent operating mode requires no associated parameters.
182
1639504 05/2008
Reverser Operating Mode

Description Use Reverser operating mode in direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage, reversing motor starting applications. This function includes the following features: Accessible in 3 control channels: Terminal Strip, HMI, and Network. Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of the O.1 (forward) and O.2 (reverse) logic outputs. The LTM R controller can change direction from forward to reverse and reverse to forward in 1 of 2 modes: Standard Transition mode: The Control Direct Transition bit is Off. This mode requires a Stop command followed by count-down of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout (anti-backspin) timer. Direct Transition mode: The Control Direct Transition bit is On. This mode automatically transitions after the count-down of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout (anti-backspin) timer. In terminal strip control channel, logic input I.1 controls logic output O.1, and logic input I.2 controls logic output O.2. In Network or HMI control channels, the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic output O.1 and the Motor Run Reverse Command controls logic output O.2. Logic input I.3 is not used in the control circuit, but can be configured to set a bit in memory. Logic outputs O.1 and O.2 deactivateand the motor stopswhen control voltage becomes too low. Logic outputs O.1, O.2 and O.4 deactivateand the motor stopsin response to a diagnostic error. Note: See Control Wiring and Fault Management, p. 174 for information about the interaction between: the LTM R controllers predefined control logic, and the control wiring, an example of which appears in the following diagram
1639504 05/2008
183
Reverser Application Diagram

3
The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control reverser application.
KM2
KM1 +/~ -/~ Start FW Start RV Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
KM2
KM1 KM2
M
1
KM1
The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller firmware interlocks O.1 and O.2.
For additional examples of reverser operating mode IEC diagrams, see p. 503. For examples of reverser operating mode NEMA diagrams, see p. 522.
184
1639504 05/2008
I/O Assignment
Reverser operating mode provides the following logic inputs:

Logic inputs I.1 I.2 I.3 I.4 I.5 I.6 2-wire (maintained) assignment Forward run Reverse run Free Free Reset Local (0) or Remote (1) 3-wire (impulse) assignment Start motor forward Start motor reverse Free Stop motor Reset Local (0) or Remote (1)
Reverser operating mode provides the following logic outputs:

Logic outputs O.1 (13 and 14) O.2 (23 and 24) O.3 (33 and 34) O.4 (95, 96, 97, and 98) Assignment KM1 contactor control Forward KM2 contactor control Reverse Warning signal Fault signal
Reverser operating mode uses the following HMI keys:

HMI keys Aux 1 Aux 2 Stop 2-wire (maintained) assignment Forward run Reverse run Stop while pressed 3-wire (impulse) assignment Start motor forward Start motor reverse Stop
1639504 05/2008
185
Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Reverser operating mode that shows the inputs and outputs for a 3-wire (impulse) configuration when the control direct transition bit is On:
I.1 (Start forward) I.2 (Start reverse) I.4 (Stop)
O.1 (KM1 forward)
O.2 (KM2 reverse)
Motor On bit
Transition timer
1 1 2 3 4 Normal operation with stop command Normal operation without stop command Forward run command ignored: transition timer active Forward run command ignored: stop command active
Parameters
Reverser operating mode has the following parameters:

Parameters Motor transition timeout Control direct transition Setting range 0999.9 s On/Off Factory setting 0.1 s Off
186
1639504 05/2008
Two-Step Operating Mode

Description Use Two-Step operating mode in reduced voltage starting motor applications such as: Wye-Delta Open Transition Primary Resistor Open Transition Autotransformer Functional Characteristics This function includes the following features: Accessible in 3 control channels: Terminal Strip, HMI, and Network. Two-Step operation settings include: A Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout that starts when current reaches 10% of FLC min. A Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold setting. A Motor Transition Timeout setting that starts upon the earlier of the following events: expiration of the Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout, or current falling below the Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold. Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of O.1 (step 1) and O.2 (step 2) logic outputs. In terminal strip control channel, logic input I.1 controls logic outputs O.1 and O.2. In Network or HMI control channels, the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic outputs O.1 and O.2. The Motor Run Reverse Command parameter is ignored. Logic outputs O.1 and O.2 deactivateand the motor stopswhen control voltage becomes too low. Logic outputs O.1, O.2 and O.4 deactivateand the motor stopsin response to a diagnostic error. Note: See Control Wiring and Fault Management, p. 174 for information about the interaction between: the LTM R controllers predefined control logic, and the control wiring, an example of which appears in the following diagrams
1639504 05/2008
187
Two-Step WyeDelta Application Diagram

3
The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two-step 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wye-delta application.
KM2
KM3
KM1
+/~ -/~ Start Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTMR O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
KM3 KM1
KM3 KM1 KM2
KM1 KM3
The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller electronically interlocks O.1 and O.2.
For additional examples of two-step Wye-Delta IEC diagrams, see p. 505. For examples of two-step Wye-Delta NEMA diagrams, see p. 524.
188
1639504 05/2008
Two-Step Primary Resistor Application Diagram
The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two-step 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control primary resistance application.
3
KM2
KM1
+/~ -/~ Start Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
KM1
KM2
M
For additional examples of two-step primary resistor IEC diagrams, see p. 507. For examples of two-step primary resistor NEMA diagrams, see p. 526.
1639504 05/2008
189
Two-Step Autotransformer Application Diagram
The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two-step 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control autotransformer application.
3
KM2
KM3
+/~ -/~ Start Stop
KM1
A1 A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
KM1 KM2
KM3 KM1
KM1 KM3
M
1 The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller electronically interlocks O.1 and O.2.
For additional examples of two-step autotransformer IEC diagrams, see p. 509. For examples of two-step autotransformer NEMA diagrams, see p. 528.
190
1639504 05/2008
I/O assignment
Two-step operating mode provides the following logic inputs:

Logic inputs I.1 I.2 I.3 I.4 I.5 I.6 2-wire (maintained) assignment Control motor Free Free Free Reset Local (0) or Remote (1) 3-wire (impulse) assignment Start motor Free Free Stop motor Reset Local (0) or Remote (1)
Two-step operating mode provides the following logic outputs:

Logic outputs O.1 (13 and 14) O.2 (23 and 24) O.3 (33 and 34) O.4 (95, 96, 97, and 98) Assignment Step 1 contactor control Step 2 contactor control Warning signal Fault signal
Two-step operating mode uses the following HMI keys:

HMI keys Aux 1 Aux 2 Stop 2-wire (maintained) assignment Control motor Free Stop motor while pressed 3-wire (impulse) assignment Start motor Free Stop motor
1639504 05/2008
191
Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Two-Step operating mode that shows the inputs and outputs for a 3-wire (impulse) configuration:
I.1 (Start) I.4 (Stop) Current < Motor Step 1 to 2 Threshold Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout
O.1 (Step 1) O.2 (Step 2)
Motor On bit Motor Lockout Timeout
2 1 1 2 3 4 5
3
4
Normal operation Step 1 start Step 2 start Start command ignored: Stop command active Current falling below the Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold ignored: preceded by expiration of the Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout.
Parameters
Two-step operating mode has the following parameters:

Parameter Motor step 1 to 2 timeout Motor transition timeout Motor step 1 to 2 threshold Setting range 0.1999.9 s 0999.9 s 20-800% FLC in 1% increments Factory setting 5s 100 ms 150% FLC
192
1639504 05/2008
Two-Speed Operating Mode

Description Use Two-Speed operating mode in two-speed motor applications for motor types such as: Dahlander (consequent pole) Pole Changer Functional Characteristics This function includes the following features: Accessible in 3 control channels: Terminal Strip, HMI, and Network. Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of O.1 (low speed) and O.2 (high speed) logic outputs. 2 measures of FLC: FLC1 (Motor Full Load Current Ratio) at low speed FLC2 (Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio) at high speed The LTM R controller can change speed in 2 scenarios: The Control Direct Transition bit is Off: requires a Stop command followed by expiration of the Motor Transition Timeout. The Control Direct Transition bit is On: automatically transitions from high speed to low speed after a time-out of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout. In terminal strip control channel, logic input I.1 controls logic output O.1, and logic input I.2 controls logic output O.2. In Network or HMI control channels, when the Motor Run Forward Command parameter is set to 1 and: Motor Low Speed Command is set to 1, logic output O.1 is enabled. Motor Low Speed Command is set to 0, logic output O.2 is enabled. Logic input I.3 is not used in the control circuit, but can be configured to set a bit in memory. Logic outputs O.1 and O.2 deactivateand the motor stopswhen control voltage becomes too low. Logic outputs O.1, O.2 and O.4 deactivateand the motor stops in response to a diagnostic error. Note: See Control Wiring and Fault Management, p. 174 for information about the interaction between: the LTM R controllers predefined control logic, and the control wiring, an example of which appears in the following diagrams
1639504 05/2008
193
Two-Speed Dahlander Application Diagram
The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two-speed 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control Dahlander consequent pole application.
3
KM2
KM1
KM3 +/~ -/~ Low Speed High Speed Stop
A1 A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
1
LTMR O.1 O.2 O.3
O.4
13
14
23
24
33
34
KM2 KM1
KM1 KM2
KM2 KM3
A Dahlander application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows. The LTM R controller can also be placed upstream of the contactors. If this is the case, and if the Dahlander motor is used in variable torque mode, all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size. The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller firmware interlocks O.1 and O.2.
For additional examples of two-speed Dahlander IEC diagrams, see p. 511. For examples of two-speed Dahlander NEMA diagrams, see p. 530.
194
1639504 05/2008
2-Speed PoleChanging Application Diagram

3
The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two-speed 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control pole-changing application.
KM2
KM1
+/~ -/~ Low Speed High Speed Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
1
LTMR O.1 O.2 O.3
O.4
13
14
23
24
33
34
KM2 KM1
KM1 KM2
A pole-changing application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows. The LTM R controller can also be placed upstream of the contactors. If this is the case, all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size. The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller firmware interlocks O.1 and O.2.
For additional examples of pole-changing IEC diagrams, see p. 513. For examples of pole-changing NEMA diagrams, see p. 532.
1639504 05/2008
195
I/O Assignment
Two-Speed operating mode provides the following logic inputs:

Logic inputs I.1 I.2 I.3 I.4 I.5 I.6 2-wire (maintained) assignment 3-wire (impulse) assignment Low speed command High speed command Free Free Reset Local (0) or Remote (1) Low speed start High speed start Free Stop Reset Local (0) or Remote (1)
Two-Speed operating mode provides the following logic outputs:

Logic outputs O.1 (13 and 14) O.2 (23 and 24) O.3 (33 and 34) O.4 (95, 96, 97, and 98) Assignment Low speed control High speed control Warning signal Fault signal
Two-speed operating mode uses the following HMI keys:

HMI keys Aux 1 Aux 2 Stop 2-wire (maintained) assignment Low speed control High speed control Stop the motor 3-wire (impulse) assignment Low speed start High speed start Stop the motor
196
1639504 05/2008
Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the two-speed operating mode that shows the inputs and outputs for a 3-wire (impulse) configuration when the Control Direct Transition bit is On:
I.1 (Low speed start) I.2 (High speed start) I.4 (Stop)
O.1 (KM1 Low speed) O.2 (KM2 and KM3 high speed) Motor On bit
Motor transition timeout
1 1 2 3 4
Normal operation with stop command Normal operation without stop command Low-speed start command ignored: motor transition timeout active Low-speed start command ignored: stop command active
Parameters
The following table lists the parameters associated with the Two-Speed operating mode.
Parameters Motor transition timeout (high speed to low speed) Control direct transition Setting range 0999.9 s On/Off Factory setting 100 ms Off
Note: The low speed to high speed timer is fixed at 100 ms.
1639504 05/2008
197
Custom Operating Mode

Overview Custom operating mode can be implemented only by using the custom logic editor in PowerSuite software. To select Custom operating mode, start in the configuration softwares tree control. Navigate to the Settings Motor Motor Operating Mode page and select Custom as the Operating Mode. Program files Every LTM R controller program consists of 2 files: a configuration file that contains parameter configuration settings a logic file that contains a series of logic commands that manage LTM R controller behavior, including: motor start and stop commands motor transitions between steps, speeds and directions the valid control source and transitions between control sources fault and warning logic for relay outputs 1 and 2, and the HMI terminal strip reset functions PLC and HMI communication loss and fallback load shed rapid cycle starting and stopping LTM R controller diagnostics When a predefined operating mode is selected, the LTM R controller applies a predefined logic file that permanently resides in the LTM R controller. When custom operating mode is selected, the LTM R controller uses a customized logic file created in the custom logic editor and downloaded to the LTM R controller from the configuration software. Transferring files Use the following commands to separately download (from the configuration software to the LTM R controller) your applications configuration file and customized logic file:
Use this command
To download this file
Configuration file with parameter settings that is open and PC to Device command in either the icon bar or the Link displayed in the configuration software File Transfer sub-menu. Logic file with logic commands that is open and displayed Download Program to Device command in either the in the custom logic editor icon bar or the Logic Functions menu.
198
1639504 05/2008
4.3
At a Glance
Overview
Fault Management
This section describes how the LTM R controller manages the fault handling process, and explains: how to select a fault reset mode, and controller behavior for each fault reset mode selection.

Topic Fault Management - Introduction Manual Reset Automatic Reset Remote Reset Fault and Warning Codes Page 200 203 205 210 212
1639504 05/2008
199
Fault Management - Introduction

Overview When the LTM R controller detects a fault condition and activates the appropriate response, the fault becomes latched. Once a fault becomes latched, it remains latched even if the underlying fault condition is eliminateduntil cleared by a reset command. The setting of the Fault Reset Mode parameter determines how the LTM R controller manages faults. The fault reset mode selections, listed below, are described in the topics that follow: Manual (the default setting) Automatic Remote The fault reset mode cannot be changed while a fault remains active. All faults must be reset before the fault reset mode can be changed. Fault Reset Methods A Reset command can be issued using any of the following means: cycling power reset button on the LTM R controller reset button on the HMI keypad reset command from the HMI engineering tool logic input I.5 a network command automatic reset
WARNING
RISK OF UNINTENDED OPERATION When the LTM R controller is operating in 2-wire control with an active Run command, a Reset command will immediately restart the motor. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
200
1639504 05/2008
Fault Specific Reset Behaviors
The LTM R controllers response to faults depends on the nature of the fault that has occurred and how the related protection function is configured. For example: Thermal faults can be reset after the Fault Reset Timeout counts down and the utilized thermal capacity falls below the Fault Reset Threshold level. If the fault includes a reset timeout setting, the timeout must fully count down before a reset command executes. Internal device faults can be reset only by cycling power. LTM R controller memory does not retain diagnostic and wiring faults after a power loss, but does retain all other faults after a power loss. Internal, diagnostic, and wiring faults cannot be automatically reset. All wiring and diagnostic faults can be manually reset by local reset methods. For diagnostic faults, network reset commands are valid only in remote (network) control channel. For wiring faults, network reset commands are not valid in any control channel.
Fault Characteristics
The LTM R controller fault monitoring functions save the status of communications monitoring and motor protection faults on a power loss so that these faults must be acknowledged and reset as part of an overall motor maintenance strategy.
LTM R controller X X X X X X X X X X X X X X LTM R with LTM E Saved on power loss X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Run Command Check Stop Command Check Run Check Back Stop Check Back
Protection category Monitored fault Diagnostic
PTC connection CT Reversal Current Phase Reversal Voltage Phase Loss Phase Configuration
Internal
Stack Overflow Watchdog ROM Checksum EEROM CPU Internal Temperature
Monitored Not monitored
1639504 05/2008
201
Protection category Monitored fault Motor temp sensor PTC Binary PT100 PTC Analog NTC Analog Thermal overload Current Definite Inverse Thermal Long Start Jam Current Phase Imbalance Current Phase Loss Overcurrent Undercurrent Internal Ground Current Voltage Overvoltage Undervoltage Voltage Phase Imbalance Power Underpower Overpower Under Power Factor Over Power Factor Communication loss X Monitored Not monitored PLC to LTM R HMI to LTM R
LTM R controller X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
LTM R with LTM E Saved on power loss X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
External Ground Current X
202
1639504 05/2008
Manual Reset
Introduction When the Fault Reset Mode parameter is set to Manual, the LTM R controller allows resetsusually performed by a personvia a power cycle of the control power or by using a local reset means, including: Terminal Strip (logic input I.5) Reset button on the LTM R controller Reset commands from the HMI A manual reset provides on-site personnel the opportunity to inspect the equipment and wiring before performing the reset. Note: A manual reset blocks all reset commands from the LTM R controllers network porteven when the Control Channel is set to Network.
Manual Reset Methods

The LTM R controller provides the following manual reset methods:

Monitored fault Run Command Check Stop Command Check Run Check Back Stop Check Back Control channel Terminal strip RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 PC PC PC PC PC PC HMI RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 PC PC PC PC PC PC Network 1 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 PC PC PC PC PC PC
Wiring / configuration errors PTC connection CT Reversal Voltage Phase Reversal Current Phase Reversal Voltage Phase Loss Phase Configuration Internal Stack Overflow Watchdog ROM Checksum EEROM CPU Internal Temperature
RB Test/Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or an HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller I.5 Set I.5 logic input on the LTM R controller 1. Remote network reset commands are not allowed even when the LTM R controller is configured for network control channel.
1639504 05/2008
203
Motor Control Functions Protection Category Motor temp sensor Monitored fault PTC Binary PT100 PTC Analog NTC Analog Thermal overload Current Definite Inverse Thermal Long Start Jam Current Phase Imbalance Current Phase Loss Undercurrent Overcurrent External Ground Current Internal Ground Current Voltage Undervoltage Overvoltage Voltage Phase Imbalance Power Underpower Overpower Under Power Factor Over Power Factor Communication loss PLC to LTM R LTM E to LTM R Control channel Terminal strip RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 HMI RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 Network 1 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
RB Test/Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or an HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller I.5 Set I.5 logic input on the LTM R controller 1. Remote network reset commands are not allowed even when the LTM R controller is configured for network control channel.
204
1639504 05/2008
Automatic Reset
Introduction Setting the Fault Reset Mode parameter to Automatic lets you: configure the LTM R controller to attempt to reset motor protection and communications faults without the intervention of either a human operator or the remote PLC, for example: for a non-networked LTM R controller installed at a location that is physically remote, or locally hard to access configure fault handling for each protection fault group in a manner that is appropriate to the faults in that group: set a different timeout delay permit a different number of reset attempts disable automatic fault resetting The Fault Reset Mode parameter selection determines the available reset methods. Each protection fault is included in 1 of 3 auto-reset fault groups, based on the characteristics of that fault, as described below. Each fault group has 2 configurable parameters: a timeout: the Auto-Reset Group (number 1, 2, or 3) Timeout parameter, and a maximum number of permissible fault resets: the Auto-Reset Attempts Group (number 1, 2, or 3) Setting parameter
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION An auto-reset command may restart the motor if the LTM R controller is used in a 2-wire control circuit. Equipment operation must conform to local and national safety regulations and codes. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Reset Behavior
After power is cycled, the LTM R controller clears and sets to 0 the values of the following parameters: Auto-Reset Group (number 1, 2, or 3) Timeout and Auto Reset Group (number 1, 2, or 3) Setting. On a successful reset, the Number of Resets count is cleared and set to 0. A reset is successful if, after reset, the motor runs for 1 minute without a fault of a type in the designated group. If the maximum number of automatic resets has been reached and if the last reset has failed, the reset mode turns to Manual. When the motor restarts, the automatic mode parameters are set to 0.
1639504 05/2008
205
Emergency Restart
Use the Clear Thermal Capacity Level Commandin applications where it is necessaryto clear the Thermal Capacity Level parameter following a Thermal Overload inverse thermal fault. This command permits an emergency restart before the motor has actually cooled. It also clears and sets to 0 auto-restart group timeout and number of auto-resets statistics.
WARNING
LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and fire. Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection must be limited to applications where immediate restart is vital. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Number of Resets
Each protection group can be set to manual, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Select "0" to disable automatic reset of protection fault groupsand require a manual reseteven though the Fault Reset Mode parameter is configured for automatic reset. Select "5" to enable unlimited auto-reset attempts. After the time delay has expired the LTM R controller continually attempts to reset every fault in that reset group.
Auto-Reset Group 1 (AU-G1)
Group 1 faults require a pre-defined cooling time after the monitored parameter returns to and falls below a pre-defined threshold. Group 1 faults include Thermal Overload and Motor Temp Sensor faults. The cooling time delay is non-configurable. However, you can: add to the cooling time delay by setting the Auto-Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter to a value greater than 0, or disable auto-reset by setting the Auto-Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter to 0 Auto-reset group 1 has the following configurable parameters:
Parameters Auto-Reset Group 1 Timeout
Setting range 0...65,535 s
Factory setting 480 s
Auto-Reset Attempts Group 1 Setting 0 = manual, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 = unlimited number of reset attempts 5
206
1639504 05/2008
Group 2 faults generally do not include a pre-defined cooling time delay before a reset can be executed, but can be reset as soon as the fault condition clears. Many group 2 faults can result in some motor overheating, depending upon the severity and duration of the fault condition, which in turn depends upon the protection function configuration. You can add a cooling time delay, if appropriate, by setting the Auto-Reset Group 2 Timeout parameter to a value greater than 0. You may also want to limit the number of reset attempts to prevent premature wear or failure of the equipment. Auto-reset group 2 has the following configurable parameters:
Setting range 0...65,535 s
Factory setting 1,200 s
Group 3 faults often apply to equipment monitoring and generally do not require a motor cooling period. These faults can be used to detect equipment conditionsfor example, an undercurrent fault that detects the loss of a belt, or an overpower fault that detects an increased loading condition in a mixer. You may want to configure group 3 faults in a way that differs significantly from groups 1 or 2, for example by setting the number of resets to 0, thereby requiring a manual reset after the equipment failure has been discovered and corrected. Auto-reset group 3 has the following configurable parameters:
Setting range 0...65,535 s Factory setting 60 s
1639504 05/2008
207
Auto-Reset Methods
The LTM R controller allows the following auto-reset methods: RB - Test / Reset button on the LTM R or the HMI PC - Power cycle on the LTM R controller I.5 - Set I.5 logic input on the LTM R NC - Network command Automatic with conditions configured for the protection function group (where AUGX = AU-G1, AU-G2, or AU-G3) The table below lists the possible auto-reset methods for each monitored fault:
Monitored fault Run Command Check Stop Command Check Run Check Back Stop Check Back control channel Terminal strip HMI RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 PC PC PC PC PC PC AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1 Network RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5, NC PC PC PC PC PC PC AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 PC PC PC PC PC PC AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1
Protection category Diagnostic
PTC connection CT Reversal Voltage Phase Reversal Current Phase Reversal Voltage Phase Loss Phase Configuration
Internal
Stack Overflow Watchdog ROM Checksum EEROM CPU Internal Temperature
Motor temp sensor
PTC Binary PT100 PTC Analog NTC Analog
Thermal overload
Definite Inverse Thermal
208
1639504 05/2008
Motor Control Functions Protection category Current Monitored fault Long Start Jam Current Phase Imbalance Current Phase Loss Undercurrent Overcurrent External Ground Current Internal Ground Current Voltage Undervoltage Overvoltage Power Underpower Overpower Under Power Factor Over Power Factor Communication Loss PLC to LTM R LTM E to LTM R control channel Terminal strip RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5 RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, AU-G3 HMI RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5 RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, AU-G3 Network RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3
Voltage Phase Imbalance RB, I.5, AU-G2
1639504 05/2008
209
Remote Reset
Introduction Setting the Fault Reset Mode parameter to Remote adds resetting faults from the PLC over the LTM R network port. This provides centralized monitoring and control of equipment installations. The Control channel parameter selection determines the available reset methods. Both manual reset methods and remote reset methods reset a fault. Remote Reset Methods
The LTM R controller provides the following remote reset methods:

Monitored fault Run Command Check Stop Command Check Run Check Back Stop Check Back Control channel Terminal strip RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC PC PC PC PC PC PC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC HMI RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC PC PC PC PC PC PC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC Network RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC PC PC PC PC PC PC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Wiring / configuration PTC connection errors CT Reversal Voltage Phase Reversal Current Phase Reversal Voltage Phase Loss Phase Configuration Internal Stack Overflow Watchdog ROM Checksum EEROM CPU Internal Temperature Motor temp sensor PTC Binary PT100 PTC Analog NTC Analog RB PC I.5 NC
Test/Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or the HMI Power cycle on the LTM R controller Set I.5 logic input on the LTM R controller Network command
210
1639504 05/2008
Motor Control Functions Protection Category Thermal overload Current Monitored fault Definite Inverse Thermal Long Start Jam Current Phase Imbalance Current Phase Loss Undercurrent Overcurrent External Ground Current Internal Ground Current Voltage Undervoltage Overvoltage Voltage Phase Imbalance Power Underpower Overpower Under Power Factor Over Power Factor Communication Loss RB PC I.5 NC PLC to LTM R LTM E to LTM R Control channel Terminal strip RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC HMI RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC Network RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Test/Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or the HMI Power cycle on the LTM R controller Set I.5 logic input on the LTM R controller Network command
1639504 05/2008
211
Fault and Warning Codes

Fault Codes The Fault Code parameter describes the type of fault that most recently occurred. Each fault type is represented by a number. For the detailed list of faut codes, see p. 416. The Warning Code parameter describes the type of warning that most recently occurred. Each warning type is represented by a number. For the detailed list of warning codes, see p. 419.
Warning Codes
212
1639504 05/2008
Installation
At a Glance
Overview This chapter describes the physical installation and assembly of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module. It also explains how to connect and wire the controller terminal block, including communication port wiring.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on it. Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical work practices. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems. Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program and apply this product. Follow all local and national safety codes and standards. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
This chapter contains the following sections:

Section 5.1 5.2 Topic LTM R Controller and Expansion Module Installation Wiring of the DeviceNet Communication Network Page 214 246
1639504 05/2008
213
Installation
5.1
LTM R Controller and Expansion Module Installation
Installation Overview
Installation This section describes the installation procedures and wiring principles of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module. This section contains the following topics:
Topic Dimensions Mounting Assembly Connecting to an HMI Device Wiring - General Principles Wiring - Current Transformers (CTs) Wiring - Ground Fault Current Transformers Wiring - Temperature Sensors Recommended Contactors Page 215 218 223 226 230 234 238 240 241
214
1639504 05/2008
Installation
Dimensions
Overview This section presents the dimensions of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module, as well as the dimensions of the clearance zone around the controller and the expansion module. Dimensions are given in both millimeters and inches and apply to all LTM R and LTM E units.
LTM R Controller Dimensions
mm in
3x18 3x0.71
61 2.4
120 4.72 140 5.5
91 3.58
Note: The height of the controller may increase when using alternate wiring terminals.
1639504 05/2008
215
Installation
LTM E Expansion Module Dimensions
mm in
61 2.4
120 4.72 46 1.8
216
1639504 05/2008
Installation
Clearance Zone Dimensions
The maximum rated ambient temperature of the controller depends on the clearance zone dimensions. They are shown in the table below.
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
< 9 mm (0.35 in) 9...40 mm (0.35...1.57 in) > 40 mm (1.57 in)
45 C (113 F) 45...55 C (113...131 F) 60 C (140 F)
(1)
mm in
136 5.35
1639504 05/2008
217
Installation
Mounting
Overview This section describes how to mount the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module on a DIN rail, a solid mounting plate, or a pre-slotted mounting plate (known as a TE plate), such as a Telequick plate. It also describes the accessories needed for mounting, as well as how to remove each component. You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a 35 mm (1.38 in.) DIN rail with a thickness of 1.35 mm (0.05 in.)and 0.75 mm (0.02 in.). When mounted, the controller mounting feet may not extend beyond the controller dimensions (see p. 215).To mount the controller:
Step Action 1 2 On the back of the controller are 2 DIN rail clips. Fit the top clip onto the DIN rail. Push the controller in toward the DIN rail until the bottom clip catches. The controller clicks into place.
Mounting on DIN Rails
218
1639504 05/2008
Installation
Removing from DIN Rails
To remove the controller from the DIN rail:

Step Action 1 2 Using a screwdriver, pull down the white locking mechanism to release the controller. Lift the controller away from the DIN rail.
1639504 05/2008
219
Installation
Mounting on a Solid Mounting Plate
You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a metal mounting plate using ST2.9 steel tapping screws: 4 for the controller and 2 for the expansion module. The thickness of the mounting plate must not exceed 7 mm (0.275 in.). When mounted, the controller mounting feet may extend beyond the controller dimensions (see p. 215) by 8 mm (0.3 in.) in both directions.To mount the controller and the expansion module on a mounting plate:
Step Action 1 2 3 4 Locate the 4 mounting holes at each corner of the Controller and the 2 mounting holes on the Expansion Module. Position the Controller and Expansion Module on the mounting plate, making sure to leave enough space for the clearance zone. See Clearance Zone Dimensions, p. 217. Insert each of the 6 tapping screws. Use a screwdriver to tighten each screw and secure the Controller and the Expansion Module in place. Torque to 1 Nm (8.8 lb-in). mm in 30,5 1.2 75,5 2.97
14,5 0.57
6 x M4 x 20 (# 8 x 32)
52.5 2.07
1 Nm 8.8 Ib-in.
220
1639504 05/2008
Installation
Mounting on a TE Plate
You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a TE plate, such as Telequick, using 6 mounting clips (AF1 EA4). When mounted, the controller mounting feet may extend beyond the controller dimensions (see p. 215) by 8 mm (0.3 in.) in both directions. To mount the controller on Telequick:
Step Action 1 2 Attach the 6 mounting clips to Telequick, as shown in the diagram below. The rounded edge should face upwards for the top clips, and downwards for the bottom clips. Position the controller and expansion module on the clips so that the holes in the clips and the holes in the controller and expansion module align. Insert the screws in the holes and turn them slightly. When the controller and expansion module are properly positioned, tighten first the bottom screws, then the top screws using a screwdriver. Torque to 1 Nm (8.8 lb-in).
75,5 2.97
52.5 2.07
1639504 05/2008
221
Installation
Operating Position
You can mount the controller and the expansion module at an angle of up to 90 degrees perpendicular to the normal vertical mounting plane.
90 90 90
222
1639504 05/2008
Installation
Assembly
At a Glance Once you have mounted the LTM R controller - and the LTM E expansion module, if required - you must assemble the different parts of the system. This section describes how to connect the controller with the expansion module, as well as how to replace the standard terminal strips with alternative terminal strips. The standard terminal strips of the controller and expansion module can be replaced with alternative terminal strips, if required. With alternative terminal strips, wires are connected perpendicularly to the controller or expansion module face. To replace the standard strips with alternative strips:
Step Action 1. Remove the 6 standard terminal strips using a screwdriver to leverage the strips away from the unit.
Replacing the Terminal Strips
1639504 05/2008
223
Installation
Step Action 2. Push the alternative strips into place, making sure you position them correctly.
Note: There are two 4-pin terminal strips. These strips are not interchangeable. It is important, therefore, that you read the markings on the terminal strips and follow the diagram below when positioning them.
224
1639504 05/2008
Installation
Connecting the LTM R Controller and the LTM E Expansion Module
The controller connects to the expansion module using an RJ45 network connection cable, as shown in the diagram below.
1 m max 39.37 in. max
3 lengths of cable are available to connect the controller and the expansion module, depending on their relative positions. These cables, which are terminated at each end with an RJ45 connector, are described in the table below.
Cable Reference 1 2 3 LTMCC004 LU9R03 LU9R10 Length 40 mm (1.57 in.) 0.3 m (11.81 in.) 1 m (39.37 in.)
1639504 05/2008
225
Installation
Connecting to an HMI Device

Connecting to a Magelis XBT HMI Device in 1to-1 Mode This section describes how to connect the LTM R controller to an HMI device, such as a Magelis XBT or a TeSys T LTM CU, or to a PC running PowerSuite software. The HMI device must be connected to the RJ45 port on the LTM R controller, or to the HMI interface port (RJ45) on the LTM E expansion module. The Magelis XBT HMI device must be powered separately. You can connect it to a controller in 1-to-1 or 1-to-many mode. Note: If a key is pressed while the Magelis XBT HMI device loses communication, the keypad update will not be complete. When the communication with the LTM R is back, the following message displays: "#203 Cannot connect to controller". Press any key or power cycle the device. The diagrams below show the Magelis XBTN410 HMI connected to the controller, with and without the LTM E expansion module:
1 3
2T05334
2T05334
1 3 2 4
LV1 TeSys LV2 LV3
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 LTMR08DBD DEVICENET MNS 97 98 95NC 96 NO 2T05334
2
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 DEVICENET MNS 97 98 95 96 NO NC LTMR08DBD HMI Comm Power Alarm Fallback
LTMEV40FM
HMI Comm
Test / Reset
NO NO NO 13 14 23 24 33 34 Z1 Z2 T1 T2 V- CAN_L CAN_H S V+
PowerI.7 I.8 I.9 I.10 I.7 C7 I.8 C8 I.9 C9 I.10C10

NO NO NO 13 14 23 24 33 34
Fallback
Power
Alarm
Test / Reset
Z1 Z2 T1 T2 V- CAN_L CAN_H S V+
1 2 3 4
Magelis XBTN410 HMI device Magelis connecting cable XBTZ938 LTM R controller LTM E expansion module
For more information, see the XBTN410 User Manual. For specific mounting instructions, see the XBTN410 Instruction Sheet.
226
1639504 05/2008
Installation
Connecting to a Magelis XBT HMI Device in 1to-Many Mode
The diagram below shows a 1-to-many connection from the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to up to 8 controllers (with or without the LTM E expansion module):
1 4 3 7
2T05334
6
LV3
2T05334 A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 LTMR08DBD DEVICENET MNS 97 98 95 96 NO NC A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 LTMR08DBD C I.6
6
97 98 95 96 NO NC DEVICENET MNS 2T05334
LV1 TeSys
LV2
LTMEV40FM
HMI Comm
Power
HMI Comm

NO NO NO 13 14 23 24 33 34
Fallback
Fallback
Power
Alarm
Alarm
Test / Reset
Test / Reset
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Magelis XBTN410 HMI device Magelis connecting cable XBTZ938 T-junction boxes VW3 A8 306 TF Communication cable VW3 A83 06R Line terminators VW3 A8 306 R LTM R controller LTM E expansion module
Note: For a full list of connection accessories, see p. 229.
Connecting to a TeSys T LTM CU HMI Device
The diagrams below show the TeSys T LTM CU HMI device connected to the controller, with and without the LTM E expansion module:
1 3
2T05334
2T05334
1 4 2
LV1 TeSys LV2 LV3
3
2T05334
2
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 LTMR08DBD C I.6 DEVICENET MNS 97 98 95 96 NO NC HMI Comm Power Alarm Fallback
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3
C I.4 I.5
C I.6 DEVICENET
97 98 95 96 NO NC
LTMEV40FM
LTMR08DBD
HMI Comm
Power
Alarm
Fallback
Test / Reset

NO NO NO 13 14 23 24 33 34
MNS
Test / Reset
1 2 3 4
LTM CU Control Operator Unit RJ45 cable (VW3 A1 104R30, in this example) LTM R controller LTM E expansion module
1639504 05/2008
227
Installation
Connecting to a Generic HMI Device
You can also connect the controller and the LTM E expansion module to an HMI device of your choice, using a customized cable. The customized cable requires the following RJ45 port pinouts to connect to the LTM R controller or LTM E expansion module:
Front view
1 D1 VP D0
Common
The RJ45 wiring layout is:

Pin no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Reserved Reserved D1 or B D0 or A Reserved VP Common Description Do not connect Do not connect Not connected Communication between HMI and LTM R controller Communication between HMI and LTM R controller Do not connect Positive 7 Vdc (100 mA) power supply provided by the LTM R Signal and power supply common
Connecting to a PC running PowerSuite Software in 1-to1 Mode
The diagrams below show a 1-to-1 connection from a PC running PowerSuite to the LTM R controller, with and without the LTM E expansion module:
1 3 2
2T05334
2T05334
1 3 4
LV1 TeSys LV2 LV3
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 LTMR08DBD DEVICENET MNS 97 98 95 96 NO NC 2T05334
2
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 LTMR08DBD DEVICENET MNS 97 98 95NC 96 NO HMI Comm Fallback Power Alarm
LTMEV40FM
HMI Comm
NO NO NO 13 14 23 24 33 34
Test / Reset

NO NO NO 13 14 23 24 33 34
Fallback
Power
Alarm
Test / Reset
1 2 3 4
PC running PowerSuite software Power cable VW3 A8 106 LTM R controller LTM E expansion module
228
1639504 05/2008
Installation
Connecting to a PC running PowerSuite Software in 1-toMany Mode
The diagram below shows a 1-to-many connection from a PC running PowerSuite software to up to 8 controllers (with or without the LTM E expansion module):
1
2 7
4 3 6
2T05334
6
2T05334 97 98 95 96 NO NC A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 LTMR08DBD DEVICENET MNS 97 98 95NC 96 NO 2T05334
LV1 TeSys
LV2
LV3
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 LTMR08DBD DEVICENET MNS
LTMEV40FM
HMI Comm
HMI Comm

NO NO NO 13 14 23 24 33 34
Fallback
Fallback
Power
Power
Alarm
Alarm
Test / Reset
NO NO NO 13 14 23 24 33 34
Test / Reset
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PC running PowerSuite software Power cable VW3 A8 106 T-junction boxes VW3 A8 306 TF Communication cable VW3 A83 06R line terminators VW3 A8 306 R LTM R controller LTM E expansion module
Connection Accessories
Designation T-junction boxes
The following table lists connection accessories for the Magelis XBT and other HMI devices:
Description With 0.3 m (1 ft) integrated cable With 1 m (3.2 ft) integrated cable R = 150 Length = 2.5 m (8.2 ft) 25 pts SubD connector to connect to Magelis XBT Length = 1 m (3.2 ft) RS-232 to RS-485 converter Length = 0.3 m (1 ft) Length = 1 m (3.2 ft) Reference VW3 A8 306 TF03 VW3 A8 306 TF10 VW3 A8 306 R XBTZ938 VW3A8106 VW3 A8 306 R03 VW3 A8 306 R10
Line terminators for RJ45 connector Magelis connecting cable (Magelis XBTN410 only) Power cable (PC only) Communication cables
1639504 05/2008
229
Installation
Wiring - General Principles

At a Glance There are six stages in wiring the LTM R controller: Wiring the current transformers. See p. 234. Wiring the ground fault current transformers. See p. 238. Wiring the temperature sensors. See p. 240. Wiring the power supply and I/O. See Inputs Wiring, below, and Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System, p. 15. Wiring the voltage transformers and I/O on the Expansion Module. See Inputs Wiring, below, and Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System, p. 15. Wiring the communication port. See p. 246. Inputs Wiring The controlller has 6 digital inputs available via field wiring terminals I.1- I.6. The input voltage is the same voltage as the controller supply voltage: the controller logic inputs are internally powered by the control voltage of the controller. Controller inputs are isolated from the inputs of the expansion module. The 3 controller terminals for common wiring are not connected to the common of the LTM R, but are internally connected to the A1 control voltage terminal (see Wiring Diagram Example, p. 232).
The 4 digital inputs on the expansion module (I.7 - I.10) are not powered by the control voltage of the controller. They are externally powered, and the inputs voltage depends on the expansion module model (24 Vdc, 110 Vac or 220 Vac). Note: Because the expansion module is powered by the controller, it doesnt have a separate control voltage. For more information on input characteristics, see Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System, p. 15.
230
1639504 05/2008
Installation
Terminal Wiring Characteristics

Cable Type
Both the Controller and Expansion Module terminals have the same characteristics. Terminals have an insulation rating of 250 Vac. The table below describes the characteristics of cables that may be used to wire the terminals:
No. of Conductors Conductor section mm2 AWG 24...14 24...16 24...14 24...18 24...14 20...16 24...14 24...18
Flexible (stranded) cable Solid cable Flexible (stranded) cable with insulated cable ends Flexible (stranded) cable with non-insulated cable ends
Single conductor 2 conductors Single conductor 2 conductors Single conductor 2 conductors Single conductor 2 conductors
0.2...2.5 0.2...1.5 0.2...2.5 0.2...1.0 0.25...2.5 0.5...1.5 0.25...2.5 0.2...1.0
The following table describes connector details:

Connectors Pitch Tightening torque Flat screwdriver 3 and 6 pins 5.08 mm 0.5 to 0.6 Nm 3 mm 0.2 in. 5 lb-in 0.10 in.
1639504 05/2008
231
Installation
Wiring Diagram Example
The following diagram shows the connections between the power supply and the I/ Os in the terminal block when the controller is in 3-wire independent mode:
3
+/~ -/~ Start KM1 Stop
LV1
LV2
LV3
A1 A2
I.1
I.2 I.3
I.4 I.5
I.6
97 98 95 96
O.4 LTM E O.1 O.2 O.3 LTM R
I7
C7 I8
C8 I9
C9 I10 C10
13 14 23 24 33 34
Z1 Z2 T1 T2
KM1
232
1639504 05/2008
Installation
The following diagram shows connections when the controller is in single-phase independent mode:
1 L N +/~ -/~ Start KM1 Stop
LV1
LV2
LV3
A1 A2
I.1
I.2 I.3
I.4 I.5
I.6
97 98 95 96
O.4 LTM E O.1 O.2 O.3 LTM R
I7
C7 I8
C8 I9
C9 I10 C10
13 14 23 24 33 34
Z1 Z2 T1 T2
KM1
For more application diagrams see Wiring Diagrams, p. 495.
1639504 05/2008
233
Installation
Wiring - Current Transformers (CTs)

Overview The LTM R controller has 3 CT windows through which you can route motor leads to contactor load connections. The CT windows enable you to wire the controller in 4 different ways, depending on the voltage and controller model used: Internal CT wiring through the windows. Internal CT wiring using multiple passes. Internal CT wiring using the lug kit (ref. Class 9999 MLPL). External Load CT wiring. This section describes each of these options. Internal CT Wiring through the Windows Typical wiring using the CT windows for either 3-phase or single-phase motors:
L1
L2
L3
234
1639504 05/2008
Installation
Internal CT Wiring Using Multiple Passes
The controller will physically support up to a maximum of 5 passes of 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) wire through the CT windows. There are 3 looping windows located under the CT windows that physically support up to a maximum of 4 wire loops. You can set the parameter Load CT Multiple Passes to account for the number of times the motor wires pass through the CT window in order to display the correct current readings. For more information, see Load Current Transformer, p. 480. Typical wiring using 2 passes (1 wire loop):
3 L1 L2 L3
Multiply the current by the number of times that the motor wires pass through the CT windows to determine the amount of current passing through the internal current sensors. You may add multiple passes for one of the following reasons: To increase the current sensed by the internal current sensors to a level that the controller can properly detect To provide a more accurate reading by the internal current sensors
1639504 05/2008
235
Installation
We recommend that you select a controller with an FLC value range that includes the motor FLC. However, if the motor FLC is less than the FLC range of the controller, multiple passes can increase the current level sensed by the internal current sensors to one that the controller can detect. For example, if you use a controller with an FLC range of 5 to 100 A, and the motor FLC is 3 A, the controller cannot properly sense the current. In this case, if you pass the power wiring through the internal current sensors of the controller 2 times, the internal current sensors of the controller sense 6 A (2 passes x 3 A), a current level that falls within the FLC range of the controller. For more information about controller types, see Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System, p. 15. Internal CT Wiring using a Lug-Lug kit The controller accepts the Class 9999 Type MLPL lug-lug kit. Typical wiring using the lug-lug kit:
3
Note: The lug-lug kit is IP0. For more information on the lug-lug kit, refer to instruction bulletin 30072-013-101 supplied with the kit or available from www.us.SquareD.com (under Technical Library).
236
1639504 05/2008
Installation
External Load CT Wiring
The controller can accept 5A and 1A secondary signals from external current transformers. The recommended controller model for these currents is the 0.4-8A model. You can also use multiple passes through the controller CT windows, if required. External CTs are specified with a transformation ratio. The ratio of the external CT is the ratio of the motor input current to the CT output current. Set the parameters Load CT Primary (the first number of the CT ratio), Load CT Secondary (the second number of the CT ratio), and Load CT Multiple Passes (the number of times the CT output wires pass through the controllers internal CT windows) to enable the controller to adjust the FLC range and display the actual line current. For more information, see Load Current Transformer, p. 480. Typical wiring using external CTs:
3 L1 L2 L3
Note: The controller measures current at 47-63 Hz fundamental frequency. Therefore, if the controller is used with a variable speed drive, the controller must be installed between the drive and the line. The CTs cannot be used between the drive outputs and the motor since the drive can output fundamental frequencies outside the 47-63 Hz range. For a description of external CT characteristics, see Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System, p. 15.
1639504 05/2008
237
Installation
Wiring - Ground Fault Current Transformers

Ground Fault Current Transformer Wiring The LTM R controller has 2 terminals that can be connected to an external ground fault current transformer (GFCT): Z1 and Z2. The following diagram shows typical wiring using a GFCT:
3
L1
L2
L3
Note: You must wire the ground fault current transformer before wiring the power supply.
238
1639504 05/2008
Installation
GFCTs are specified with a transformation ratio. The ratio of the GFCT is the ratio of the ground fault current sensed to the current which it outputs. Set the parameters Ground CT Primary (the first number of the GFCT ratio) and Ground CT Secondary (the second number of the GFCT ratio) to enable the controller to correctly measure the actual ground fault current flowing in the circuit. For more information, see Configuration Tools, p. 253. For a description of GFCT characteristics, see Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System, p. 15. GF CT Wiring The following diagram shows typical wiring using a ground fault current transformer:
3 L1 L2 L3
Note: You must wire the ground fault current transformer before wiring the power supply.
1639504 05/2008
239
Installation
Wiring - Temperature Sensors

Temperature Sensors The LTM R controller has 2 terminals dedicated to temperature sensing protection: T1 and T2. These terminals return the temperature value measured by resistance temperature detectors (RTDs). One of the following types of motor temperature sensor can be used: PTC Binary PT100 PTC Analog NTC Analog The following table shows the maximum wire lengths for temperature sensor elements:
mm2 (AWG) m (ft) 0.5 (20) 220 (656) 0.75 (18) 300 (985) 1.5 (16) 400 (1312) 2.5 (14) 600 (1970)
Use twisted pair wiring to connect the controller to the temperature sensor. For the controller to accurately measure the resistance of the temperature-sensing element, you must measure the resistance of the twisted-pair and add it to the desired resistance for protection. This compensates for the lead resistance. See Metering and Monitoring Functions, p. 35 and Motor Protection Functions, p. 75 for more information on temperature sensors. For an example of a wiring diagram using a temperature sensor, see Wiring General Principles, p. 230
240
1639504 05/2008
Installation
Recommended Contactors
Recommended Contactors You can use the following contactor types: Telemecanique IEC-style contactors, from the TeSys D or TeSys F ranges Square D NEMA-style contactors, from the S range Depending on the coil voltage of the contactor used, an interposing relay may be required. The tables on the following pages, listing the references and characteristics of contactors, specify whether an interposing relay is required. The following diagrams illustrate system wiring without and with the use of an interposing relay:
3 3
Interposing Relays
KM1
KM1
LTM R O.1
LTM R O.1
13
14 +/~
13
14 +/~ KA1
KM1 -/~ KA1
KM1 -/~
Without interposing relay
With interposing relay
1639504 05/2008
241
Installation
TeSys D and TeSys F IEC Contactors

TeSys D catalog references LC1D09..LC1D38
Catalog references and characteristics for TeSys D IEC contactors are listed in the table below. Coil voltages are grouped according to whether an interposing relay is required:
Control Circuit Frequency (Hz) VA or W maintained (max) 7.5 Coil voltages interposing relay not required interposing relay required
AC = 24, 32, 36, 42, 48, AC = 277, 380, 400, 415, 60, 100, 127, 200, 208, 440, 480, 575, 600, 690 220, 230, 240 DC (std) = 24 DC (std) = 36, 48, 60, 72, 96, 100, 110, 125, 155, 220, 250, 440, 575
2.4 LC1D40..LC1D95 26
DC (low consumption) = DC (low consumption) = 24 48, 72, 96, 110, 220, 250 AC = 256, 277, 380, 380/ AC = 24, 32, 42, 48, 110, 115, 120, 127, 208, 400, 400, 415, 440, 480, 220, 220/230, 230, 240 500, 575, 600, 660 DC = 24, 36, 48, 60, 72, 110, 125, 220, 250, 440 AC = 24, 32, 42, 48, AC = 277, 380, 400, 415, 110, 115, 120, 127, 208, 440, 480, 500 220, 230, 240 DC = 24, 48, 60, 72, 110, 125, 220, 250, 440 AC = 24, 32, 42, 48, AC = 277, 380, 400, 415, 110, 115, 120, 127, 208, 440, 480, 500 220, 230, 240 DC = 24, 48, 60, 72, 110, 125, 220, 250, 440
50-60 LC1D115
22 18
22 LC1D150 18
242
1639504 05/2008
Installation
Catalog references and characteristics for TeSys F IEC contactors are listed in the table below. Coil voltages are grouped according to whether an interposing relay is required:
TeSys F catalog references LC1F115 Control Circuit Frequency (Hz) 50 60 VA or W maintained (max) 45 45 Coil voltages interposing relay not required AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/ 115, 127, 220/230, 240 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/ 115, 127, 220/230, 240, 265/277, 380, 415, 460/ 480, 660, 1000 DC = 24, 48, 110, 125, 220/230, 250, 440/460 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/ 115, 127, 220/230, 240 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/ 115, 127, 220/230, 240, 265/277, 380, 415, 460/ 480, 660, 1000 DC = 24, 48, 110, 125, 220/230, 250, 440/460 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/ 115, 127, 220/230, 240 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/ 115, 127, 220/230, 240, 265/277, 380, 415, 460/ 480, 660, 1000 DC = 24, 48, 110, 125, 220/230, 250, 440/460 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/ 115, 127, 220/230, 240 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/ 115, 127, 220/230, 240 AC = 380/400, 415/440, 500, 660, 1000 AC = 265/277, 380, 415, 460/480, 660, 1000 DC = 24, 48, 110, 125, 220/230, 250, 440/460 AC = 380/400, 415/440, 500, 660, 1000 AC = 380/400, 415/440, 500, 660, 1000 interposing relay required AC = 380/400, 415/440, 500, 660, 1000
5 LC1F150 50 60 45 45
5 LC1F185* 50 60 55 55
5 LC1F225* 50 60 55 55 5
1639504 05/2008
243
Installation
TeSys F catalog references LC1F265
Control Circuit Frequency (Hz)
VA or W maintained (max) 10 5
Coil voltages interposing relay not required AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/ 115, 127, 220/230, 240 DC = 24 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/ 115, 127, 220/230, 240 DC = 24 AC = 48, 110/120, 125, 127, 200/208, 220/230, 230/240 interposing relay required AC = 277, 380/415, 480/ 500, 600/660, 1000 DC = 48, 110, 125, 220/ 230, 250, 440/460 AC = 277, 380/415, 480/ 500, 600/660, 1000 DC = 48, 110, 125, 220/ 230, 250, 440/460 AC = 265, 277, 380/400, 415/480, 500, 550/600, 1000 DC = 48, 110, 125, 220, 250, 440 AC = 48, 110/120, 127, 200/208, 220/230, 230/ 240, 265, 277, 380/400, 415/480, 500, 550/600, 1000 DC = 48, 110, 125, 220, 250, 440 AC = 48, 110/120, 125, 127, 200/208, 220/240 AC = 265/277, 380/400, 415/480, 500, 550/600, 1000 DC = 48, 110, 125, 220, 250, 440 AC = 110/120, 127, 200/ AC = 265/277, 380, 415/ 208, 220/240 480, 500 DC = 110, 125, 220, 250, 440 AC = 110/127, 220/240 AC = 380/440 DC =110/127, 220/240, 380/440
LC1F330
10 5
LC1F400
15
8 LC1F500 40..400** 18
8 LC1F630 22
73 LC1F780* 50 52 LC1F800 15 25
* Dual-parallel contactors of this size require an interposing relay. ** Control circuit frequency may be 40-400Hz; but power to contactors, monitored by CTs, must be 50Hz or 60Hz in frequency.
244
1639504 05/2008
Installation
NEMA Type S Contactors
Catalog references and characteristics for NEMA Type S contactors are listed in the table below. Coil voltages are grouped according to whether an interposing relay is required:
NEMA size 00 00, 0,1 2 3 4 5 6 7 15 59 Control Circuit VA maintained Frequency (Hz) (max) 33 27 37 38 47 89 50/60 115, 120, 208, 220, 240 115, 120, 208, 220, 240 115, 120, 208, 220, 240 24, 115, 120, 208, 220, 240 277, 380, 440, 480, 550, 600 Coil voltages interposing relay not required interposing relay required
277, 380, 440, 480, 550, 600 277, 380, 440, 480 277, 380, 440, 480, 550, 600
* Dual-parallel contactors of this size require an interposing relay. The minimum load for these outputs is a TeSys K contactor with a low consumption coil. The N.C. (95-96) relay can control 2 contactors of the specified size in parallel.
1639504 05/2008
245
Installation
5.2
Wiring of the DeviceNet Communication Network
At a Glance
Overview This section describes how to connect a controller to a DeviceNet network. It presents an example of DeviceNet network topology and lists cable specifications.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control paths and, for certain critical functions, provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure. Examples of critical control functions are emergency stop and overtravel stop. Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions. System control paths may include communication links. Consideration must be given to the implications of anticipated transmission delays or failures of the link.1 Each implementation of an LTM R controller must be individually and thoroughly tested for proper operation before being placed into service. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
1 For additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), "Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Control".

Topic DeviceNet Communication Wiring Terminal Characteristics DeviceNet Network Connection Page 247 248
246
1639504 05/2008
Installation
DeviceNet Communication Wiring Terminal Characteristics

Physical Interface and Connector The LTM R Controller front face is equipped with a connector for connection to the DeviceNet network. This connector is a 5-position terminal block, with 5.08 mm spaced terminal positions, as shown in the diagram below:
The markings for the terminal positions, from left to right, are as listed below:
Terminal position 1 2 3 4 5 Signal V+ CAN_H S CAN_L V-
Each entry slot accepts a wire in the range 0.14 to 1.5 mm2 (28 to 16 AWG). We recommend that you trim 10 mm from the wires jacket to make this connection. The connector follows the ODVA interoperability standards.
1639504 05/2008
247
Installation
DeviceNet Network Connection

Physical Layer DeviceNets data link layer is defined by the CAN (Controller Area Network) specification and by the implementation of widely available CAN controller chips. CAN also implements a differentially driven (common return), two-wire bus line. DeviceNets physical layer contains two twisted pairs of shielded wires. One twisted pair is for transferring data and one is for supplying power. This results in simultaneous support for devices that receive power from the network (like sensors) and those that are self-powered (like actuators). Devices can be added or removed from the bus line without powering down the fieldbus. Network Topology DeviceNet supports a trunk line/drop line network configuration. The implementation of multiple, branched, zero, and daisy chained drops should be established during system design. The network must be terminated at each end with 120 resistors. A sample DeviceNet network topology is shown in the following figure:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
trunk line drop line (0 to 6 m) daisy chain drop-off branched drop-off network node trunk line tap junction terminating resistor zero drop short drops
248
1639504 05/2008
Installation
Transmission Media
Your implementation of thick, thin, or flat cables for trunk lines and drop lines should be established during system design. Thick cables are generally used for trunk lines. Thin cables can be used for trunk or drop lines. End-to-end network distance varies with data rate and cable size. The following table shows the range of bauds that the Controller supports for CAN devices and the resulting maximum length of the DeviceNet network.
Cable Type Thick Trunk Thin Trunk Flat Trunk Maximum Drop Length Cumulative Drop Length* 125 kbits/s 500 m 100 m 420 m 6m 156 m 250 kbits/s 250 m 100 m 200 m 6m 78 m 500 kbits/s 100 m 100 m 75 m 6m 39 m
Maximum Network Lengths
*The sum of the length of all drop lines.
Network Model
Like any broadcast communications network, DeviceNet operates within a producer/ consumer model. Each data packets identifier field defines the data priority and allows for efficient data transfer among multiple users. All nodes listen on the network for messages with identifiers that apply to their functionality. Messages sent by producer devices will be accepted only by designated consumer devices. DeviceNet supports polled, cyclic, change of state, and explicit data exchange. DeviceNet allows users to implement a master/slave, or multi-master network architecture (or some combination thereof), depending on the devices flexibility and your application requirements. For more information, see Using the DeviceNet Communication Network, p. 362.
1639504 05/2008
249
Installation
250
1639504 05/2008
Commissioning
At a Glance
Overview This chapter provides an overview for commissioning the LTM R controller and the expansion module. This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Introduction First Power-up Required and Optional Parameters FLC (Full Load Current) Settings DeviceNet Communication Checking Verifying System Wiring Verify Configuration Page 252 254 256 257 259 262 265
1639504 05/2008
251
Commissioning
Introduction
Introduction Commissioning must be performed after the physical installation of the LTM R controller, LTM E expansion module and other hardware devices. The commissioning process includes: initialization of the installed devices, and configuration of the LTM R controller parameters that are required for operation of the LTM R controller, LTM E expansion module, and other system hardware The person performing commissioning must be familiar with the system hardware, and how it will be installed and used in the application. Hardware devices can include: motor voltage transformers external load current transformers ground current transformers communication network The product specifications for these devices provide the required parameter information. You need to understand how the LTM R controller will be used to be able to configure the protection, monitoring, and control functions for the application. For information about configuring control parameters, see p. 157. For information about configuring protection parameters, see p. 75. Initialization The LTM R controller is ready to be initialized after the hardware installation is complete. To initialize the LTM R controller: be sure the motor is off, then turn on the LTM R controller
CAUTION
IMPROPER INITIALIZATION Disconnect power to the motor before initializing the LTM R controller. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. Neither the LTM R controller nor the LTM E expansion module require additional hardware configuration (for example, turning dials, or setting dip-switches) to be initialized. When powered up for the first time, the LTM R controller enters an initial state and is ready for commissioning.
252
1639504 05/2008
Commissioning
Configuration Tools
Identify the configuration control sourceand the configuration toolbefore configuring parameters. The LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module can be configured locally using an HMI device or remotely via the network connection. The LTM R controller can be commissioned using: a Magelis XBTN410 HMI on which a 1-to-1 software application has been installed, an LTM CU control operator unit, a PC running PowerSuite software, a PLC connected to the LTM R controllers network port. The following parameters identify the configuration control source:
Parameter Config Via HMI Keypad Enable Config Via HMI Engineering Tool Enable Config Via Network Port Enable
Enables use of this tool Magelis XBTN410 device keypad, or TeSys T LTM CU control operator unit PC running PowerSuite software the network port (PLC)
Factory setting Enabled Enabled Enabled
Note: The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can commission the LTM R controller only if a 1-to-1 software application is installed. If a 1-to-many software application is installed, the Magelis XBTN410 HMI can operate up to 8 LTM R controllers after commissioning, but cannot perform commissioning for any LTM R controller. For information on the use of software application files, see p. 274. This chapter describes commissioning performed using either the Magelis XBTN410 HMI in a 1-to-1 configuration, or the LTM CU control operator unit, or PowerSuite software. Commissioning Process
Stage First power-up
The commissioning process remains the same, regardless which configuration tool you select. This process includes the following stages:
Description The LTM R controller initializes, and is ready for parameter configuration.
Configuring required settings Configure these parameters to move the LTM R controller out of its initialization state. The LTM R controller is ready for operations. Configuring optional settings Verifying hardware Verifying the configuration Configure these parameters to support the LTM R controller functions required by the application. Check hardware wiring. Confirm accurate parameter settings.
1639504 05/2008
253
Commissioning
First Power-up
Overview First power-up describes the first time power is cycled to: a new LTM R controller, or an LTM R controller that has been previously commissioned, but whose parameter settings have been restored to the factory settings, either as a result of: execution of the Clear All Command, or a firmware upgrade On first power-up, the LTM R controller enters a locked, non-configured statecalled the initialized stateand the Controller System Config Required parameter is turned On. The LTM R controller exits this state only after certain parameterscalled required parametershave been configured. When commissioning is done, the LTM R controller is no longer locked, and is ready for operations. For information on operating states, see p. 162. First Power-up in the Magelis XBTN410 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI, configuring the Sys Config menu parameters clears the Controller System Config Required parameter and brings the LTM R controller out of initialization. The first time the LTM R controller powers up after leaving the factory, the Magelis XBTN410 LCD automatically displays the Sys Config menu:
Sys Config ... ENTER <----- Press this key to enter the Sys Config menu
Sys Config Language
(line 1) (line 2)
When the settings of the Sys Config menu are saved, the Sys Config menu closes and the LCD displays the Main menu: ...
Sys Config End Config ENTER = No ? Yes Main menu Settings Saves configuration settings, ENTER <----- closes the Sys Config menu, and opens the Main menu
The Sys Config menu parameters are configured as part of the commissioning process. For information on commissioning, refer to the topic Sys Config menu (see p. 292).
254
1639504 05/2008
Commissioning
First Power-up in the LTM CU
Using the LTM CU control operator unit, configuring the Menu First Setup menu parameters clears the Controller System Config Required parameter and brings the LTM R controller out of initialization. The first time the LTM R controller powers up after leaving the factory, the LTM CU control operator unit LCD automatically displays the First Setup menu, with a list of parameters that need to be configured immediately:
First setup Phases Load CT ratio

OK
When all parameters are set, the last menu item to show up is End Config:
First setup Local channel End Config

OK
Click OK
End Config No Yes

OK
Click Yes to save the configuration
When the configuration has been saved, the First Setup menu is no longer displayed.
1639504 05/2008
255
Commissioning
First Power-up in PowerSuite Software
Using PowerSuite software, all parametersboth required and optionalare configured offline, then downloaded to the LTM R controller in a configuration file. A successful download clears the Controller System Config Required parameter, and brings the LTM R controller out of initialization. The first time the LTM R controller powers up after leaving the factory, PowerSuite software displays the following message: LTMR Controller has not been configured.
The connected LTMR has not been configured. Complete parameter settings and transfer configuration settings from the PC to the LTMR Controller.
OK This message indicates that the LTM R controller is in its initialized state. You must download a configuration filecontaining all the settingsbefore the LTM R controller can be used in operations. For information about working with configuration files, including transferring configuration settings from your PC to the LTM R controller, refer to the topic File Management (see p. 355). Note: The process to configure parameters using PowerSuite at first power-up or at any time is identical.
Required and Optional Parameters

Introduction In addition to the required parameters, you may also need to configure optional parameters, at first power-up or later. In the Magelis XBTN410 HMI: required parameters are located in the Sys Conf and Main Menu, optional parameters are located in the Main Menu. In the LTM CU HMI, required and optional parameters are located in the 5 submenus in the Menu. In PowerSuite software, required and optional parameters are located in the 6 submenus in the Settings menu.
In the Magelis XBTN410 HMI
In the LTM CU HMI In PowerSuite Software
256
1639504 05/2008
Commissioning
FLC (Full Load Current) Settings

FLC Basics
Note: Before setting the FLC, you must first set the Contactor rating and Load CT ratio. Load CT ratio = Load CT primary / (Load CT secondary * Passes) Current sensor max = Current range max * Load CT ratio Current range max is determined by the LTM R controller commercial reference. It is stored in units of 0.1 A and has one of the following values: 8.0, 27.0, or 100.0 A. Contactor rating is stored in units of 0.1 A and is set by the user between 1.0 and 1000.0 A. FLCmax is defined as the lower of the Current sensor max and the Contactor rating values. FLCmin = Current sensor max / 20 (rounded to the nearest 0.01 A.). FLCmin is stored internally in units of 0.01 A. Note: Do not set the FLC below the FLCmin.
Conversion of Amperes to FLC Settings
FLC values are stored as a percentage of FLCmax FLC (in %) = FLC (in A) / FLCmax Note: FLC values must be expressed as a percentage of FLCmax (resolution of 1 %). If you enter an unauthorized value, the LTM R will round it up to the nearest authorized value. For example, on a 0.4-8 A unit, the step between FLCs is 0.08 A. If you try to set an FLC of 0.43 A, the LTM R will round it up to 0.4 A.
Example 1 (No External CTs)
Data: FLC (in A) = 0.43 A Current range max = 8.0 A Load CT primary = 1 Load CT secondary = 1 Passes = 1 Contactor rating = 810.0 A Calculated parameters with 1 pass: Load CT ratio = Load CT primary / (Load CT secondary * passes) = 1 / (1 * 1) = 1.0 Current sensor max = Current range max * Load CT ratio = 8.0 * 1.0 = 8.0 A FLCmax = min (Current sensor max, Contactor rating) = min (8.0, 810.0) = 8.0 A FLCmin = Current sensor max / 20 = 8.0 / 20 = 0.40 A FLC (in %) = FLC (in A) / FLCmax = 0.43 / 8.0 = 5 %
1639504 05/2008
257
Commissioning
Example 2 (No External CTs, Multiple Passes)
Data: FLC (in A) = 0.43 A Current range max = 8.0 A Load CT primary = 1 Load CT secondary = 1 Passes = 5 Contactor rating = 810.0 A Calculated parameters with 5 passes: Load CT ratio = Load CT primary / (Load CT secondary * passes) = 1 / (1 * 5) = 0.2 Current sensor max = Current range max * Load CT ratio = 8.0 * 0.2 = 1.6 A FLCmax = min (Current sensor max, Contactor rating) = min (1.6, 810.0) = 1.6 A FLCmin = Current sensor max / 20 = 1.6 / 20 = 0.08 A FLC (in %) = FLC (in A) / FLCmax = 0.43 / 1.6 = 27 %
Example 3 (External CTs, Reduced Contactor Rating)
Data: FLC (in A) = 135 A Current range max = 8.0 A Load CT primary = 200 Load CT secondary = 1 Passes = 1 Contactor rating = 150.0 A Calculated parameters with 1 pass: Load CT ratio = Load CT primary / (Load CT secondary * passes) = 200 / (1 * 1) = 200.0 Current sensor max = Current range max * Load CT ratio = 8.0 * 200.0 = 1600.0 A FLCmax = min (Current sensor max, Contactor rating) = min (1600.0, 150.0) = 150.0 A FLCmin = Current sensor max / 20 = 1600.0 / 20 = 80.0 A FLC (in %) = FLC (in A) / FLCmax = 135 / 150.0 = 90 %
258
1639504 05/2008
Commissioning
DeviceNet Communication Checking

Introduction Networking is the last operation within the commissioning sequence. After the connectors are plugged in, you must enter the correct communication parameters (via PowerSuite software or the HMI) before communication can begin between the controller(s) and the PLC. To select the communication parameters, see p. 367. You can check whether your system can communicate properly. The DeviceNet communication verification sequence is:
Step 1: Check the communication LEDs on the LTM R front face End
Step 2:
Check the cabling and correct it if necessary
Step 3:
Check the configuration via PowerSuite or the HMI and correct it if necessary
1639504 05/2008
259
Commissioning
Step 1
On the front face of the controller are 2 communication LEDs: 1. Fallback 2. MNS (Module Network Status) The figure shows the LTM R front face with the DeviceNet communication LEDs:
1 2
The Communication Fallback is indicated by a red LED (1).

If the red Fallback LED is... Off On Then... The LTM R is not in communication fallback mode. The LTM R is in communication fallback mode.
260
1639504 05/2008
Commissioning
The DeviceNet communication status, marked as MNS (Module Network Status) is indicated by a bicolor (red and green) LED (2).
If the bicolor LED is... Then... Off Green Blinking green The LTM R is not powered or is not online. The LTM R is online and is connected. Communication is OK. The LTM R is online but is not connected. OR The LTM R is online but needs to be commissioned. OR The LTM R is online and in baudrate auto-detection mode (AutoBaud). There is a minor communication fault and/or a connection timeout. The LTM R has a critical communication fault or critical link failure and cannot communicate on the network.
Blinking red Red
Blinking green and red There is a communication fault and an Identify Comm Fault Request has been received.
Communication is possible only after you enter the correct communication parameters.
1 2 The MNS LED blinks green. Set the internal configuration: node address, baudrate (optional) Check the configuration with the PLC. The MNS LED switches to green. Note: If the LED is blinking, red, or off, refer to the table above for an explanation.
3 4
Step 2
The product is still not communicating and the MNS LED is not green. In this case, check the cables and connectors and correct any connection problem.
Step 3
The product is still not communicating. In this case, check the configuration via: PowerSuite software, or the HMI The communication failure can be the consequence of a wrong address, wrong baud rate or incorrect DeviceNet scanner configuration.
1639504 05/2008
261
Commissioning
Verifying System Wiring

Overview After all required and optional parameters have been configured, be sure to check your systems wiring, which can include: motor power wiring LTM R controller wiring external current transformer wiring diagnostic wiring I/O wiring Motor Power Wiring
Look at The motor nameplate The power wiring diagram
To verify the motor power wiring, check the following:

Action Confirm that the motor generates current and voltage within the ranges of the LTM R controller. Visually confirm that the actual power wiring matches the intended power wiring, as described in the power wiring diagram.
The list of faults and warnings in PowerSuite Look for any of the following faults or warnings: overpower software or the LCD display of the HMI device underpower over power factor under power factor The list of all or read only parameters in PowerSuite software or the scrolling HMI display of the HMI device Look for unexpected values in the following parameters: active power reactive power power factor
262
1639504 05/2008
Commissioning
Control Circuit Wiring

Look at
To verify control circuit wiring, check the following:

Action Visually confirm that the actual control wiring matches the intended control wiring, as described in the control wiring diagram. If the LED is off, the LTM R controller may not be receiving power. If the LED is off, the LTM R controller may not be communicating with the expansion module.
The control wiring diagram The LTM R controller Power LED The LTM R controller HMI LED
The expansion module Power LED If the LED is off, the expansion module may not be receiving power.
Current Transformer Wiring

Look at
Verify the load current transformer wiring and, if the application includes external load current transformers, also verify that wiring by checking the following:
Action Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended wiring, as described in the wiring diagram. Confirm that the Load CT Ratio parameter, or the combination of Load CT Primary and Load CT Secondary parameters accurately reflect the intended load CT ratio. Visually confirm that the Load CT Multiple Passes parameter accurately reflects the number of passes the wiring makes through the LTM R controllers embedded CT windows. Visually confirm that the motor and LTM R controller are wired for the number of phases set in the Motor Phases parameter. If the motor is a 3-phase motor, visually check that the phase wiring sequence matches the Motor Phases Sequence parameter setting.
The external CT wiring diagram The following load CT parameter settings, using PowerSuite software: Load CT Ratio Load CT Primary Load CT Secondary Load CT Multiple Passes The following load motor parameter setting, using PowerSuite software: Motor Phases The following load motor parameter setting, using either PowerSuite software or the LCD display of the HMI device: Motor Phases Sequence
1639504 05/2008
263
Commissioning
Diagnostic Wiring
Look at The wiring diagram
Verify the wiring for any motor temperature sensing device or external ground current transformer, if the application includes these devices, by checking the following:
Action Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended wiring, as described in the wiring diagram. Confirm that the combination of Ground CT Primary and Ground CT Secondary parameters accurately reflect the intended ground CT ratio.
The external ground CT specifications - and The following ground CT parameter settings, using PowerSuite software: Ground CT Primary Ground CT Secondary The motor temp sensor specifications -and The following parameter setting, using either PowerSuite software or the LCD display of the HMI device: Motor Temp Sensor
Confirm that the motor temp sensor actually employed is the same sensor type as set in the Motor Temp Sensor parameter.
I/O Wiring
Look at The wiring diagram
Verify the wiring for any I/O connections by checking the following:
Action Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended wiring, as described in the wiring diagram. Confirm that each command performs the intended start or stop function, when control is via the terminal strip or the HMI port.
The AUX1 (Run 1), AUX2 (Run 2), and Stop buttons on the HMI device - and The following parameter setting, using either PowerSuite software or the LCD display of the HMI device: Control Local Channel Setting The Reset button on the Magelis XBTN410 HMI - and The following parameter setting, using either PowerSuite software or the LCD display of the HMI device: Thermal Overload Fault Reset The PLC, if the LTM R controller is connected to a network - and The following parameter setting, using either PowerSuite software or the LCD display of the HMI device: Thermal Overload Fault Reset
Confirm that the HMI can command a manual fault reset, when control is set to manual.
Confirm that the PLC can command the intended start, stop and remote reset functions.
264
1639504 05/2008
Commissioning
Verify Configuration
Overview The final step in the commissioning process is to verify that all configurable parameters used in your application are properly configured. When performing this task, you will need a master list of all the parameters you intended to configure and their desired settings. You must compare the actual settings of configured parameters against this list. Tools Only PowerSuite software can display all configured parameters, including both required and optional parameters. These are found in the Settings branch of the tree control. The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can display all parameters in its Main menu, but cannot display all parameters located only in its Sys Config menu. The LTM CU HMI can display all parameters in its Menu. Process Verifying parameter settings is a 3-part process: 1 Transfer the configuration file from the LTM R controller to the PowerSuite software running in your PC. This lets you view the LTM R controllers present parameter settings. For information on transferring files from the LTM R controller to your PC, refer to the topic File Management (see p. 355). 2 Compare the master list of intended parameters and settings against the same settings located in the Settings branch of PowerSuite softwares tree control. 3 Change the configuration settings as desired. Do this using either: PowerSuite software, then download the edited file from your PC to the LTM R controller. For information on transferring files from your PC to the LTM R controller, refer to the topic File Management (see p. 355). Magelis XBTN410 HMI. To edit parameters located in the: Main menu, navigate to the main menu settings and make the appropriate edits Sys Config menu, navigate to the Services menu and use the Sys Config command to reopen the Sys Config menu, where you can again make and save edits LTM CU HMI. To edit parameters located in the Menu, navigate to the submenu settings and make the appropriate edits. For information about required settings, see p. 256.
1639504 05/2008
265
Commissioning
266
1639504 05/2008
Use
At a Glance
Overview This chapter describes: the user interface devices and the hardware configurations you can use to operate the LTM R controller how to set parameters with each user interface how to perform monitoring, fault handling, and control functions with each user interface. What's in this Chapter? This chapter contains the following sections:
Section 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 Topic Using the LTM R Controller Alone Configuring the Magelis XBTN410 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI (1-to-1) Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI (1-to-many) Using PowerSuite Software Using the DeviceNet Communication Network Page 268 274 278 318 350 362
1639504 05/2008
267
Use
7.1
At a Glance
Overview
Using the LTM R Controller Alone
This section describes how to use the LTM R controller, either by itself or connected to an LTM E expansion module, in a stand-alone configuration without a user interface device. This section contains the following topics:
Topic Hardware Configurations Stand Alone Configuration Page 269 270
268
1639504 05/2008
Use
Hardware Configurations
Overview The LTM R controllereither alone or connected to an expansion modulecan be operated with or without a user interface device. In any configuration, the LTM R controller can be configured to perform monitoring, fault management, motor protection and control functions. All user interface devices require an independent power source. Communications
User interface device Magelis XBTN410 HMI
User interface devices and their communications interfaces include:

Communicates via the HMI port via the local RJ45 connector on the LTM R controller or expansion module
TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit HMI port via the local RJ45 connector on the LTM R controller or expansion module PC running PowerSuite software Network PLC HMI port via the local RJ45 connector on the LTM R controller or expansion module Network port on the LTM R controller via the network RJ45 connector or terminal wiring
Note: For any instructions about the LTM CU, see the TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit Users Manual.
1639504 05/2008
269
Use
Stand Alone Configuration

Overview When operated without a user interface, the LTM R controllereither alone or connected to an expansion moduleprovides monitoring, protection, fault management and control functionality. Note: Although the LTM R controller can be operated without a user interface, you must to use one of the following devices for the purpose of configuring parameters. After parameters are configured, the device can be detached and the LTM R controller can operate in stand-alone configuration. Parameters can be configured using either: a Magelis XBTN410 HMI PowerSuite software. After LTM R controller parameters are configured, use the following controls to operate the controller:
Use this control LEDs: 5 LTM R controller LEDs 5 expansion module LEDs LTM R controller Test/Reset button Programmed operating parameters Digital inputs: 6 LTM R controller inputs 4 expansion module inputs To Monitor the state of the LTM R controller and expansion module Manage faults Control the: LTM R controller expansion module motor power and control wiring any connected sensors, including motor temp sensors external ground fault CTs Protect the: LTM R controller expansion module motor equipment
Programmed protection parameters
270
1639504 05/2008
Use
Configurations
The stand-alone physical configurations of the LTM R controllerwith and without a connected expansion moduleare depicted below: The LTM R controller alone
The LTM R controller and expansion module
LV1
LV2
LV3
Telemecanique LTMEV40BD
Power I.7 I.8 I.9 I.10 I.7 C7 I.8 C8 I.9 C9 I.10 C10
1639504 05/2008
271
Use
LTM R Controller LEDs

LED HMI Comm Power Color yellow green
Use the 5 LEDs on the face of the LTM R controller to monitor its state, as follows:
Describes Communication activity between LTM R controller and expansion module LTM R controller power or internal fault condition Indicates On = communication Off = no communication Solid green = power on, no internal faults, and motor off Flashing green = power on, no internal faults, and motor on Off = power off, or internal faults exist. Solid red = internal or protection fault Flashing red (2 x per s) = warning Flashing red (5 x per s) = load shed or rapid cycle condition Off = no faults, warnings, load shed or rapid cycle (when power is On) Solid red = in fallback Off = not in fallback (no power)) Green = communication Red = no communication
Alarm
red
Protection fault or warning, or internal fault condition
Fallback MNS
red red/green
Communication connection between LTM R controller and network module Communication activity between LTM R controller and network module
Expansion Module LEDs

LED: Power
Use the 5 LEDs on the face of the expansion module to monitor its operating and communications state, as follows:
Color: green or red Describes: Module power or internal fault condition State of input Indicates: Solid green = power on with no internal faults Solid red = power on with internal faults Off = power off On = input activated Off = input not activated
Digital Inputs I.7, I.8, I.9 and I.10
yellow
272
1639504 05/2008
Use
Test / Reset
Function: Fault reset
Use the Test / Reset button to perform the following LTM R controller functions:
Description: Procedure: Resets all faults that can be reset. See Overview, p. 200 Press the button and release within 3 s. for more information about resetting faults. Press and hold the button for more than 3 s up to and including 15 s.
Self-test (See p. 459) Performs a self-test if: motor is stopped no faults exist self-test function is enabled. Induce a fault Puts the LTM R controller into internal fault condition.
Press and hold the button down for more than 15 s.
1639504 05/2008
273
Use
7.2
At a Glance
Overview
Configuring the Magelis XBTN410
The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can be used in a: 1 HMI to 1 LTM R controller (1-to-1) physical configuration, or 1 HMI to up to 8 LTM R controllers (1-to-many) physical configuration. In each configuration, the HMI presents a unique user interface, including both LCD display and keypad. Each configuration requires the use of a distinct: software application file, and keypad label This section shows you how to obtain and install a software application in the Magelis XBTN410 for a 1-to-1 or 1-to-many configuration. Refer to the XBT-N Instruction Sheet that ships with the Magelis XBTN410 HMI for instructions on selecting and installing the keypad label that is appropriate for your configuration.

Topic Installing Magelis XBT L1000 Programming Software Download 1-to-1 and 1-to-many Software Application Files Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI Page 275 276 277
274
1639504 05/2008
Use
Installing Magelis XBT L1000 Programming Software

Overview The LTM R controller comes with a copy of Magelis XBT L1000 programming software. You need to: install the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC, and use it to transfer either a 1-to-1 or 1-to-many software application to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI. Note: Magelis XBT L1000 programming software is a powerful programming tool. This document describes only its utility in opening and transferring preprogrammed software applications to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI. For more information about the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software, consult its help file and printed documentation. For instructions on how to download 1-to-1 and 1-to-many software applications, see p. 276. For instructions on how to transfer 1-to-1 and 1-to-many software applications from your PC to the Magelis XBTN410 HM, see p. 277. Installation Steps
Step Action 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Place the installation disk into your PCs disk drive. The installation program should begin. If the installation program does not begin, use Microsoft Windows Explorer to navigate to and click on the file Setup.exe. If any screens appear that do not require action, click Next. In the language screen, select a language and click OK. In the name and company screen, type in your name and your company name (or accept the defaults) and click Next. If a screen appears warning you that protocols will be uninstalled, click Yes to continue. In the Protocols Choices screen, be sure that Modbus is selected, then click Next. In the Select Components screen, make no selections then click Next. In the Choose Destination Location screen, either accept the default path or use the Browse button to navigate to a new one, then click Next. In the Start Copying Files screen, review your selections then click: Back to return to earlier screens and make changes Next to proceed to the final screen. In the Finish screen, click Finish. The Magelis XBT L1000 programming software is installed.
To install the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC:
11
1639504 05/2008
275
Use
Download 1-to-1 and 1-to-many Software Application Files

Overview You must download the software application file required by your installation of the Magelis XBTN410 HMI from the www.schneider-electric.com website. From the schneider-electric website, you can freely obtain the following software application files:
File name LTM_1T1_(language)_(version).dop LTM_1T8_(language)_(version).dop Description 1-to-1 application file 1-to-many application file
The HMI can save and use only one software application file at a time. If you change your design from 1-to-1 to 1-to many, or vice-versa, you will need to transfer the appropriate software application file to the HMI to support the new configuration. For instructions on installing the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software, see p. 275. For instructions on transferring application files from the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software in your PC to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI, see p. 277.
276
1639504 05/2008
Use
Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI

Overview After you have installed the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC and downloaded the required 1-to-1 or 1-to-many application software file, you are ready to transfer the application software file to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI. For instructions on downloading software application files, see p. 276. Transfer Steps
Step Action 1 2 Supply power to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI. Connect the PC 9-PIN Com1 port to the 25-pin data port on the HMI using an XBT Z915 programming cable. The HMI LCD reads: "FIRMWARE VX.X WAITING FOR TRANSFER" Start up the Magelis XBT_L1000 programming software. Close all child windows in the programming software. In the File menu, select Open. The Open dialog is displayed. In the Open dialog, navigate to the 1-to-1 or 1-to-many software application file (with a .dop extension) and click Open. The programming software displays the selected file. In the Transfers menu, select Export. When notified that the Export command will destroy the existing application, click OK to continue the export. The HMI LCD indicates: "DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS" and then "DOWNLOAD COMPLETED" Click OK when the programming software reports "Transfer accomplished successfully".
To transfer a software application file from Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI:
3 4 5 6 7 8
1639504 05/2008
277
Use
7.3
At a Glance
Overview
Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI (1-to-1)
This section shows you how to use the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to operate a single LTM R controller in a 1 HMI to 1 LTM R controller (1-to-1) configuration. See p. 318 for instructions on how to use a single Magelis XBTN410 HMI to operate up to 8 LTM R controllers in a 1-to-many configuration. The 1-to-1 configuration presents a unique: user interface (LCD display and keypad) menu structure

Topic Physical Description (1-to-1) LCD Display (1-to-1) Navigating the Menu Structure (1-to-1) Editing Values (1-to-1) Menu Structure (1-to-1) Sys Config Menu (1-to-1) Main Menu (1-to-1) Main Menu - Settings (1-to-1) Main Menu - Statistics (1-to-1) Main Menu - Services (1-to-1) Main Menu - Product ID (1-to-1) Monitoring Using the Scrolling HMI Display (1-to-1) Fault Management (1-to-1) HMI Keypad Control (1-to-1) Page 279 281 286 287 290 292 293 294 302 306 310 311 314 316
278
1639504 05/2008
Use
Physical Description (1-to-1)

1-to-1 Interface In a 1-to-1 physical configuration, the Magelis XBTN410 HMI looks like this:
2
ESC AUX1 AUX2 STOP RESET ENTER
1 2
LCD display 8 button keypad
1-to-1 Keypad
The 1-to-1 configuration requires a customized keypad label for the 4 buttonsAUX1, AUX2, STOP, and RESETlocated at the bottom of the HMI. You will need to type or print the button names on a blank keypad label, then insert the label into the HMI. For instructions on selecting, customizing, and installing a customized keypad label, refer to the XBT-N Instruction Sheet that ships with the HMI. In a 1-to-1 configuration, the keypad buttons perform the following functions:
Keys
Description moves down to the previous item in: a value list the same level of the menu structure press to decrease the selected numerical digit by 1 unit moves up to the next item in: a value list the same level of the menu structure press to increase the selected numerical digit by 1 unit moves up one level in the menu structure closes the fault display and displays the scrolling variable list Note: the ESC key does not save any settings.
Comment Use these keys to scroll through setting selections: the "=" sign precedes a factory setting or a userselected setting the "?" sign precedes available settings.
ESC
You may need to press ESC several times to return to the upper level of a menu.
1639504 05/2008
279
Use
Keys
Description navigate from: a menu the sub-menus a sub-menu the functions a function the settings
Comment Some menus or sub-menus contain only functions and their settings. Others include functions with many parameters and their settings. When a setting is saved: the "?" is replaced by "=" and the saved setting is displayed for 2 seconds, then the display automatically returns to the next highest level
ENTER
confirm and save the displayed setting
AUX1
Performs motor control commands, as configured. For example, Run Forward, and Run Slow Note: Enabled when Control Channel is Local (terminal strip or HMI). Disabled when Control Channel is Network. (see p. 159) Performs motor control commands, as configured. For example, Run Reverse, and Run Fast Note: Enabled when Control Channel is Local (terminal strip or HMI). Disabled when Control Channel is Network. (see p. 159) Stops the motor. Local Stop command.
AUX2
STOP
RESET
Resets the LTM R controller and clears all faults that can be reset.
Local Reset command. Note: Behavior of the Reset key depends on Fault Reset Mode configuration. (see Overview, p. 200).
280
1639504 05/2008
Use
LCD Display (1-to-1)

Overview
LCD mode Configuration mode
In a 1-to-1 configuration, the Magelis XBTN410 presents 2 different LCD displays:

Displays Sys Config menu Main menu Description Contains basic configuration settings required for commissioning. Opens at first power-up. Contains optional settings, read-only statistics, read-only LTM R controller information and service commands. Opens on power-up if: Sys Config menu settings have been entered and saved, and no fault is active Contains a scrolling list of dynamically changing values for preselected variables. Contains a description of the most recently occurring fault or warning.
Presentation mode
HMI display Faults and warnings
The LCD displays the Sys Config menu until its basic configuration settings have been entered and saved as part of the commissioning process. When the Sys Config menu settings have been entered and saved, the LTM R controller clears the Controller System Config Required parameter. Thereafter, the LCD can present any of the other displays. After the Sys Config settings have been entered and saved, the content of the LCD display can change, as follows:
This LCD screen Main Menu HMI display Is displayed on power-up if no fault exists, or by pressing ENTER automatically, after the Main Menu has been displayed for 10 seconds with no key pressed, or by pressing ESC to close a fault or warning display automatically, upon the occurrence of a fault or warning
Fault or warning
1639504 05/2008
281
Use
Configuration Mode LCD
In configuration mode, the LCD displays two 12-character lines, as depicted below: (line 1)
(line 2)
the top line (line 1) displays the parentor higher levelmenu, sub-menu or parameter the bottom line (line 2) displays a related childor lower levelsub-menu, parameter, or setting. See p. 286 for information about navigating the menu structure in configuration mode. See p. 287 for information about editing values. Presentation Mode LCD In presentation mode, the LCD display contains 4 sections, as depicted below: (line A) (line B1)
(line B2) (line C)
line A 5 characters maximum line B1 3 characters maximum, plus up to 2 icons indicating the control source line B2 3 characters maximum line C 15 characters maximum; contains 2 pieces of information: 1 left justified, 1 right justified
In presentation mode, there are 2 HMI displays: HMI display fault and warning display All presentation mode displays are read-only.
282
1639504 05/2008
Use
Control Source Icons
When the HMI is in presentation mode, it displays the current control sourcein 1 or 2 iconslocated in the upper right corner of the LCD, as follows:
When the control souce is... local remote (network) LCD displays the icon(s)... L R
See HMI Display Examples, p. 313 and Warning Example, p. 314 for examples of the LCD displaying control source icons. Scrolling Variable List The LCD uses the presentation mode LCD to display a scrolling list of dynamically changing parameter values when there is no active fault or warning, and the LTM R controller state is: Not Ready state Ready state Start state Run state For a description of LTM R controller states, see p. 162. The scrolling variable list can contain the following information:
Line A Displays Motor state Values OFF Wait Description The motor is Off. The motor is Off and awaits completion of one or more of the following: Load shed Rapid cycle lockout Counting by another timeout (e.g. thermal time to restart) Motor is in start cycle Start cycle complete Step 1, 2-step operating mode Step 2, 2-step operating mode Forward, reverser operating mode Reverse, reverser operating mode Stop command issued, motor still running above On current level Low speed, 2-speed operating mode High speed, 2-speed operating mode Warning event detected Fault event detected Displays the values of parameters added to the HMI display. The number (1-6) of each active logic output on the LTM R controller. An "x" indicates an inactive output. Indicates the inputs displayed in Line C are expansion module inputs.
Parameter value LTM R controller outputs state LTM E inputs
START Run Run1 Run2 Fwd Rev STOP Slow Fast WARN FAULT Parameterspecific 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or x LTM E
1639504 05/2008
283
Use Line B1 Displays Control wiring Unit of measure Outputs Motor operating mode type Values 2W 3W Parameterspecific Out IND REV 2ST 2SP OVL Parameterspecific In NTC PT100 PTA PTC L1, L2, L3, L12, L23, L13 L12, L23, L13 Ready Rdy RunStart Run Wait Run1 Run2 Fwd Rev Stop Slow Fast 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or x Load Shed RapidCycle Bump Bumpless Description 2-wire (maintained) configuration 3-wire (impulse) configuration Displays the unit of the displayed parameter value in the HMI display. LTM R controller output state is displayed in Line A. Independent Reverser 2 step 2 speed Overload Further describes the unit in Line B1 for displayed parameter values. LTM R controller or LTM E expansion module input state is displayed in Line C-left. NTC binary PT100 PTC analog PTC binary Phase(s) with the highest current imbalance Highest voltage imbalance Non-fault condition Warning condition Start state Run state Load shed with active Run command Step 1, 2-step operating mode Step 2, 2-step operating mode Forward, reverser operating mode Reverse, reverser operating mode Stop command issued, motor still running above On current level Low speed, 2 speed operating mode High speed, 2 speed operating mode The number of each active logic input on the LTM R controller (1-6) or the expansion module (7-10). An "x" indicates an inactive input. (Applies to scrolling parameter list) Load shed event occurring Rapid cycle event occurring Bump transition occurring Bumpless transition occurring
B2
Unit of measure Inputs Temp sensor type
Current imbalance Voltage imbalance LTM R controller state
C - left
Inputs state C - right (blank) Transition event
284
1639504 05/2008
Use
Fault and Warning Display
When the LTM R controller detects a fault or warning condition, the LCD uses the presentation mode LCD to immediately display a message describing: the most recently occurring fault, or the most recently occurring warning, if no fault is active To close the fault or warning message display, click ESC to return to the scrolling HMI display. The fault and warning display contains the following information:
Line A B1 B2
Displays System state Fault or Warning Code Operating mode
Value(s) WARN FAULT See p. 212 for a list of fault and warning codes and their descriptions. IND REV 2ST 2SP OVL
C - left
LTM R controller state
Ready Rdy Run Start
C - right
Fault or warning description (Protection name)
1639504 05/2008
285
Use
Navigating the Menu Structure (1-to-1)

Overview
Use the
ENTER
, and
ESC
buttons to:
navigate the Sys Config and Main menus scroll within a value list select a setting in a value list exit a value list without making a selection Note that, in the example below, the
ENTER
button serves 2 different purposes:
1 steps into the next lower level of the menu structure 2 selects an item in a value list, and returns to the previous (higher) level screen Example Menu structure navigation example:
Settings Language
1
ENTER
Language =English
Language ?Francais
2
ENTER
Language =Francais
ESC
ESC
Settings Date-Time
ENTER
Date-Time Year
ENTER
Year =2008
286
1639504 05/2008
Use
Editing Values (1-to-1)

Overview
Use the , , , and ESC buttons to select and edit settings. There are 2 ways to edit setting values using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI in a 1-to-1 configuration: selecting an item in a value list editing a numerical value one digit at a time Note: Some settings, although expressed as numerical values, are selected in the same manner as an item in a value list. For example, a setting with a value that is expressed in units, but can be incremented or decremented only by tens or hundreds of units, is edited by scrolling through a value list. Editing any value requires familiarity with the Magelis XBTN410 menu structure, and general navigation principles. For information on menu navigation, see p. 286. For information on the menu structure, see p. 290.
ENTER
1639504 05/2008
287
Use
Selecting Values in a List
The following example describes the selection of a Thermal Overload Trip Class setting:
Step Description 1 Navigate to the Thermal Overload Trip Class parameter Screen display
Th Overload Trip Class
Press the button to step into the Thermal Overload Trip Class value list. The = sign indicates the displayed value is this parameters saved setting.
ENTER
Trip Class =5 Trip Class ? 10 Trip Class = 10 Th Overload Trip Class
Press the
button to move to the previous value in the
list, and press the button move to the next value in the list. The ? indicates the displayed value is not this parameters saved setting. 4 When you have displayed the desired value, press the button to save the setting. The ? changes to a =, indicating the selected value is now this parameters saved setting.
ENTER
After displaying the new setting for 2 seconds, the HMI automatically returns to the previous (higher) level screen
Editing Numerical Values
The following example describes changing the Long Start Fault Timeout setting from its default value of 10 seconds to a new setting of 25 seconds:
Step Description 1 Navigate to the Long Start Fault Timeout parameter. Screen display
Long Start Fault Time
Press the button to step into the Long Start Fault Timeout setting. The = sign indicates the displayed value is the saved setting.
ENTER
Fault Time = 010 Sec

1639504 05/2008
288
Use Step Description 3 Press the button again to select the first (left-most) digit for editing. Because 0 is the desired value for the first digit, this digit will not be edited.
ENTER
Screen display
Fault Time = 0 - - Sec Fault Time ? 01 - Sec
4 Press the editing.
ENTER
button again to select the second digit for
Press the button once to increment the second digit to the value 2.
Fault Time ? 02 - Sec
6 Press the
ENTER
button to select the third digit for editing.
Fault Time ? 020 Sec
Press the button 5 times to increment the second digit to the value 5.
Fault Time ? 025 Sec
After you have entered the new value, press the button to save the setting. The ? changes to a =, indicating the edited value is now this parameters saved setting.
ENTER
Fault Time = 025 Sec Long Start Fault Time
After displaying the new setting for 2 seconds, the HMI returns to the previous (higher) level screen
1639504 05/2008
289
Use
Menu Structure (1-to-1)

Overview In a 1-to-1 configuration, the Magelis XBTN410 HMI menu structure includes 2 configurable menus: Sys Config menu Main menu Each menu consists of up to 7 levels of nested parameters. When using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to navigate to an editable setting or to a read-only value, you must be aware of the menu structure and the location of your destination parameter. Sys Config Menu The Sys Config menu: opens on first power-up of the LTM R controller contains basic settings for operating the LTM R controller, expansion module, and equipment The configuration of the Sys Config menu parameters is complete when the End Config setting is set to Yes. After the Sys Config menu has been configured, the Magelis XBTN410 HMI displays the Main menu on subsequent power-ups. The HMI will not again display the Sys Config menu unless: the Controller System Config Required parameter has been cleared by: executing a Clear All Command, or upgrading the LTM R controllers firmware Sys Config is selected in the Services menu. For information on making this selection, refer to the topic Main menu - Services (see p. 306).
290
1639504 05/2008
Use
Main Menu
The Main menu: appears on power-up of the LTM R controller after the Sys Config menu settings have been saved, if no fault or warning is active contains optional configuration settings for the LTM R controller, LTM E expansion module and equipment closes if no key is pressed within 10 seconds re-opens by pressing the ENTER key If the motor is running when the LCD displays the Main menu, some parameters cannot be re-configured and some commands cannot be executed, including: Load CT Ratio Motor Operating Mode Fault Reset Mode (during a fault condition) Clear All Command.
Saving Settings
Only configurable parameter settingsthe Sys Config menu parameters and the Main menus Settings sub-menu parameterscan be saved to a file and subsequently downloaded to a replacement LTM R controller. Use PowerSuite software to save and download settings. The Main menus Statistics, Services, and Product ID sub-menus are not saved and therefore cannot be downloaded to a replacement LTM R controller.
1639504 05/2008
291
Use
Sys Config Menu (1-to-1)

Overview In a 1-to-1 configuration, when the LTM R controller is in its initialized state, the HMI displays the Sys Config menu. The Sys Config menu contains the following parameters:
Level 3 Year Month Day Hour Minutes Seconds Motor Nom Voltage Phases Phase Seq. Oper Mode Dir Transit
(1)
Sys Config Menu

Level 2 Language Date-Time
Level 4
Level 5
Parameter name HMI Language Setting Date And Time Setting
Motor Nominal Voltage Motor Phases Motor Phases Sequence Motor Operating Mode Control Direct Transition Motor Transition Timeout Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout Motor Star Delta Motor Aux Fan Cooled Motor Temp Sensor Type Ground Current Mode Load CT Ratio Primary Secondary Load CT Primary Load CT Secondary Load CT Multiple Passes Ground CT Primary Ground CT Secondary Contactor Rating Thermal Overload Mode
Transit Time (2) 2 Step Level (3) 2 Step Time (3) Star-Delta (3) Aux Fan (4) TempSensor Gr CT Mode Ext CT Ratio
Passes Nb Gr CT Ratio
(5)
Primary Secondary
ContactorRtg ThOverload 292
1639504 05/2008
Use Level 2 Network Addr IP Address (7) Subnet Mask (7) Gateway (7) Master IP (7) Inputs conf End Config
(6)
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Parameter name Network Port Address Setting Network Port IP Address Setting Network Port Subnet Mask Setting Network Port Gateway Setting Network Port Master IP Setting Controller AC Inputs Configuration Register Controller System Config Required
Parameters with a note are not displayed in the following cases:

Parameter with note... is not displayed if... (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) the operating mode is independent, overload or 2-step the operating mode is independent or overload the operating mode is independent, reverser, 2-speed or overload the thermal overload mode is set to Inverse thermal the ground CT ratio is internal ground CT the LTM R is a Modbus/TCP network protocol version the LTM R is a Modbus, Profibus, CANopen or DeviceNet network protocol version
Main Menu (1-to-1)

Overview In a 1-to-1 configuration, the HMI displays a Main menu that consists of 4 secondlevel sub-menus, each with up to 3 additional levels of sub-menus. The 4 secondlevel sub-menus are displayed below:
Level 2 Settings Statistics Services Product ID Contains See... Configurable settings for all parameters, plus HMI the following topic. display selections. A read-only history of all measured statistics, including motor operation, faults and counters. Executable operating commands including selftest, clear statistics, and password. A read-only description of the LTM R controller, expansion module, and network module. Main Menu - Statistics (see p. 302) Main Menu - Services (see p. 306) Main Menu - Product ID (see p. 310)
Level 1 Main Menu
1639504 05/2008
293
Use
Main Menu - Settings (1-to-1)

Settings Menu The Settings menu contains the following sub-menus:
Level 1 Main Menu Level 2 Settings Level 3 Language Date-Time Motor LocalControl Stop Config LI3 Config TransferMode Reset Current Voltage Power Voltage Mgt Diagnostic LockOuts Network Port HMI Port HMI Display
All of the settings sub-menus are described below, except for the HMI Display. For information on the use and contents of the HMI Display sub-menu see p. 311. Language, and Date-Time
Level 3 Language Date-Time Year Month Day Hour Minutes Seconds
The Language and Date-Time sub-menus contain the following editable parameters:
Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name / reference HMI Language Setting Date And Time Setting
294
1639504 05/2008
Use
Motor
Level 3 Motor
The Motor sub-menu contains the following editable parameters:

Level 4 Nom Voltage Nom Power Phase Seq. (1) Dir Transit
(2) (3)
Level 5 kWatts Horsepower
Parameter name / reference Motor Nominal Voltage Motor Nominal Power Motor Phases Sequence Control Direct Transition Motor Transition Timeout Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout Motor Aux Fan Cooled
Transit Time
2 Step Level (4) 2 Step Time (4) Aux Fan (5) TempSensor (6) Fault Enable Fault Level
(7)
Motor Temp Sensor Fault Enable Motor Temp Sensor Fault Threshold Motor Temp Sensor Warning Enable Motor Temp Sensor Warning Threshold
Warn Enable Warn Level (7)

Parameter with note... is not displayed if... (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) the motor is a single-phase motor the operating mode is independent, overload or 2-step the operating mode is independent or overload the operating mode is independent, reverser, 2-speed or overload the thermal overload mode is set to Inverse thermal no PTC is selected the sensor is a PTC binary
1639504 05/2008
295
Use
Local Control, Stop Config, LI3 Config, Transfer Mode, and Reset
Level 3 LocalControl Stop Config LI3 Config TransferMode Reset (1)
The Local Control, Stop Config, LI3 Config, Transfer Mode, and Fault Reset submenus contain the following editable parameters:
Level 4 HMI Term Strip
Level 5
Parameter name / reference Control Local Channel Setting Stop HMI Disable Stop Terminal Strip Disable Logic Input 3 External Ready Enable Control Transfer Mode
Mode Auto Group 1 Auto Group 2 Auto Group 3

(2)
Fault Reset Mode Attempts Reset Time

(2)
Auto-Reset Attempts Group 1 Setting Auto-Reset Group 1 Timeout Auto-Reset Attempts Group 2 Setting Auto-Reset Group 2 Timeout Auto-Reset Attempts Group 3 Setting Auto-Reset Group 3 Timeout
Attempts Reset Time Attempts Reset Time
(2)

Parameter with note... is not displayed if... (1) (2) it is during a fault the reset mode is manual or remote
296
1639504 05/2008
Use
Current
Level 3 Current
The Current sub-menu contains the following editable parameters:

Level 4 ThOverload Level 5 Fault Enable FLC1 or OC1 FLC2 or OC2 Trip Class (1) Reset Level (1) Def O-Time (2) Def D-Time (2) Warn Enable Warn Level Clr ThEnable CurrPhImb
(3)
Parameter name / reference Thermal Overload Fault Enable Motor Full Load Current Ratio Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio Motor Trip Class Thermal Overload Fault Reset Threshold Thermal Overload Fault Definite Timeout Long Start Fault Timeout Thermal Overload Warning Enable Thermal Overload Warning Threshold Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command Current Phase Imbalance Fault Enable Current Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running Current Phase Imbalance Warning Enable Current Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold
Fault Enable Fault Level FltTimeStart FltTimeRun Warn Enable Warn Level
1639504 05/2008
297
Use
Level 3 Current (continued)
Level 4 CurrPhLoss
(3)
Level 5 Fault Enable Fault Time Warn Enable
Parameter name / reference Current Phase Loss Fault Enable Current Phase Loss Fault Timeout Current Phase Loss Warning Enable Current Phase Reversal Fault Enable Long Start Fault Enable Long Start Fault Threshold Long Start Fault Timeout Jam Fault Enable Jam Fault Threshold Jam Fault Timeout Jam Warning Enable Jam Warning Threshold Undercurrent Fault Enable Undercurrent Fault Threshold Undercurrent Fault Timeout Undercurrent Warning Enable Undercurrent Warning Threshold Overcurrent Fault Enable Overcurrent Fault Threshold Overcurrent Fault Timeout Overcurrent Warning Enable Overcurrent Warning Threshold Ground Current Fault Enable External Ground Current Fault Threshold External Ground Current Fault Timeout Ground Current Warning Enable External Ground Current Warning Threshold
CurrPhRev (3) Long Start
Fault Enable Fault Enable Fault Level Fault Time
Jam
Fault Enable Fault Level Fault Time Warn Enable Warn Level
UnderCurr
Over Curr
GroundCurr

Parameter with note... is not displayed if... (1) (2) (3) the thermal overload mode is set to Definite time the thermal overload mode is set to Inverse thermal the motor is a single-phase motor
298
1639504 05/2008
Use
Voltage
Level 3 Voltage
(1)
The Voltage sub-menu contains the following editable parameters:

Level 4 VoltPhImb
(2)
Level 5 Fault Enable Fault Level FltTimeStart FltTimeRun Warn Enable Warn Level
(2)
Parameter name / reference Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Enable Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Enable Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold Voltage Phase Loss Fault Enable Voltage Phase Loss Fault Timeout Voltage Phase Loss Warning Enable Voltage Phase Reversal Fault Enable Undervoltage Fault Enable Undervoltage Fault Threshold Undervoltage Fault Timeout Undervoltage Warning Enable Undervoltage Warning Threshold Overvoltage Fault Enable Overvoltage Fault Threshold Overvoltage Fault Timeout Overvoltage Warning Enable Overvoltage Warning Threshold
VoltPhLoss
Fault Enable Fault Time Warn Enable
VoltPhRev (2) UnderVolt
Fault Enable Fault Enable Fault Level Fault Time Warn Enable Warn Level
Over Volt

Parameter with note... is not displayed if... (1) (2) there is no LTM E expansion module connected the motor is a single-phase motor
1639504 05/2008
299
Use
Power, Voltage Mgt, Diagnostics and Lock Outs

Level 3 Power
(1)
The Power, Voltage Mgt, Diagnostics and Lock Outs sub-menus contain the following editable parameters:
Level 4 UnderPower Level 5 Fault Enable Fault Level Fault Time Warn Enable Warn Level Over Power Fault Enable Fault Level Fault Time Warn Enable Warn Level Under PF Fault Enable Fault Level Fault Time Warn Enable Warn Level Over PF Fault Enable Fault Level Fault Time Warn Enable Warn Level Parameter name / reference Underpower Fault Enable Underpower Fault Threshold Underpower Fault Timeout Underpower Warning Enable Underpower Warning Threshold Overpower Fault Enable Overpower Fault Threshold Overpower Fault Timeout Overpower Warning Enable Overpower Warning Threshold Under Power Factor Fault Enable Under Power Factor Fault Threshold Under Power Factor Fault Timeout Under Power Factor Warning Enable Under Power Factor Warning Threshold Over Power Factor Fault Enable Over Power Factor Fault Threshold Over Power Factor Fault Timeout Over Power Factor Warning Enable Over Power Factor Warning Threshold Voltage Dip configuration Function Loss Level Loss Time
(2) (3)
Voltage Mgt
(1)
Voltage Dip Mode Voltage Dip Threshold Load Shedding Timeout Auto Restart Immediate Timeout Auto Restart Delayed Timeout Voltage Dip Restart Threshold Auto Restart Immediate Timeout Fault Enable Warn Enable CT Reversal Diagnostic Fault Enable Diagnostic Warning Enable Wiring Fault Enable Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout
Immed Time (4) Delayed Time (4) Restart Level (2) Restart Time Diagnostic Ctrl Protect Wiring LockOuts RpdCycl Time
(2)
300
1639504 05/2008
Use

Parameter with note... is not displayed if... (1) (2) (3) (4) there is no LTM E expansion module connected the voltage dip mode is set to none the voltage dip mode is not set to load shed the voltage dip mode is not set to auto restart
Network Port, and HMI Port

Level 3 Network Port
The Network Port and HMI Port sub-menus contain the following editable parameters:
Level 4 Address
(1)
Level 5
Parameter name / reference Network Port Address Setting Network Port IP Address Setting Network Port Subnet Mask Setting Network Port Gateway Setting Network Port Master IP Setting Network Port Frame Type Setting
IP Address (2) Subnet Mask (2) Gateway (2) Master IP (2) Frame Type (2) FDR (2) FDR Synchro Auto Synchro Check Time Baud Rate (2) 10 Mb/s 100 Mb/s Baud Rate Parity (3) Config Ctrl Comm Loss Fault Fault Time Fallback (4) Warning
(2) (1)
Network Port FDR Synchro Setting Network Port Auto Synchro Setting Network Port Control Interval Setting Network Port Baud Rate Setting
Network Port Baud Rate Setting Network Port Parity Setting Config Via Network Port Enable Network Port Fault Enable Network Port Comm Loss Timeout Network Port Fallback Setting Network Port Warning Enable
1639504 05/2008
301
Use
Level 3 HMI Port
Level 4 Address Baud Rate Parity Config Ctrl Comm Loss
Level 5
Parameter name / reference HMI Port Address Setting HMI Port Baud Rate Setting HMI Port Parity Setting
HMI PowerSuite Fault Fallback Warning

(4)
Config Via HMI Keypad Enable Config Via HMI Engineering Tool Enable HMI Port Fault Enable HMI Port Fallback Setting HMI Port Warning Enable

Parameter with note... is not displayed if... (1) (2) (3) (4) the LTM R is a Modbus/TCP network protocol version the LTM R is a Modbus, Profibus, CANopen or DeviceNet network protocol version the LTM R is a Profibus, CANopen, DeviceNet or Modbus/TCP network protocol version the fallback value is not accepted.To check for acceptable fallback values, see p. 60.
HMI Display
Use the HMI Display sub-menu to add items to the scrolling display of dynamically changing parameter values. For information about using this feature, see p. 311.
Main Menu - Statistics (1-to-1)

Statistics menu The Statistics menu contains the following sub-menus:
Level 1 Main Menu Level 2 Statistics Level 3 History Counters Fault n-0 Fault n-1 Fault n-2 Fault n-3 Fault n-4
302
1639504 05/2008
Use
History and Counters

Level 3 History Level 4
The History and Counters sub-menus contain the following read-only parameters:
Level 5 Parameter name / reference Controller Internal Temperature Max Operating Time Motor Starts Count Motor LO1 Closings Count Motor LO2 Closings Count Motor Last Start Duration Motor Last Start Current Ratio Faults Count Warnings Count Auto-Reset Count Th Ovld Flt Th Ovld Warn TempSens Flt Curr Imb Flt C PhLossFlt LongStartFlt Jam Fault UnderCurrFlt OverCurrFlt GroundFault VoltPhImbFlt Thermal Overload Faults Count Thermal Overload Warnings Count Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count Current Phase Loss Faults Count Long Start Faults Count Jam Faults Count Undercurrent Faults Count Overcurrent Faults Count Ground Current Faults Count Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count
CntlrTempMax Oper Time Motor Starts LO1 Starts LO2 Starts LastStartDur LastStrtAmp
Counters
All Faults All Warnings Auto Resets Protection
1639504 05/2008
303
Use
Level 3 Counters (continued)
Level 4 Protection (continued)
Level 5 V PhLossFlt UnderVoltFlt OverVoltFlt UnderPow Flt OverPow Flt Under PF Flt Over PF Flt
Parameter name / reference Voltage Phase Loss Faults Count Undervoltage Faults Count Overvoltage Faults Count Underpower Faults Count Overpower Faults Count Under Power Factor Faults Count Over Power Factor Faults Count Diag Faults Count Wiring Faults Count Load Sheddings Count Auto Restart Immediate Count Auto Restart Delayed Count Auto Restart Manual Count HMI Port Faults Count Network Port Internal Faults Count Network Port Config Faults Count Network Port Faults Count Controller Internal Faults Count Internal Port Faults Count
Diagnostic Connection Voltage Mgt
Diag Faults ConnectFlt Load Sheds Immediate Delayed Manual
Comm
HMI Loss Flt Ntwk Int Flt NtwkCnfg Flt NtwkPort Flt
Internal
Cntrlr IntFlt InterPortFlt
304
1639504 05/2008
Use
Fault Statistics
The LTM R controller retains a statistical snapshot taken the instant each of the last 5 faults occurred. The most recent fault is n-0. The oldest fault record is n-4. Fault n-0 records information in the following parameters:
Level 3 Fault n-0 Level 4 Fault Code Date Time FLC Ratio FLC Max Avg Current L1 Current L2 Current L3 Current Gr Current AvgCurrRatio L1 CurrRatio L2 CurrRatio L3 CurrRatio GrCurrRatio CurrPhImb (1) ThCapacity Avg Volts L3-L1 Volts L1-L2 Volts L2-L3 Volts VoltPhImb (1) Frequency Active Power PowFactor TempSensor
(2)
Parameter name / reference Fault Code n-0 Date And Time n-0 Motor Full Load Current Ratio n-0 Motor Full Load Current Max n-0 Average Current n-0 L1 Current n-0 L2 Current n-0 L3 Current n-0 Ground Current n-0 Average Current Ratio n-0 L1 Current Ratio n-0 L2 Current Ratio n-0 L3 Current Ratio n-0 Ground Current Ratio n-0 Current Phase Imbalance n-0 Thermal Capacity Level n-0 Average Voltage n-0 L3- L1 Voltage n-0 L1- L2 Voltage n-0 L2- L3 Voltage n-0 Voltage Phase Imbalance n-0 Frequency n-0 Active Power n-0 Power Factor n-0 Motor Temp Sensor n-0
TempSensor (3) Motor Temp Sensor degree n-0

Parameter with note... is not displayed if... (1) (2) (3) the motor is a single-phase motor the sensor is PT100 or none the sensor is PTC or NTC
Fault n-1 to n-4 statistics record information in the same way as Fault n-0. See corresponding n-1 to n-4 parameters.
1639504 05/2008
305
Use
Main Menu - Services (1-to-1)

Services Menu The Services menu contains the following sub-menus:
Level 1 Main Menu Level 2 Services Level 3 Maintenance Clear HMI Password
Menu Structure
Level 3 Maintenance
The Maintenance, Clear, and HMI Password sub-menus contain the following editable parameters and executable commands:
Level 4 Self Test Self Test Enable Go to SysCfg FDR
(1)
Level 5
Level 6
Parameter name / reference Self Test Command Test Fault Enable Controller System Config Required
Save Conf Restore Conf Clear All CntlSettings NtwkSettings Statistics Th Cap Level HMI Password Change Pswd Confirm Confirm Confirm Confirm Confirm Confirm
FDR Data Backup Command FDR Data Restore Command Clear All Command Clear Controller Settings Command Clear Network Port Settings Command Clear Statistics Command Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command HMI Keypad Password

Parameter with note... is not displayed if... (1) the LTM R is a Modbus, Profibus, CANopen or DeviceNet network protocol version
Self Test
Executing a self test sets the value of the Self Test Command parameter to 1. After the self test finishes, the value of this parameter returns to 0. For more information on the self test function, see p. 459.
306
1639504 05/2008
Use
Go to Sys Config
Use the Go to Sys Config sub-menu command to: set the Controller System Configuration Required parameter, and re-open the Sys Config menu for editing Note: The motor must be turned off before you can execute the Go to Sys Config sub-menu command. When you execute the Sys Config command, the LTM R controller returns to its initialized state. The Sys Config menu parameters must be configured before the LTM R controller can resume operations. For information about the Sys Config menu, see p. 292.
Clear
Selection All
1
The Clear commands perform the following tasks:

Clears all editable settings, and restores their values to the factory settings all statistics, and resets their values to 0 all editable settings, and restores their values to the factory settings only settings for the network port, and restores their values to the factory settings all statistics, and resets their values to 0 the following parameters: Thermal Capacity Level Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout Thermal Overload Fault Reset See the warning below.
Settings Network Port Statistics Th Cap Level
Execution of the Clear All Command returns the SysConfig menu settings to their factory settings, and requires a re-configuration of the Sys Config menu.
WARNING
LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and fire. Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection should be limited to applications where immediate restart is vital. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
1639504 05/2008
307
Use
HMI Password
Use HMI password protection to prevent unauthorized configuration of LTM R controller parameters from the HMI. The password must be an integer from 0000 to 9999. A password value of 0000 disables password protection. Password protection is disabled by default. The process of entering a password is similar to editing a numerical setting. Editing any value requires familiarity with the Magelis XBTN410 menu structure, and general navigation principles. For information on menu navigation, see p. 286. For information on the menu structure, see p. 290. The following example changes the password from an initial value of 0000 to a password value of 1001:
Step Description 1 Navigate to the HMI Password parameter in the Services menu. Screen display
HMI Password Change Pswd
Press the button to step into the Password setting. The value 0000 appears by default, and is not necessarily the active password.
ENTER
Change Pswd = 0000 Change Pswd =0***
Press the button again to select the first (leftmost) digit for editing.
ENTER
Press the button once to increment the first digit to the value 1. The = sign changes to ?, indicating the value is being edited.
Change Pswd ?1*** Change Pswd ?*0**
Press the button to move to the second digit for editing. Because this digit will be 0, no further editing is required. Note: Any digit not the focus of editing is hidden and displayed as an asterisk.
ENTER
308
1639504 05/2008
Use Step Description 6 Press the button to move to the third digit for editing. Because this digit also will be 0, no further editing is required.
ENTER
Screen display
Change Pswd ?**0* Change Pswd ?***0
7 Press the editing.
ENTER
button to move to the fourth digit for
Press the button once to increment the first digit to the value 1. The = sign changes to ?, indicating the value is being edited.
Change Pswd ?***1 Confirm Pswd = 0000 HMI Password Change Pswd
Press the button to complete the first entry of the new password. The LCD displays the screen for confirming the new password.
ENTER
10
Repeat steps 3 through 9. When the new password is confirmed, the LCD returns to the previous (higher) level screen.
If you forget a changed password, follow the instructions below to disable the password:
Step Description 1 2 3 Press the 4 5 Display Change Pswd. Type in 7755.
ENTER
button. The LCD displays the Confirm Pswd screen.
Type again 7755. Press the button. When the new password is confirmed, the LCD returns to the previous (higher) level screen.
ENTER
1639504 05/2008
309
Use
Main Menu - Product ID (1-to-1)

Product ID menu The Product ID menu contains the following sub-menus:
Level 1 Main Menu Level 2 Product ID Level 3 Controller Exp Module Network
Controller, Expansion Module, Network sub-menus
The Controller, Expansion Module, and Network sub-menus contain the following read-only parameters:
Level 3 Controller Level 4 Comm Ref Firmware CurrentRange Control Volt Digital I/O Exp Module Comm Ref Firmware Control Volt Digital I/O Ready Network Protocol Firmware Parameter name / reference Controller Commercial Reference Controller Firmware Version LTM R controller amperage LTM R controller voltage The number of logic inputs and logic outputs Expansion Commercial Reference Expansion Firmware Version LTM R controller voltage The number of logic inputs The operational status of the expansion module Network Port Commercial Reference Network Port Firmware Version
310
1639504 05/2008
Use
Monitoring Using the Scrolling HMI Display (1-to-1)

Overview Use the LCD display in presentation mode to present a scrolling list of parameters and their dynamically changing values. To use this feature: add parameters to the scrolling list in the HMI Display sub-menu monitor the scrolling list using the LCD display. HMI Display Use the HMI Display sub-menu to add items to the scrolling display of dynamically changing parameter values. Use Display All to add all items in a group. The HMI Display sub-menu contains the following selections:
Level 4 Language Display All Status Display All Date Time Oper Time Frequency StartPerHour Motor Status I/O Status Th Overload Display All ThCapacity ThCapRem TimeToTrip Control Mode Level 5 Parameter name / reference HMI Language Setting Selects all HMI display items. Selects all Status items. HMI Display Date Enable HMI Display Time Enable HMI Display Operating Time Enable HMI Display Frequency Enable HMI Display Starts Per Hour Enable HMI Display Motor Status Enable HMI Display IO Status Enable Selects all Thermal Overload items. HMI Display Thermal Capacity Level Enable HMI Display Thermal Capacity Remaining Enable HMI Display Time To Trip Enable HMI Display Control Channel Enable
Level 3 HMI Display
1639504 05/2008
311
Use
Level 3 HMI Display (continued)
Level 4 Current
Level 5 Display All Avg Current L1 Current L2 Current L3 Current AvgCurrRatio L1 CurrRatio L2 CurrRatio L3 CurrRatio CurrPhImb Start Stats GroundCurr
(1)
Parameter name / reference Selects all Current items. HMI Display Average Current Enable HMI Display L1 Current Enable HMI Display L2 Current Enable HMI Display L3 Current Enable HMI Display Average Current Ratio Enable HMI Display L1 Current Ratio Enable HMI Display L2 Current Ratio Enable HMI Display L3 Current Ratio Enable HMI Display Current Imbalance Enable HMI Display Start Statistics Enable HMI Display Ground Current Enable Selects all Voltage items. HMI Display Average Voltage Enable HMI Display L1-L2 Voltage Enable HMI Display L2-L3 Voltage Enable HMI Display L3-L1 Voltage Enable
(1)
HMI Display (continued)
Voltage
(2)
Display All Avg Voltage L1-L2 Volts L2-L3 Volts L3-L1 Volts Volt Ph Imb
HMI Display Voltage Phase Imbalance Enable Selects all Power items. HMI Display Power Factor Enable HMI Display Active Power Enable HMI Display Rective Power Enable HMI Display Power Consumption Enable
Power
(2)
Display All PowFactor Active Power React Power PowerConsump

(3)
Temp Sensor
Display Unit
(4)
HMI Display Motor Temperature Sensor Enable HMI Display Temperature Sensor Degree CF

Parameter with note... is not displayed if... (1) (2) (3) (4) the motor is a single-phase motor there is no LTM E expansion module connected no PTC sensor has been selected the sensor is not a PT100
312
1639504 05/2008
Use
Scrolling Parameter List
The LCD display automatically presents a scrolling list of parameters and their dynamically changing values if: there is no fault or warning, and parameters have been selected in the HMI Display sub-menu. The scrolling parameter list: presents parameters in the same order they appear in the HMI Display sub-menu displays each parameter for 2 seconds, then moves to the next parameter returns to the first selected parameter in the list after reaching the end of the list. When a fault or warning occurs, the LCD display presents fault or warning information and suspends the scrolling parameter list. The scrolling parameter list resumes: after the warning condition ceases to exist or the fault is cleared, or by pressing the ESC button. For information on the content of each section of the LCD when displaying the scrolling list of parameters, see Scrolling Variable List, p. 283. For information on the presentation of faults and warnings, see Fault Management (1-to-1), p. 314.
HMI Display Examples
The HMI LCD indicates that the LTM R controller is in local control and Ready state, and displays the day, month and year: L
25/12
Ready 2006
Yr
The HMI LCD indicates that the LTM R controller is in local control, and displays logic inputs and logic outputs status, showing that logic outputs O.1 and O.4, and logic inputs I.1, I.3, I.4 and I.6 are active:
1xx4
1x34x6
Out In
The HMI LCD indicates that the LTM R controller is in remote control, and the LTM E expansion module logic inputs I.7, I.9 and I.10 are active:
LTME
7 x 9 10
In
1639504 05/2008
313
Use
Fault Management (1-to-1)

Overview When a warning or fault occurs, the HMI LCD display: suspends the scrolling parameter list and displays a description of the fault or warning displays a fault, if both a fault and warning are active shows the most recent fault or warning, if multiple faults or multiple warnings are active When a fault or warning occurs, display of the scrolling parameter list is suspended until: the fault or warning is resolved, or the ESC key is pressed. Note: At any time, you can use the: ENTER key to suspend the scrolling parameter list and open the Main menu ESC key to close the Main menu and return to the scrolling parameter list.
Fault and Warning Codes Warning Example
When the HMI displays a fault or warning, it includes both the name and numeric code for the fault or warning. For a description of fault and warning codes, see p. 212. The following is an example of the sequence of screens displayed in response to a Jam warning:
Step 1 Description LCD display is scrolling the configurable parameter list. Note that the LTM R controller is in local control channel: LCD Displays
6230
Run Temp Sensor
Ohm NTC
2 3
Occurrence of a Jam warning Jam warning (warning code = 6) is displayed. The warning screen persists until the underlying Jam condition is cleared:
WARN
Ready Jam
6 Rev
4 5
In this case, the measured current value falls below the Jam Warning Threshold setting. The LCD display resumes scrolling the configurable parameter list:
111%
Run Thermal Cap
314
1639504 05/2008
Use
Fault Example
The following is an example of the sequence of screens displayed in response to a Jam fault:
Step 1 Description LCD display is scrolling the configurable parameter list. Note that the LTM R controller is in remote control channel: LCD Displays
6230
Run Temp Sensor
Ohm NTC
2 3
Occurrence of a Jam fault Jam fault (fault code = 6) is displayed. The fault screen persists until the underlying Jam condition is cleared and fault reset:
FAULT
Ready Jam
6 Rev
4 5 6
In this case, the measured current value falls below the Jam Fault Threshold setting. Reset command is executed. The LCD display resumes scrolling the configurable parameter list in Ready state:
111%
Rdy Thermal Cap
A Start command is executed and the LCD display resumes scrolling in Run state:
80%
Run Current
FLC Avg
1639504 05/2008
315
Use
HMI Keypad Control (1-to-1)

Overview In a 1-to-1 configuration, the functionality of the Reset button remain constant, whereas the functionality of the HMI keypad AUX1 and AUX2 keys depends on: the selected operating mode, and the control wiring. The Stop button depends on: the control channel, and the control wiring. Remember that the HMI keypad commands the LTM R controllers logic outputs only when: logic input I.6 is inactive, and Control Local Channel Setting parameter is set to HMI. Reset The functions of the following key do not vary according to the operating mode selection in a properly wired configuration:
Key RESET Function Resets the LTM R controller after a fault
Stop
The functions of the following key vary according to the operating mode selection in a properly wired configuration:
Key STOP Control channel HMI Other than HMI in 2-wire mode Other than HMI in 3-wire mode Function Active: stops the motor Inactive: does not stop the motor Active according to the Stop HMI disable parameter (683.12): stops the motor.
316
1639504 05/2008
Use
AUX1, AUX2
The functions of the AUX1 and AUX2 buttons typically are configured as follows:
Operating mode 2 Speed 2 Step Independent Overload Reverser AUX1 function Run Slow (O.1) Run motor (O.1) Control O.1 Set bits in memory Run Forward (O.1) AUX2 function Run Fast (O.2) Set bits in memory Control O.2 Set bits in memory Run Reverse (O.2)
Note: The above key function assignments represent a typical configuration. However, the actual functionality of any function key depends on wiring choices. The behavior of the AUX1 and AUX2 keypad buttons varies according to the operating mode and wiring configuration, as follows:
Key AUX1 Can be used to: control the closing of the NO O.1 contacts 13-14 to energize the operating of a coil or motor set a bit in LTM R controller memory but control no logic output. control the closing of the NO O.2 contacts 23 - 24 to energize either: another operating coil on the same motor an operating coil on another motor set a bit in LTM R controller memory but control no logic output.
AUX2
1639504 05/2008
317
Use
7.4
At a Glance
Overview
Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI (1-to-many)
This section describes how to use the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to operate up to 8 LTM R controllers, in a 1 HMI to many LTM R controllers (1-to-many) physical configuration. The 1-to-many physical configurations presents a unique: user interface (LCD display and keypad) menu structure See p. 278 for instructions on how to use the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to operate a single LTM R controller in a 1-to-1 configuration. Note: The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can operate up to 8 LTM R controllers that have previously been commissioned. To commission an individual LTM R controller, use either: the Magelis XBTN410 HMI programmed for 1-to-1 operations, or PowerSuite software.

Topic Physical Description (1-to-many) Command Lines (1-to-many) Navigating the Menu Structure (1-to-many) Editing Values (1-to-many) Executing a Value Write Command (1-to-many) Menu Structure (1-to-many) Menu Structure - Home Page (1-to-many) Menu Structure - All LTM R Controllers and the HMI (1-to-many) Motor Starter Page (1-to-many) Settings (1-to-many) Statistics (1-to-many) Product ID (1-to-many) Monitoring (1-to-many) Fault Management (1-to-many) Service Commands (1-to-many) Page 319 323 324 325 328 330 331 332 335 336 342 346 347 348 349
318
1639504 05/2008
Use
Physical Description (1-to-many)

1-to-many Interface When a Magelis XBTN410 is used in a 1-to-many physical configuration, the face of the HMI looks like this:
2
ESC DEL MOD ENTER
1 2
LCD display 8 button keypad
1639504 05/2008
319
Use
1-to-many Keypad
The 1-to-many configuration requires a customized keypad label. Using a blank keypad label, add the names of the 6 bottom buttons to the label. For instructions on creating and installing a customized keypad label, refer to the XBT-N Instruction Sheet that ships with the Magelis XBTN410 HMI. In a 1-to-many configuration, the keypad buttons perform the following functions:
Keys Use this key to enter the menu structure for a selected LTM R controller at address 14 move to the adjacent left character within a numerical setting value execute remote reset commands for a selected LTM R controller at address 14 reset statistics to factory settings for a selected LTM R controller display the description of another fault, when the LCD displays fault messages enter the menu structure for a selected LTM R controller at address 58 move to a lower level in an LTM R controller menu structure move to the adjacent right character within a numerical setting value toggle between alternate values for Boolean settings execute remote reset commands for a selected LTM R controller at address 58 reset settings to factory settings for a selected LTM R controller display the description of another fault, when the LCD displays fault messages scroll down through a page decrement by 1 the value of the selected digit or setting scroll up through a page increment by 1 the value of the selected digit or setting select a numeric setting for editing Note: after a setting is selected, you can increment or decrement either: the entire value - or a selected digit within the setting. exit the present level in the HMI menu structure and move up to the next level exit the selected setting without saving changes. save changes and exit the selected setting
ENTER
MOD
ESC
DEL
delete the value of the selected setting Note: after deleting a setting value, you can either: use the arrow keys to input a new value, then click - or click
ESC
ENTER
to save it
to restore the deleted value.
320
1639504 05/2008
Use
1-to-Many LCD
In a 1-to-many configuration, the Magelis XBTN410 HMI presents a flexible LCD that can display up to 4 rows of 20 characters, as follows:
In some cases, the LCD displays only 3 text lines, because one linecontaining a fault message or page headeris twice the height of normal text. Pages
Page type Menu structure page
The LCD displays pages of text. There are 2 types of pages:

Contains page header that is twice the height of ordinary LCD text links to other pages read-only parameter values editable parameter settings function commands a flashing fault message the number of active faults Displayed by navigating through the HMI menu structure to the specific page
Fault message page
automatically when a fault occurs by selecting Faults in the Home page
Pages often contain more than 4 lines of text. See Navigating the Menu Structure (1-to-many), p. 324 for instructions on how to navigate within and between pages.
1639504 05/2008
321
Use
Page examples
The Home page:

The top 4 lines of the Home page
TeSys T
Vx.x Starters currents Starters status Starters status Remote reset Faults Reset to defaults
Use the button to scroll down and reveal more of this page. Note: click on a flashing navigate to that page. to
Fault message pages:

The opening fault message page. Note: the fault name "THERMAL OVERLOAD" and the LTM R controller address "Motor-Starter 1" both flash when displayed.
1/ 2
THERMAL OVERLOAD
Motor-Starter 1 2/ 2
Click the
button to display
additional fault message pages.
INTERNAL COMM LOSS

Motor-Starter 2
Click the button to scroll down and reveal more of the Internal Comm Loss fault message.
Motor-Starter 2 Communication loss between Control Unit and Comm. Module
322
1639504 05/2008
Use
Command Lines (1-to-many)

Overview Use the HMI keypad line is identified by a: and keys to execute text line commands. A command
at the right end of the text line, or at the left end of the text line A command can be executed only when its text line has focus. A text line has focus when the or at either end of the text lineplus any additional command characteris blinking. Command Lines The 1-to-many menu structure presents 4 different kinds of command lines, depending upon the command characterif anynext to the command line arrow, as follows:
Command line characters Description Left Right Links to a page. With no character next to the blinking arrow, click the: keypad button to move to the page indicated by the left arrow keypad button to move to the page indicated by the right arrow. N/A 0 - or 1 v v Toggle bit commands. With a 0 or a 1 next to the blinking arrow, click the boolean setting value. Value write commands. With a v next to the blinking arrow, click the: keypad button to execute the command indicated by the left arrow keypad button to execute the command indicated by the right arrow. For example: Reset to Defaults: Statistics Reset to Defaults: Settings Self-Test ? ? Command cannot execute. There is no connection between the HMI and the indicated LTM R controller. keypad button to toggle the
1639504 05/2008
323
Use
Navigating the Menu Structure (1-to-many)

Overview Use the HMI keypad , , , and buttons to:
ESC
scroll within a page link to a page in the next, lower level in the menu structure return to a page in the next, higher level in the menu structure jump to the Home page Example The following navigation example begins and ends at the Home page: Scroll within page Navigate between pages
TeSys T TeSys T
Vx.x Starters currents Starters status Vx.x Starters currents Starters status
ESC
STARTERS STATUS 1:ON 2:OFF 3:OFF 5:ON 6:OFF 7:OFF
ESC
Avg Current L1 Current
Motor-Starter 5
90%FLC 85%FLC
Statistics Self Test Product ID Home
324
1639504 05/2008
Use
Editing Values (1-to-many)

Overview Use the HMI keypad , , , , MOD and ENTER buttons to edit setting values. There are 3 kinds of editable settings: boolean numeric value list Only settings that are displayed in the LCD can be edited. To display a setting, navigate to the page that contains the setting. With the correct page opened, you may need to scroll down to display the setting. Boolean settings A boolean value setting includes a 0 or a 1 next to the at the right end of the text line. The following example shows you how to select then edit a boolean value:
Settings Addr.1
Local Control Local Control HMI Transfer Mode
1 Motor Motor 0 2
navigate edit save
Motor Local Control Term Strip Transfer Mode

1 2 3
3 1
The Settings page opens with focus at the top line. Click the DOWN button to scroll down to the Local Control setting (HMI). The boolean value (0) and command line arrow blink, indicating focus. Click the RIGHT arrow to toggle the Local Control setting to Term Strip and the boolean value to 1.
Note: An edited boolean value is saved when its value changes.
1639504 05/2008
325
Use
Numeric settings
Numeric value settings are incremented or decremented, and can be edited in 2 ways: by selecting the entire setting and then incrementing or decrementing its value by selecting individual characters within the setting and then incrementing or decrementing the value of each digit. Use the
MOD
button to select the value to be edited, as follows: 1
RpdCycl Time: Starts PerHr:
Lock Outs Addr.1 Lock Outs Addr.1
0002Sec 002
MOD
0002Sec 002
MOD

1 2 3
Lock Outs Addr.1
0002Sec 002
The Lock Outs page opens with no setting selected for editing. Click the MOD button once to select the first displayed numerical field for editing. Click the MOD button a second time to select the next displayed numerical field for editing.
After a setting is selected for editing, you can use the increment or decrement the entire value, then use the
and
ENTER
buttons to
button to save the edit:
Lock Outs Addr.1
0002Sec 002
Lock Outs Addr.1
0002Sec 003
Lock Outs Addr.1
ENTER
0002Sec 003
326
1639504 05/2008
Use
Alternatively, after a setting is highlighted you can use the and buttons to select only a single character within a field and edit that character, as follows:
Lock Outs Addr.1
0002Sec 002
Lock Outs Addr.1
0002Sec 0 02
Lock Outs Addr.1
0002Sec 1 02
RpdCycl Time: Starts PerHr: Value List settings
Lock Outs Addr.1
ENTER
0002Sec 102
In a few cases, a setting presents a list of value selections. Selecting a value from the list is very much like incrementing or decrementing the entire value of a numerical setting, as shown below: Auto Group 1 Number Resets: Auto 0050 Reset Time: Auto Group 2 Auto Group 1 Number Resets: Reset Time: Auto Group 2 Auto Group 1 Number Resets: Reset Time: Auto Group 2 4 0050
ENTER
4 0050
1639504 05/2008
327
Use
Executing a Value Write Command (1-to-many)

Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI, in 1-to-many configuration provides executable value write commands. A value write command immediately executes a task. The value write command line is identified by either a: v (at the left end of a command line, or) v (at the right end of a command line If a value write command is unsuccessful, the HMI displays an error message. Value write commands include:
Value write command Clear Settings Clear Statistics Self Test Reset - Manual Reset - Remote Reset - Automatic Task Clears settings and restores defaults. Clears statistics and restores defaults. Performs a self-test. Enables manual resetting of faults Enables remote resetting of faults Enables automatic resetting of faults Motor Starter page Reset page Location Reset to Defaults page
328
1639504 05/2008
Use
Example
Use the or the arrow key to execute a value write command. When a value write command executes, the lower case "v" next to the arrow becomes an upper case "V", as shown below, then quickly returns to a lower case "v" after the command executes: Scroll within page Execute command
Avg Current L1 Current
Motor-Starter 1
90%FLC 85%FLC
Statistics Self Test v Product ID Home Statistics Self Test V Product ID Home
1639504 05/2008
329
Use
Menu Structure (1-to-many)

Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1-to-many menu structure is hierarchical in its design and consists of 6 levels of individual pages. The upper menu structure levels provide information and commands for the HMI itself and for all LTM R controllers connected to the HMI. The lower menu structure levels provide settings, statistics and commands for a selected LTM R controller. The Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1-to-many menu structure presents the following outline of levels and pages:
Description: The starting page navigation to all other pages begins here. Opens by default on start-up when no faults exist. Displays average current as a percent of FLC for every LTM R controller. Provides a link to each LTM R controllers menu structure. Displays operating status (On, Off, Fault) for every LTM R controller. Provides a link to each LTM R controllers menu structure. Displays a series of pages, each page describing an active fault. Opens automatically when a fault exists. Executable commands for the remote reset of each LTM R controller. Executable commands to reset statistics or settings for each LTM R controller. Describes communication settings, application program file, programming software version, and HMI firmware version. For a selected LTM R controller: Displays dynamically changing parameter values Self Test command Links to its settings, statistics and Product ID information. Contains configurable settings for a selected LTM R controller
Menu Structure Outline

Level Pages 1 2 Home page
Starters currents page Starters status page Fault display pages Remote reset page Reset to defaults page XBTN reference page
Motor starter page
4, 5, 6 Settings page and sub-pages
Statistics page and sub-pages Presents statistics for a selected LTM R controller, including fault n-0 and fault n-1 history. Product ID page LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module part and firmware identification.
330
1639504 05/2008
Use
Menu Structure - Home Page (1-to-many)

Overview The Home Page opens by default on HMI start-up, when the Magelis XBTN410 is connected to 1 or more LTM R controllersall of which are running without faults or warnings. The Home page is the only page located in level 1 of the Magelis XBTN410 1-tomany menu structure. It is the starting place for navigation to all other levels and pages in the menu structure. Home Page
Menu item
The Home page contains the following menu items:

Description Page header with LTM R controller firmware version. VX.X Links to a page that displays average current and provides links to data and commands for each LTM R controller. Links to a page that displays status (On, Off, Fault) and provides links to data and commands for each LTM R controller. Displays a series of fault messages. Links to a page that displays the status of each LTM R controller; and provides a reset command for each LTM R controller. Links to a page with commands that reset to factory settings each LTM R controllers statistics or settings. Links to a page that describes communication speed and parity, programming software and LTM R controller firmware.
TeSys T
Starters currents Starters status Faults Remote Reset Reset to defaults XBTN Reference
1639504 05/2008
331
Use
Menu Structure - All LTM R Controllers and the HMI (1-to-many)

Overview Pages located in level 2 of the menu structure contain: information and commands for up to 8 connected LTM R controllers, or fault information for all LTM R controller, or information about the Magelis XBTN410 HMI All level 2 menu structure pages are accessible from the Home page. Starters Currents Page Use the Starters Currents page to monitor the Average Current Ratio for all connected LTM R controllers, and to navigate to other pages as described below:
Level 2 STARTERS CURRENTS I1=XXXX% I2=XXXX% I3=XXXX% I4=XXXX% I5=XXXX% I6=XXXX% I7=XXXX% I8=XXXX% Starters status Remote reset Home Opens the Starters Status page. Opens the Remote Reset page. Returns to the Home page. Description Opens the Motor Starter page for the selected LTM R controller (1-8).
Starters Status Page
Use the Starters Status page to monitor the System On and System Fault status of all connected LTM R controllers, and to navigate to other pages as described below:
Level 2 STARTERS STATUS 1:XXX 2:XXX 3:XXX 4:XXX 5:XXX 6:XXX 7:XXX 8:XXX Starters currents Remote reset Home Opens the Starters Currents page. Opens the Remote Reset page. Returns to the Home page. Description Opens the Motor Starter page for the selected controller (1-8).
332
1639504 05/2008
Use
Faults Display
The Magelis XBTN410 HMI displays active faults in a series of pages1 fault to a pagewhen: a fault occurs, and the display of active faults automatically opens you select Faults in the Home page and manually open the display of active faults. For information about fault management, including the faults display pages, see p. 348.
Remote Reset Page
Use the Remote Reset page to remotely execute a Fault Reset Command for a faulted LTM R controllerfor controllers with Fault Reset Mode set to Remote, and to navigate to other pages:
Level 2 REMOTE RESET 01FLT023 02FLT034 03FLT045 04FLT056 067FLT50 078FLT60 089FLT70 090FLT80 Starters currents Starters status Home Opens the Starters Currents page. Opens the Starters Status page. Returns to the Home page. Description Executes a Fault Reset Command for the selected LTM R controller (1-8) if remote fault reset is enabled for that controller.
Each of the first 4 lines of this page provides the following fault reset information at the indicated locations: right left 0 1 FLT 023 1
1 2 3 4
067 FLT 5 0 4 4 3 2 1
fault reset bit (not significant) LTM R controller number (18) fault status (ON, OFF, FLT) time to reset (seconds)
1639504 05/2008
333
Use
Reset to Defaults Page
The Reset to Defaults page provides the Clear Statistics Command and the Clear Controller Settings Command for each LTM R controller, as displayed below:
Level 2 RESET TO DEFAULTS STATS STATS STATS STATS STATS STATS STATS STATS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS Description Clears statistics (left arrows) or settings (right arrows) for the selected LTM R controller (1-8), and restores factory settings.
XBTN Reference Page
The XBTN Reference page provides information about the HMI. The following is an example of information displayed in this page:
Level 2 XBTN Reference MB Speed= MB Parity= LTM_1T8_E_Vx.xx.DOP XX/XX/200X XBT-L1000= Firmware= xx:xx:xx V 4.42 V 3.1 19200 Even Parameter name / description HMI Port Baud Rate Setting HMI Port Parity Setting file name for the HMI application program date of the HMI application program file version of the XBT 1000 software version of the HMI firmware
334
1639504 05/2008
Use
Motor Starter Page (1-to-many)

Overview The Motor Starter page presents information and commands for the LTM R controller that was selected in either the Starters Currents page or the Starters Status page (see, p. 332). The Motor Starter page is the only page located in level 3 of the menu structure. Use the Motor Starter page to: monitor dynamically changing current, voltage, and power values for a single, selected LTM R controller navigate to editable parameter settings for an LTM R controller navigate to read-only statistics and product information for an LTM R controller execute the Self Test command for an LTM R controller Motor Starter Page The Motor Starter page displays dynamically changing parameter values, and contains the command lines, as follows:
Level 3 Parameter name / Description Page header indicating LTM R controller address (18). Average Current Ratio L1 Current Ratio L2 Current Ratio L3 Current Ratio Ground Current Ratio Current Phase Imbalance Thermal Capacity Level Time To Trip Average Voltage L1-L2 Voltage L2-L3 Voltage L3-L1 Voltage Voltage Phase Imbalance Power Factor Active Power Reactive Power Motor Temp Sensor Links to editable settings for the LTM R controller. 335
Motor Starter 1-8

Avg Current= L1 Current= L2 Current= L3 Current= GR Current= Curr Imbalance= Th Capacity= Time To Trip= Avg Voltage= L1-L2 Voltage= L2-L3 Voltage= L3-L1 Voltage= Volt Imbalance= Power Factor= Active Pwr= React Pwr= Temp Sensor= xxxx%FLC xxxx%FLC xxxx%FLC xxxx%FLC xxxx.x%FLCmin xxx% xxxxx% xxxxSec xxxx%FLCmin xxxxxV xxxxxV xxxxxV xxx% xx.xx xxxx.xkW xxxx.xkVAR xxxx.x Settings
1639504 05/2008
Use
Level 3 Statistics Self Test v Product ID
Parameter name / Description Links to read-only statistics for the LTM R controller. Executes the Self Test command. See p. 459. Links to product reference numbers and firmware versions for the LTM R controller and expansion module. Returns to the Home page.
Home
Settings (1-to-many)
Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI provides several pages of editable parameter settings, nested in levels 4, 5 and 6 of the menu structure. The settings page is your starting place for locating and editing settings, including: motor local control transfer mode reset (fault) current voltage power load shed rapid cycle lockouts communication loss The settings page is located in level 4 of the menu structure. To navigate to the settings page, use one of the following paths:
Level 1 2 3 From this page... Home page Starters Currents page, or Starters Status page Motor Starter page Select... Starters currents, or Starters status LTM R controller number Settings
For information on navigating the 1-to-many menu structure, see p. 324.
336
1639504 05/2008
Use
Motor, Control, and Transfer Settings
Use the settings page to navigate to and edit the following motor, local control and transfer mode settings:
Level 4 Settings Addr. 1-8 Motor Nom Power (kW) Nom Power (Hp) TEMP SENSOR Fault Fault Level Warn Warn Level Local Control Transfer Mode Level 5 Parameter name Motor Nominal Power (expressed in kW) Motor Nominal Power (expressed in HP) Motor Temp Sensor Fault Enable Motor Temp Sensor Fault Threshold Motor Temp Sensor Warning Enable Motor Temp Sensor Warning Threshold Control Local Channel Setting Bumpless Transfer Mode
Fault Reset Settings
Use the settings page to navigate to and edit the following fault reset settings:
Level 4 Settings Addr.1-8 Reset Manual Remote Automatic AUTO GROUP 1 Number Resets Reset Time AUTO GROUP 2 Number Resets Reset Time AUTO GROUP 3 Number Resets Reset Time Auto-Reset Attempts Group 1 Setting Auto-Reset Group 1 Timeout Auto-Reset Attempts Group 2 Setting Auto-Reset Group 2 Timeout Auto-Reset Attempts Group 3 Setting Auto-Reset Group 3 Timeout Level 5 Parameter name Fault Reset Mode
1639504 05/2008
337
Use
Current Settings
Level 4 Current Level 5 Settings Addr.1-8
From the settings page, you can navigate to and edit the following current settings:
Level 6 Fault FLC1-OC1 FLC2-OC2 Reset Level Warn Warn Level Parameter name Thermal Overload Fault Enable Motor Full Load Current Ratio Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio Thermal Overload Fault Reset Threshold Thermal Overload Warning Enable Thermal Overload Warning Threshold Current Phase Imbalance Fault Enable Current Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running Current Phase Imbalance Warning Enable Current Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold Current Phase Loss Fault Enable Current Phase Loss Timeout Current Phase Loss Warning Enable Current Phase Reversal Fault Enable Long Start Fault Enable Long Start Fault Threshold Long Start Fault Timeout Jam Fault Enable Jam Fault Threshold Jam Fault Timeout Jam Warning Enable Jam Warning Threshold
Th Overload
Curr Ph Imbal / Loss
CURR PH IMBALANCE Fault Fault Level FltTimeStart FltTimeRun Warn Warn Level CURR PH LOSS Fault Fault Time Warn
Current Curr Ph Reversal (continued) Long Start
Fault Fault Fault Level Fault Time
Jam
Fault Fault Level Fault Time Warn Warn Level
338
1639504 05/2008
Use Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 OVER CURRENT Fault Fault Level Fault Time Warn Warn Level UNDER CURRENT Fault Fault Level Fault Time Warn Warn Level Current Ground Current (continued) Fault GR CT Mode IntFltLvl IntFltTime ExtFltLvl ExtFltTime Warn IntWarnLvl ExtWarnLvl Parameter name Overcurrent Fault Enable Overcurrent Fault Threshold Overcurrent Fault Timeout Overcurrent Warning Enable Overcurrent Warning Threshold Undercurrent Fault Enable Undercurrent Fault Threshold Undercurrent Fault Timeout Undercurrent Warning Enable Undercurrent Warning Threshold Ground Current Mode Ground Current Fault Enable Internal Ground Current Fault Threshold Internal Ground Current Fault Timeout External Ground Current Fault Threshold External Ground Current Fault Timeout Ground Current Warning Enable Internal Ground Current Warning Threshold External Ground Current Warning Threshold
Settings Addr.1-8 Current Over / Under Current (continued)
1639504 05/2008
339
Use
Voltage Settings
Level 4 Voltage Level 5 Settings Addr.1-8
From the settings page, you can navigate to and edit the following voltage settings:
Level 6 VOLT PH IMBALANCE Fault Fault Level FltTimeStart FltTimeRun Warn Warn Level VOLT PH LOSS Fault Fault Time Warn Parameter name Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Enable Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Enable Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold Voltage Phase Loss Fault Enable Voltage Phase Loss Fault Timeout Voltage Phase Loss Warning Enable Voltage Phase Reversal Fault Enable Overvoltage Fault Enable Overvoltage Fault Threshold Overvoltage Fault Timeout Overvoltage Warning Enable Overvoltage Warning Threshold Undervoltage Fault Enable Undervoltage Fault Threshold Undervoltage Fault Timeout Undervoltage Warning Enable Undervoltage Warning Threshold
Volt Ph Imbal / Loss
Volt Ph Reversal Voltage Over / Under Voltage (continued)
Fault OVER VOLTAGE Fault Fault Level Fault Time Warn Warn Level UNDER VOLTAGE Fault Fault Level Fault Time Warn Warn Level
340
1639504 05/2008
Use
Power Settings
From the settings page, you can navigate to and edit the following power settings:
Level 4 Power Level 5 OVER POWER Fault Fault Level Fault Time Warn Warn Level UNDER POWER Fault Fault Level Fault Time Warn Warn Level Power OVER POWER FACTOR (continued) Fault Fault Level Fault Time Warn Warn Level Fault Fault Level Fault Time Warn Warn Level Parameter name Overpower Fault Enable Overpower Fault Threshold Overpower Fault Timeout Starting Overpower Warning Enable Overpower Warning Threshold Underpower Fault Enable Underpower Fault Threshold Underpower Fault Timeout Underpower Warning Enable Underpower Fault Enable Over Power Factor Fault Enable Over Power Factor Fault Threshold Over Power Factor Fault Timeout Over Power Factor Warning Enable Over Power Factor Warning Threshold Under Power Factor Fault Enable Under Power Factor Fault Threshold Under Power Factor Fault Timeout Under Power Factor Warning Enable Under Power Factor Warning Threshold Settings Addr.1-8
UNDER POWER FACTOR
1639504 05/2008
341
Use
Load Shed, Rapid Cycle Lock Outs, Communication Loss Settings
From the settings page, you can navigate to and edit the following voltage load shed, rapid cycle lockout, and communication loss settings:
Level 4 Load Shed Level 5 Fault Fault Level Fault Time RestartLvl RestartTimel LockOuts Comm Loss RpdCycle Time NET PORT COMM LOSS Fault HMI PORT COMM LOSS Fault Parameter name Load Shedding Enable Load Shedding Threshold Load Shedding Timeout Load Shedding Restart Threshold Load Shedding Restart Timeout Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout Network Port Fault Enable HMI Port Fault Enable Settings Addr.1-8
Statistics (1-to-many)
Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI provides read-only statistics pagesnested in levels 4 and 5 of the menu structurefor a selected LTM R controller. To navigate to the statistics page, use one of the following paths:
Level 1 2 3 From this page... Home page Starters Currents page, or Starters Status page Motor Starter page Select... Starters currents, or Starters status LTM R controller number Statistics
342
1639504 05/2008
Use
Statistics
Level 4 Statistics Addr. 1-8 MaxTemp LTMR OperTime AllStarts LastStartDur LastStartAmp All Faults Overload Flts Overload Warn Curr Imb Flts LongStart Flts UnderCurr Flts Ground Faults HMI Loss Flts Ntwk Int Flts Ntwk Cnfg Flts Ntwk Port Flts Internal Flts InterPort Flts
From the settings page, you can navigate to and read the following statistics:
Level 5 Parameter name Controller Internal Temperature Max Operating Time Motor Starts Count Motor Last Start Duration Motor Last Start Current Faults Count Thermal Overload Faults Count Thermal Overload Warnings Count Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count Long Start Faults Count Undercurrent Faults Count Ground Current Faults Count HMI Port Faults Count Network Port Internal Faults Count Network Port Config Faults Count Network Port Faults Count Controller Internal Faults Count Internal Port Faults Count
1639504 05/2008
343
Use
Level 4 Statistics Addr. 1-8 Fault n-0
Level 5 Date Time FLC Ratio FLC Max Avg Current L1 Current L2 Current L3 Current GRCurr Curr Imbalance Th Capacity Avg Voltage L1-L2 Voltage L2-L3 Voltage L3-L1 Voltage Volt Imbalance Frequency Active Pwr Power Factor Temp Sensor
Parameter name Date And Time n-0 Date And Time n-0 Motor Full Load Current Ratio n-0 Motor Full Load Current Max n-0 Average Current n-0 L1 Current Ratio n-0 L2 Current Ratio n-0 L3 Current Ratio n-0 Ground Current Ratio n-0 Current Phase Imbalance n-0 Thermal Capacity Level n-0 Average Voltage n-0 L1-L2 Voltage n-0 L2-L3 Voltage n-0 L3-L1 Voltage n-0 Voltage Phase Imbalance n-0 Frequency n-0 Active Power n-0 Power Factor n-0 Motor Temp Sensor n-0
344
1639504 05/2008
Use Level 4 Statistics Addr. 1-8 Fault n-1 Date Time FLC Ratio FLC Max Avg Current L1 Current L2 Current L3 Current GRCurr Curr Imbalance Th Capacity Avg Voltage L1-L2 Voltage L2-L3 Voltage L3-L1 Voltage Volt Imbalance Frequency Active Pwr Power Factor Temp Sensor Level 5 Parameter name Date And Time n-1 Date And Time n-1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio n-1 Motor Full Load Current Max n-1 Average Current n-1 L1 Current Ratio n-1 L2 Current Ratio n-1 L3 Current Ratio n-1 Ground Current Ratio n-1 Current Phase Imbalance n-1 Thermal Capacity Level n-1 Average Voltage n-1 L1-L2 Voltage n-1 L2-L3 Voltage n-1 L3-L1 Voltage n-1 Voltage Phase Imbalance n-1 Frequency n-1 Active Power n-1 Power Factor n-1 Motor Temp Sensor n-1
1639504 05/2008
345
Use
Product ID (1-to-many)
Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI provides a description of the product number and firmware for both the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module. To navigate to the Product ID page, use one of the following paths:
Level 1 2 3 From this page... Home page Starters Currents page, or Starters Status page Motor Starter page Select... Starters currents, or Starters status LTM R controller number Product ID
Product ID
In the Product ID page, you can read the following information about the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module:
Level 4 Product ID Addr. 1-8 LTMR Catalog Ref LTMR Firmware LTME Catalog Ref LTME Firmware Parameter name / description Controller Commercial Reference (product number) Controller Firmware Version Expansion Commercial Reference (product number) Expansion Firmware Version
346
1639504 05/2008
Use
Monitoring (1-to-many)
Overview Use the Magelis XBTN410 HMI, in a 1-to-many configuration, to monitor: operating status and average current for multiple LTM R controllers, or current, voltage and power parameters for a selected LTM R controller. Monitoring Multiple LTM R Controllers Navigate to the following pages to simultaneously monitor these dynamically changing values for all LTM R controllers:
Page Starters currents page Starters status page Value Average current ratio Operating status (On, Off, Fault)
For more information on both pages, see Starters Currents Page, p. 332. Monitoring a Single LTM R Controller Navigate to the motor starter page for a selected LTM R controller to monitor the dynamically changing values of the following parameters: Current: Average Current Ratio L1 Current Ratio L2 Current Ratio L3 Current Ratio Ground Current Ratio Current Phase Imbalance Thermal Thermal Capacity Level Time To Trip Motor Temp Sensor Voltage Average Voltage L1-L2 Voltage L2-L3 Voltage L3-L1 Voltage Voltage Phase Imbalance Power Power Factor Active Power Reactive Power For more information on the motor starters page, see p. 335.
1639504 05/2008
347
Use
Fault Management (1-to-many)

Overview When a fault occurs, the Magelis XBTN410 HMI automatically opens a fault display, consisting of 1 page for each active fault. Each page contains the: fault name address of the LTM R controller experiencing the fault total number of unresolved faults Fault Display Pages A typical fault display page looks like this: 1 2
1/ 2
THERMAL OVERLOAD
Motor-Starter 1
1 2 3 4
3 4
fault display page number total number of active faults fault name (flashing) address of LTM R controller experiencing the fault (flashing)
If more than 1 fault is active, use the forth through the fault display pages.
and
keypad buttons to move back and
Because some fault messages contain more than 4 lines of text, you may need to use the and keypad buttons to scroll up and down within a fault display page and display the entire fault message. Opening / Closing the Fault Display The 1-to-many HMI automatically opens the fault display whenever a fault occurs. When you remove the cause of a specific fault and execute a fault reset command, that fault no longer appears in the fault display. You can also close the fault display by clicking the ESC keypad button. This does not fix the underlying cause of any fault, nor it does not clear any fault. You can reopen the fault display at any time by navigating to the Home page, scrolling to the Faults command line, then clicking the keypad button. If you open the fault display when no faults are active, the HMI displays the message "No Faults Present".
348
1639504 05/2008
Use
Service Commands (1-to-many)

Overview
Command Self Test
The Magelis XBTN410, in 1-to-many configuration, provides the following service commands:
Description Performs an internal check of the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module. Location / reference Level 3, Motor Starter page. See p. 335 and Self Test with Motor On, p. 459.
Reset to Defaults: Statistics Executes the Clear Statistics Command Level 2, Reset to Defaults page. See p. 334. for a selected LTM R controller. Reset to Defaults: Settings Remote Reset Executes the Clear Controller Settings Command for a selected LTM R controller. Performs remote fault reset for a selected LTM R controller Level 2, Reset to Defaults page. See p. 334. Level 2, Remote Reset page. See p. 333.
1639504 05/2008
349
Use
7.5
At a Glance
Overview
Using PowerSuite Software
The following topics show you how to use the LTM R controller when it is connected to a PC running PowerSuite software. This section contains the following topics:
Topic Software Installation User Interface File Management Services Using PowerSuite Metering and Monitoring Fault Management Self Test and Clear Commands Page 351 351 354 357 357 360 361
350
1639504 05/2008
Use
Software Installation
Overview PowerSuite software is a Microsoft Windows-based program that can be installed on any PC running the Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT V4.0, or Windows XP operating system. Follow these steps to install PowerSuite software on your PC:
Step 1 2 3 Action Place the installation disk into your PCs CD/DVD drive. Navigate to and click on the file Setup.exe. The setup wizard begins. Follow the self-explanatory instructions in the set-up wizard.
Software Installation
Cable Connection
Use the RS-232 to RS-485 converter with PC and LTM R communication cable to connect the LTM R controller or LTM E expansion moduleto the PC.
User Interface
Overview PowerSuite provides an intuitive graphical user interface for the LTM R controller. This software can be used: in standalone mode, to edit configuration files for the LTM R controller and save the edited files to your choice of media, including your PCs hard drive, or a CD. connected to the HMI port of the LTM R controller or LTM E expansion module, to: upload configuration files from the LTM R controller to the PowerSuite software for editing, and download the edited files monitor and maintain the operation of the LTM R controller, LTM E expansion module and installation control the motor.
1639504 05/2008
351
Use
Navigation
To navigate the configuration software interface, use the features of the tree control and main window, identified below:
Services Link Settings Tools View Help
LTM CONF - TestApplication File Edit
TeSys T Device Information Settings 2 Motor and Control Thermal Current Voltage Power Communication and HMI Statistics History Fault Counters Fault History Metering and Monitoring Current Voltage Power Motor Temperature Inputs and Outputs Status Status, Faults and Warnings Parameters All Parameters Configuration Parameters Read-only Parameters Custom Logic
Current Settings Ground Current Mode Internal Internal Fault Warning Warning Level Fault Level Fault Time 30 30 0.7 %FLCmin %FLCmin Seconds External External 1.00 1.00 0.50 Amps Amps Seconds
Current Phase Imbalance Fault Warning Fault Time Start Fault Time Run Fault Level Warning Level Current Phase Loss Fault Warning Current Phase Reversal Fault Long Start Fault Fault Time Fault Level 10 100 Seconds %FLCmin Fault Time 5.0 Seconds 0.7 5.0 10 10 Seconds Seconds % Imbal % Imbal
4
LTM CONF Connected
1 2 3 4
Expand (+) or contract (-) branch on tree control Green shaded arrow indicates the selected tree control branch Main window displays the contents of the selected tree control branch Connected / Disconnected
Expand the tree control, then select an item to display configuration, monitoring and control data in the main window. Use the menu bar and icon bar to perform configuration, monitoring and control functions. For information on how to use each screen in the configuration software, refer to the Help menus help file commands.
352
1639504 05/2008
Use
Settings Branch
In the Settings branch, set the parameters as in the following example:

Thermal Overload Trip Type Trip Class FLC1(OC1) FLC2(OC2) In 5 5 5 % % 00,40 00,40 Amps Amps Def D-Time Def O-Time 10 10 Seconds Seconds LTM CONF Load class Information, Address: 606 Min: 5, Max: 30, Step: 5
Auxiliary Fan
Warning Fault
Warning Level Reset Level
85 75
% Thermal Capacity % Thermal Capacity
Note: Required parameters display in red. An online help, with pop-up menus, gives you information on each configurable parameter (register name, register address, range and step).
Settings Menu
The Settings menu allows you to select between: Languages Preferences The interface language can be English (default) or Franais.
1639504 05/2008
353
Use
File Management
Overview The LTM R controllers configuration settings are contained in an electronic configuration file. Use PowerSuite software to manage the LTM R controllers configuration files by: creating or editing a configuration file transferring configuration settings from the LTM R controller to the configuration software running on your PC, or from your PC to the LTM R controller saving edited configuration settings to a file on your PCs hard disk, or to other media Every time you open the configuration software, it presents the Load Configuration dialog. Use this dialog to select the configuration settings that will be displayed when the configuration software opens. You can select: the factory default configuration settings, or any previously saved configuration settings file. Creating or Editing Files When you create a new file using the File menus New Configuration command, you must manually input this information, which is internally stored by the devices but may not otherwise be readily available. The recommended way to create a configuration file is to transfer a configuration from the LTM R controller and save it. When you do this, all of the descriptive information about the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module is automatically retrieved and copied to your PC. Note: When you edit the network protocol for either a new configuration file, or for a configuration file transferred from the LTM R controller, the configuration software automatically changes network settings to their default values for the selected network protocol. Configurable parameters can be found in the Settings branch of the tree control. To configure parameters, first select a configuration file to edit: either transfer parameter settings from the LTM R controller to the configuration software in your PC (see Transferring Files, p. 355 ), or open a previously saved configuration file.
354
1639504 05/2008
Use
Transferring Files
To transfer configuration settings from the LTM R controller to the PC and save those settings in a new configuration file:
Step Action 1 2 3 4 Check that the configuration software is communicating with the LTM R controller: If the task bar indicates Disconnected, select Connect in either the icon bar or in the Link menu. Transfer the configuration from the LTM R controller to your PC. Select LTM R Controller to PC in either the icon bar or the Link File Transfer sub-menu. After the configuration settings are transferred, use the configuration software to change configuration settings. After your configuration setting edits are complete, save your work to a file: Select the Save command in either the icon bar or the File menu. The Save As dialog opens. - then In the Save As dialog, navigate to the desired location and click Save.
To transfer configuration settings from the PC to the LTM R controller, the following conditions must exist: at least one setting in the configuration file must be different from the same setting in the LTM R controller - i.e., the software only overwrites settings with different values measured current must be less than 10% of FLC - i.e., online current must not be detected. To transfer a configuration file from the PC to the LTM R controller:
Step Action 1 2 Check that the configuration software is communicating with the LTM R controller: If the task bar indicates Disconnected, select Connect in either the icon bar or in the Link menu. Check that the file to be transferred is in the Main window. To open a file: select the Open Configuration command in either the icon bar or the File menu. The Open dialog opens. - then in the Open dialog, navigate to the desired location and click Open. Transfer the configuration from your PC to the LTM R controller. Select PC to LTMR controller in either the icon bar or the Link File Transfer sub-menu.
Note: When transferring the configuration file, the software checks that the LTM R controller and the configuration file both use the same current range and network protocol. If there is a mismatch, the software asks if you wish to proceed. If you elect to proceed, the software transfers all matching parameters, excluding parameters that fail a range check. When the transfer is complete, the software displays the names and addresses of parameters that failed the range check and were not transferred.
1639504 05/2008
355
Use
Saving Files
Save a copy of any configuration file you intend to transfer to the LTM R controller. A saved copy provides both a record of these settings, and a backup that can be used to re-transfer configuration settings if the initial transfer fails. Use the: Save command to save your configuration changes to the open configuration file Save As command to save a copy of the displayed configuration to a separate file. Note: If you opened the file containing the factory default configuration settings, you cannot make and save changes to this file. Instead, you must use the Save As command to save your changes under another file name. By default, the configuration software stores saved files in a folder named Configurations. This folder is located on your hard drive in the same place the configuration software was installed. To designate a different default file storage folder:
Step Action 1 2 3 4 In the Settings menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog opens. In the Preferences dialog, open the Configuration tab. In the Configuration tab, type in the folder name and path for saving configuration files. Click OK to close the Preferences dialog and save your changes.
You can also use the File Auto Save Settings sub-menu to have an automatic saving of files. Export Settings The configuration software can also export a list of all configured parameters. This list can be exported in the following electronic file formats: spreadsheet (.csv) HTML text XML The exported list indicates each parameters: read or write status memory address name unit of measure value as edited in the configuration software (local value) default value value as stored in the LTM R controller (device value) minimum value maximum value status
356
1639504 05/2008
Use
Services Using PowerSuite

Overview The configuration softwares Services menu is accessed in Connected mode only. Services menu provides access to the following configuration functions: Maintenance Clear Reset to Defaults Reset to Defaults Use the Services Reset to Defaults command to clear all settings and restore factory settings. A confirmation dialog opens, then it executes the Clear All Command parameter. Refer to Configurable Parameters, p. 477 for a list of protection parameters and their respective factory settings.
Metering and Monitoring

Overview Use the PowerSuite software to monitor dynamically changing parameter values. To locate dynamically changing parameter values, use the tree control to navigate to and select sub-branches of either of the following main branches: Metering and Monitoring Parameters. Before you can monitor parameter values, an active communications link must be established between the configuration software and the LTM R controller. The configuration software periodically updates parameter values accessed through the Metering and Monitoring branch and the Parameters branch. Communications Link To monitor dynamically changing parameters, a communications link must be active between the configuration software in your PC and the LTM R controller. To find out if a link exists, check the taskbar at the bottom of the configuration software. If the taskbar indicates: Connected, a communications link between the PC and LTM R controller exists and you can monitor dynamically changing parameter values. Disconnected, select Connect in either the icon bar or the Link menu.
1639504 05/2008
357
Use
Metering and Monitoring Branch

File Edit
Select a Metering and Monitoring sub-branch to display a series of graphical gauges or fault and warning LEDs that provide an easy-to-read status update of the monitored parameters (see the Current Readings example below).
LTM CONF - TestApplication
TeSys T Device Information Settings Motor and Control Thermal Current Voltage Power Communication and HMI Statistics History Fault Counters Fault History Metering and Monitoring Current Voltage Power Motor Temperature Inputs and Outputs Status Status, Faults and Warnings Parameters All Parameters Configuration Parameters Read-only Parameters Custom Logic
Current Readings
75
50
100
125
15 0
3 2
30
10
40
50
60
70
80
25
20
Average Current 0 % FLC . 0 0 Amps
Ground Current 3 % FLC . 0 0 Amps
Current Phase Imbalance . 0 0 %Imb
0 30 20 0
100
500 600 400 70 0

20 0
100
0 30 0 80
1000 900
500 600 400 70 0

100
20 0
175
200
90 100
10
0 30 0 80
1000 900
500 600 400 70 0

0 80
1000 900
L1 Current 0 % FLC . 0 0 Amps
LTM CONF
Connected
358
1639504 05/2008
Use
Parameters Branch
Select a Parameters sub-branch to display information about All Parameters, Configuration Parameters, or Read-only Parameters. The Device Value column indicates the most recently reported value of the monitored parameter.
LTM CONF - TestApplication File Edit
TeSys T Device Information Settings Statistics Metering and Monitoring Parameters All Parameters Configuration Parameters Read-only Parameters Custom Logic
All Parameters Address Index Address 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Find
Variable Name Unit Local Value Default Device Value Min Value Max Value Status Identification Variables Expansion Comm... Unit 0 Expansion Comm... Unit 0 Expansion Comm... Unit 0 Expansion Comm... Unit 0 Expansion Comm... Unit 0 Expansion Comm... Unit 0 Expansion Serial... Unit 0 Expansion Serial... Unit 0 Expansion Serial... Unit 0 Expansion Serial... Unit 0 Expansion Serial... Unit 0 Expansion ID Code Unit 0 Expansion Firmw... Unit 0 Expansion Comp... Unit 0 Identification Network Port Co... Network Port Co... Network Port Co... Network Port Co... Unit 0 Unit 0 Unit 0 Unit 0 Unit 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
LTM CONF
Connected
Quick Watch Window
Instead of monitoring large groupings of parameters, you can elect to monitor only a short list of parameters that you select. To do this:
Step Description 1 2 In the View menu, select Quick Watch window. The Quick Watch window opens. In the Quick Watch window, type in a parameter address and click the Add button. The parameter is added to the list. Note: You can find a parameter address by selecting All Parameters in the Parameters branch, then looking for the parameter name and address. Repeat step 2 for every parameter you wish to add to the list.
The Quick Watch window parameter list is updated with the same frequency as the screens in the Parameters branch.
1639504 05/2008
359
Use
Fault Management
Overview Fault Monitoring Use PowerSuite software to monitor the status of all enabled fault parameters. In the tree control, navigate to and select Metering and Monitoring Status, Faults and Warnings to display a graphical view of fault LEDs (see below). The LTM R controller monitors its global status, and detects warnings and faults. PowerSuite software displays this information using color-coded LEDs:
Information type Global status Warnings and Faults LED color Solid gray Solid green Solid gray Solid yellow Solid red Description Condition not detected Condition detected No warning or fault, or protection not enabled Warning Fault
The fault monitoring screen in PowerSuite software looks like this:

LTM CONF - TestApplication File Edit Services Link Settings Tools View Help
TeSys T Device Information Settings Motor and Control Thermal Current Voltage Power Communication and HMI Statistics History Fault Counters Fault History Metering and Monitoring Current Voltage Power Motor Temperature Inputs and Outputs Status Status, Faults and Warnings Parameters All Parameters Configuration Parameters Read-only Parameters Custom Logic LTM CONF Connected
Status, Faults and Warnings
Global Status System Ready System On System Fault System Warning System Tripped Fault Reset Authorised Power Cycle Required Minimum Wait Time Rapid Cycle Lockout Motor Starting Motor Running Motor Run High Speed 0 Ground Current
Warnings Faults Thermal Overload Long Start Jam Diagnostic (motor) Wiring Test HMI Port Controller Internal Internal Port Network Port Internal Network Port Configuration Network Port External Thermal Sensor
Warnings Faults Current Imbalance Current Phase Loss Current Phase Reversal Under Current Over Current Voltage Imbalance Voltage Phase Loss Voltage Phase Reversal Under Voltage Over Voltage Under Power Over Power Under Power Factor Over Power Factor
360
1639504 05/2008
Use
Self Test and Clear Commands

Overview PowerSuite software provides the following control commands: Self Test Clear: All Protection Settings Network Port Settings Statistics Thermal Capacity Level Confirmation dialogs open, then the commands take effect immediately upon execution. They are available only when the configuration software is communicating with the LTM R controller. Self Test Use the self test command to check the internal workings of both the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module. The self test command is located in the Services menu under Services Maintenance Self Test. For more information on the self-test function, see p. 459. Clear
Command All Protection Settings Network Port Settings Statistics Thermal Capacity Level
Use the clear commands for the purposes described below:

Description Restores all parameters to their factory settings. Restores all protection parameters to their factory settings. Restores network port parameters to their factory settings. Sets all historical statistics to 0. Parameter name Clear All Command Clear Controller Settings Command Clear Network Port Settings Command Clear Statistics Command
Sets to 0 the Thermal Capacity Level and Rapid Cycle Clear Thermal Capacity Level Lockout Timeout parameters. See the warning below. Command
WARNING
LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and fire. Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection should be limited to applications where immediate restart is vital. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
1639504 05/2008
361
Use
7.6
At a Glance
Overview
Using the DeviceNet Communication Network
This section describes how to use the LTM R controller via the network terminals using the DeviceNet protocol.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control paths and, for certain critical functions, provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure. Examples of critical control functions are emergency stop and overtravel stop. Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions. System control paths may include communication links. Consideration must be given to the implications of anticipated transmission delays or failures of the link.1 Each implementation of an LTM R controller must be individually and thoroughly tested for proper operation before being placed into service. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage. For additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), "Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Control".
1
WARNING
UNEXPECTED RESTART OF THE MOTOR Check that the PLC application software: considers the change from local to remote control, manages appropriately the motor control commands during those changes. When switching to the Network control channel, depending on the communication protocol configuration, the LTM R controller can take into account the latest known state of the motor control commands issued from the PLC and restart automatically the motor. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
362
1639504 05/2008
Use

Topic DeviceNet Protocol Principles Connections and Data Exchange Simplified Control and Monitoring Configuration of the LTM R Network Port Device Profiles and EDS Files Configuring the DeviceNet network PKW Objects Object Dictionary Identity Object Message Router Object DeviceNet Object Assembly Object Connection Object Control Supervisor Object Overload Object DeviceNet Interface Object Register Map - Organization of Communication Variables Data Formats Data Types Identification Variables Statistics Variables Monitoring Variables Configuration Variables Command Variables Custom Logic Variables Page 364 365 366 367 369 370 385 389 390 392 393 394 398 401 405 407 409 411 412 420 421 431 440 450 451
1639504 05/2008
363
Use
DeviceNet Protocol Principles

Overview The DeviceNet low-level controller area network (CAN) provides a communication link between simple industrial devices (such as actuators and sensors) and controlling devices. The network carries control data and the properties of the device being controlled. it enables you to operate either in a master/slave mode or a peer-to-peer mode. The DeviceNet powered 4-wire network operates in a trunk line/drop line configuration and supports up to 64 nodes. 2 main types of messages can be exchanged: I/O messaging, dedicated to fast exchanges of process data. Explicit messaging, dedicated to slower exchanges such as configuration, settings or diagnostics data.
364
1639504 05/2008
Use
Connections and Data Exchange

I/O Messaging I/O messagingI/O messages contain application-specific data. They are communicated across single or multicast connections between an application producer and its corresponding consuming application. Because I/O messages carry time-critical messages, they have high-priority identifiers. An I/O Message consists of a Connection ID and associated I/O data. The meaning of the data within an I/O Message is implied by the associated Connection ID. The connection endpoints are assumed to have knowledge of the intended use or meaning of the I/O Message. I/O Message Types
Type polled
Slave devices can produce data using one or more of the following I/O message types, depending on how the device is configured and the requirements of the application:
Description of operation A slave configured for polled I/O receives output data from the master device. This data is received in a sequential order that is defined by the masters scan list. The masters polling rate is determined by the number of nodes in the scan list, the DeviceNet baud rate, the size of messages produced by the master and each node in its scan list, and the internal timing of the master device. A device configured to produce a cyclic I/O message will produce its data at a precisely defined interval. This type of I/O messaging allows the user to configure the system to produce data at a rate appropriate for the application. Depending on the application this can reduce the amount of traffic on the wire and more efficiently use the available bandwidth. A device configured to produce a change-of-state (COS) message will produce data whenever it changes, or at a base heartbeat rate. This adjustable heartbeat rate enables the consuming device to verify that the producer is still present and active on the network. DeviceNet also defines a userconfigurable Production Inhibit Time that limits how often COS messages are produced to prevent nodes from flooding the bandwidth. Users can adjust these parameters to provide optimum bandwidth utilization in a given application.
cyclic
change-of-state
Explicit Messaging
explicit messaging connectionsExplicit messaging connections provide multipurpose point-to-point communication paths between two particular devices. Explicit messages are used to command the performance of a particular task and to report the results of performing the task. You can, therefore, use explicit messaging connections to configure nodes and diagnose problems. DeviceNet defines an explicit messaging protocol that states the meaning or intended use of an explicit message within the CAN (Controller Area Network) data field. The message consists of a Connection ID and associated messaging protocol information.
1639504 05/2008
365
Use
Simplified Control and Monitoring

Overview This is a simplified example of the main registers which control and monitor a Motor Management Controller. The illustration below provides basic setup information, using the following registers: configuration, control and monitoring (system status, measurements, faults and warnings, acknowledgement).
Registers for Simplified Operation
Configuration (at start-up)

See Commissioning
Control
(According to Motor Mode Register 704) Bit 704.0 : Motor run forward command Bit 704.1 : Motor run reverse command
Compulsory circuit Optional circuit
Monitoring (Warnings) Monitoring (System status)

(Register 455) Bit 455.2 : System fault Bit 455.3 : System warning Bits 455.8-13 : Motor average current ratio If an error has been detected, get more information with Register 460 : Warning code, or Register 461, 462 : Warning type
Monitoring (Faults)
Register 451 : Fault code, or Register 452, 453 : Fault type
Check if the current value is correct
To be used, if needed, to unlock the system
Monitoring (Measurement)
Register 466 : Average current ratio
Control (Acknowledgment)
Bit 704.3 : Fault reset command
366
1639504 05/2008
Use
Configuration of the LTM R Network Port

Communication Parameters Use PowerSuite or the HMI to configure the DeviceNet communication parameters: Network Port Address Setting (Register 696) Network Port Baud Rate Setting (Register 695) Config Via Network Port Enable (Register 601) The MAC-ID is the address of the module on the DeviceNet bus. A DeviceNet network is limited to 64 addressable nodes (node IDs 0 to 63). This means that you can assign a MAC-ID of 0-63. You must set the MAC-ID before any communication can start. To do this, use PowerSuite or the HMI to configure the communication parameter Network Port Address Setting (Register 696). Default address is 63. Setting the Baud Rate You can also set a baud rate of the following speeds: 125 kbits/s 250 kbits/s 500 kbits/s To set the baud rate, use PowerSuite or the HMI to configure the communication parameter Network Port Baud Rate Setting (Register 695). The parameter has the following possible settings:
Network Port Baud Rate Setting 0 1 2 3 Baud Rate 125 kbits/s 250 kbits/s 500 kbits/s Autobaud
Setting the MAC-ID
The default setting for the Network Port Baud Rate Setting parameter is Autobaud. Autobaud automatically detects the baud rate required. Note: The Autobaud functionality can only be used if a valid communication is already present on the network, that is to say, that at least one master and one slave are already communicating.
1639504 05/2008
367
Use
Setting the Configuration Mode
The LTM R configuration can be managed via 2 different modes: locally through the HMI port using PowerSuite or the HMI remotely through the network To manage the configuration locally, parameter Config Via Network Port Enable ("Configuration Control" item in PowerSuite Network Port setting windows) must be disabled to prevent overwrite of the configuration through the network. To manage the configuration remotely, parameter Config Via Network Port Enable ("Configuration Control" item in PowerSuite Network Port setting windows) must be enabled (default value).
368
1639504 05/2008
Use
Device Profiles and EDS Files

Device Profiles DeviceNets device models define the physical connections and promote interoperability among standard devices. Devices that implement the same device model must support common identity and communications status data. Device-specific data is contained in device profiles that are defined for various device types. Typically, a device profile defines the devices: object model I/O data format configurable parameters The above information is made available to other vendors through the devices EDS (electronic data sheet). For a full description of the objects in the LTM R device profile, see Object Dictionary, p. 389. Whats an EDS? The EDS is a standardized ASCII file that contains information about a network devices communications functionality and the contents of its object dictionary (see Object Dictionary, p. 389), as defined by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association). The EDS also defines device-specific and manufacturer-specific objects. Using the EDS, you can standardize tools to: configure DeviceNet devices design networks for DeviceNet devices manage project information on different platforms The parameters of a particular device depend on those objects (parameter, application, communications, emergency, and other objects) that reside on the device. LTM R Controller EDS Files EDS files and associated icons that describe the various configurations of the LTM R Controller can be downloaded from www.schneider-electric.com website (Products and Services > Automation and Control > Product Offers > Motor Control > TeSys T > Downloads > Software/Firmware > EDS&GSD). EDS files and icons are grouped in a single compressed Zip file that you must unzip to a single directory on your hard disk drive. For information on how to register these EDS files in the RSNetworx's EDS library System, see p. 373.
1639504 05/2008
369
Use
Configuring the DeviceNet network

Introduction Use these sample instructions to configure for example a Rockwell Automation SLC-500 PLC (1747-SDN) with a DeviceNet controller at the head of a TeSys T Motor Management system. The configuration software is RSNetworx for DeviceNet configuration software. The stages of this process are described in the following table:
Stage 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Assemble the DeviceNet network (see p. 372) Register the controllers EDS files (see p. 373) Connect devices to your network (see p. 374) Upload the controller configuration (see p. 380) Add the controller to the Scanlist (see p. 381) Edit the I/O parameters (see p. 382) Save the configuration (see p. 384)
Before You Begin
Before you begin, make sure: the TeSys T Motor Management system is fully assembled, installed, and powered according to your particular system, application, and network requirements. you have properly set the network port (see p. 367) of the controller. you have the basic EDS files (see p. 369) and corresponding .ico files that are available at www.schneider-electric.com), or you have generated an EDS that is specific to the system assembly. To configure the controller using RSNetWorx, you must have a working familiarity with both the DeviceNet fieldbus protocol and RSNetWorx for DeviceNet. (The described procedures cannot practically anticipate every RSNetWorx prompt or option you may encounter during configuration.)
370
1639504 05/2008
Use
Connection Figure
Before assembling the network, familiarize yourself with the required hardware connections. The following figure shows the DeviceNet network connections between an Allen-Bradley PLC, the controller, and RSNetWorx:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Allen-Bradley SLC-500 PLC PLC processor module 1747-SDN DeviceNet scanner module DeviceNet network cable LTM R controller PC running RSNetWorx (properly connected to your network) Power tap DeviceNet power supply 24 Vdc
The scanner module is the control mechanism for all network traffic. It reads and writes every piece of I/O data that is moved on the network.
1639504 05/2008
371
Use
Assemble the Physical Network
The following procedure describes the connections required to construct a physical DeviceNet network.
CAUTION
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE IF VOLTAGE IS PRESENT Read and understand this manual and the Allen-Bradley PLC users manual before installing or operating this equipment. This equipment must be installed, adjusted, repaired, and maintained by qualified personnel only. Disconnect all power to the PLC before making the network connection. Place a DO NOT TURN ON sign on the system power disconnect. Lock the disconnect in the open position. You are responsible for conforming to all applicable code requirements with respect to grounding all equipment. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
Step Action 1 2 Install the DeviceNet scanner module in the desired PLC slot. Check that the desired DeviceNet network node address (see Setting the MAC-ID, p. 367) and baud rate (see Setting the Baud Rate, p. 367) have been correctly set. Make connections with DeviceNet network cable and end connectors, manufactured in accordance with ODVA specifications. Place the system on the network by connecting the PLC to the LTM R controller with the DeviceNet cable. Connect the RSNetWorx PC to the network using the DeviceNet cable. Comment The connection figure (see p. 371) above shows the scanner in slot 2 of the PLC. This example uses an address of 4.
The cable and end connectors are not supplied.
4 5
372
1639504 05/2008
Use
Register the Controllers EDS

Step Action 1 2 3 4
To register the controllers EDS in RSNetWorxs EDS library:

Comment The Wizards welcome screen appears. The Options screen appears.
From the RSNetWorx Tools menu, select EDS Wizard. Click Next.
Select Register an EDS file(s) and The Registration screen appears. click Next. Select Register a directory of EDS You must have already unzipped the Zip file containing the EDS files and files and browse to the controllers corresponding icons into a single directory. EDS file. Click Next. Click Next. The EDS File Installation Test Results screen appears. The Change Graphic Image screen appears. The controller should be listed in the Product Types field as a Motor Starter:
5 6
7 8 9
Click Next. Verify that the controller is to be registered and click Next. Click Finish.
The Final Task Summary screen appears. The completion screen appears. The EDS Wizard closes.
1639504 05/2008
373
Use
Selection Criteria for TeSys T LTM R Controller Variants
There are 4 EDS files corresponding to the 4 possible configurations of the TeSys T Motor Management Controller system:
Choose... TeSys T MMC L When you want to use... A TeSys T Motor Management Controller system without an expansion module, configurable via the HMI port. This variant enables you to preserve your local configuration. A TeSys T Motor Management Controller system with expansion module, configurable via the HMI port. This variant enables you to preserve your local configuration. A TeSys T Motor Management Controller system without expansion module configurable via the network.
TeSys T MMC L EV40
TeSys T MMC R
TeSys T MMC R EV40 A TeSys T Motor Management Controller system with expansion module configurable via the network.
In local configuration mode, the parameter Config via Network Port Enable must be disabled. This mode preserves the local configuration made using the Magelis XBT or PowerSuite through the HMI port and prevents PLC configuration via the network. In remote configuration mode the parameter Config via Network Port Enable must be enabled. This enables the PLC to remotely configure the LTM R controller. Note: The parameters overwritten by the PLC will be lost. Remote mode is useful when replacing faulty devices. The Config via Network Port Enable parameter is set by default. For more information about remote and local configuration parameters, see p. 253. Connect Devices to Your Network This example requires you to add two devices to your project view: an LTM R controller without expansion module configured in remote mode with the address 4. a DeviceNet scanner in PLC slot 2 with the address 1 You can use RSNetWorx to configure the devices in either offline or online mode: offlineThe configuration tool and the physical network are not connected. onlineThe configuration tool is connected to the physical network. Build the network using the parameters transferred from devices on the physical network. Connect to network connections using either the offline or online procedures in the tables that follow. (These are standard RSNetWorx procedures.)
374
1639504 05/2008
Use
Offline Device Connection

Step Action 1
Use this procedure for adding devices to your network when the configuration tool is offline:
Comment The new device appears in the project view. The lowest available MAC ID has been assigned to it, even if that ID is inappropriate. The controllers properties window appears. 4 is the MAC ID used throughout this example. Note that the MAC ID of the controller is now 4 in the project view.
From the Hardware list, double-click on the controller EDS named TeSys T MMC R under Schneider Automation, Inc.\Motor Starter. Double-click on the controller graphic. Change the MAC ID in the Address text field to 4. Click OK.
2 3 4
5 6
Repeat steps 1 to 4 to add the 1747-SDN The scanners EDS is in the Hardware list at Rockwell Scanner Module to the network with MAC ID 00. Automation - Allen Bradley/Communication Adapter. Save your configuration by choosing Save as from the File menu. Save offline configurations for later use.
1639504 05/2008
375
Use
Online Device Connection

Step Action 1 2
Use this procedure for adding devices to your network when the DeviceNet network is already assembled and the configuration tool is online:
Comment The Browse for network screen appears. When the Browsing network screen finishes, the physically connected devices will appear in the project view.
From the Network menu, select Online. Set a communication path to select a path, based on your system and application requirements. Click OK.
Save your configuration by choosing Save as from the Save the configuration for later use. File menu.
The RSNetWorx Project View
The RSNetWorx project view should resemble the following figure after youve added the controller and the master scanner to your network configuration (using either the online or offline connection procedure):
DeviceNet.dnt - RSNetworx for DeviceNet File Edit View Network Device Diagnostics Tools Help
Hardware Unknown Device Type 126 Vendor Rockwell Automation -Allen-Bradley Rockwell Automation - Dodge Rockwell Automation - Electro-Craft Motion Control Rockwell Automation - Reliance Electric Rockwell Automation/Entek Ird Intl. Rockwell Automation/Sprecher+Schuh Schneider Automation, Inc. Motor Starter Tesys T MMC R Graph Spreadsheet 1747 - SDN Scanner Module Tesys T MMC R
00
04
Ready
Offline
376
1639504 05/2008
Use
Read and Write LTM R Controller Parameters

Step 1 2 3 Action
To read and write to the controller's parameters:
Comment The controller configuration screen appears The parameter lists appears. The parameter groups appear.
From the project view, double -click on the controller icon. Select the Parameter tab. Select Group View
Select configuration group 1, 2 or 3 to access controller configuration parameters.
For controllers used without expansion modules: Area for configuration includes registers 540 to 564 without expansion module, or 540 to 595 with expansion module Area 2 of configuration includes registers 600 to 645 Area 3 of configuration includes registers 650 to 596 See p. 409 for a complete list of communication variables. Write access to parameters is only available with TeSys T MMC R and TeSys T MMC R EV40.
Select the parameter you want to access and read from or write to it.
1639504 05/2008
377
Use
The TeSys T MMC R Parameter Screen
The TeSys T MMC R parameter screen should resemble the following figure:
TeSys T MMC R
General Parameters I/O Data EDS File Select the parameter that you want to configure and initiate an action using the toolbar. Groups ID 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 305 Parameter Area for configuration Operating mode register Motor transition timeout LTMR inputs setting Th overload setting register Th overload fault timeout Motor temp fault threshold Motor temp warning thres... Rapid cycle lockout timeout phI loss fault timeout Overcurrent fault timeout Overcurrent fault threshold Overcurrent warning thresh Iground setting register 0 1.0 s 00000000 000000 00000000 000100 10 s 20.0 Ohm 20.0 Ohm 0s 3.0 s 10 s 200 %FLC 30 %FLC min 00000000 000000 All Monitor Current Value
OK
Cancel
Apply
Help
378
1639504 05/2008
Use
Select Data Exchanged via I/ O Messaging

Step Action 1 2
To select data exchanged through I/O messaging
Comment The parameter list appears.
In the TeSys T MMC R parameter screen, select DeviceNet Interface Group
For the PollProdPath parameter, select the PollProdPath consists of data produced by the controller on input assembly object you want the controller to polling sent by the scanner. produce. For the PollConsPath parameter, select the output assembly object you want the controller to consume. PollConsPath consists of data sent by polling by the scanner and consumed by the Controller.
For the COSProdPath parameter, select the COSProdPath consists of data produced by the controller on input assembly object you want the controller to Change-of-State (COS). produce. If you selected input assembly object 110 or The TeSys T MMC R parameter screen should resemble 113 in steps 2 or 4, adjust the LTM R Monitoring the following figure: Word 0 to 3 to the register you want the controller to produce.
Only used with instances 110 and 113.
1639504 05/2008
379
Use
Upload and Download Device Configurations
After the online connection of devices, you must transfer the required device information. Use the following options from the Device menu to transfer the configurations of only selected devices: Download to DeviceTransfer the offline configuration from the PC to the device. Upload from DeviceTransfer the configuration from the device to the PC. Use the following options from the Network menu to transfer the configurations of all online devices in the project view: Download to NetworkTransfer the offline configurations from the PC to all online devices. Upload from NetworkTransfer the configurations of all online devices to the PC.
380
1639504 05/2008
Use
Add the Controller to the Scanlist

Step Action 1 2 3 4
To be recognized on the network, the controller must be added to the master scanners Scanlist using the online procedure in the following table:
Comment The scanner configuration screen appears. The Scanner Configuration Applet screen appears. Wait for the Uploading from Scanner timer to finish.
From the project view, double-click the scanner icon. Select the Scanlist tab. Select Upload from scanner.
The controller now appears in the Scanlist. At the Scanlist tab, highlight the controller (at MAC ID 4) in the Available Devices list, and click the right arrow.
5 6
With the controller selected, click the Edit I/O Parameters button.
The Edit I/O Parameters window appears.
Check Polled and enter the correct input size and The determination of the controller input and output data correct output size (depending on assembly sizes is described in the next paragraph. objects previously selected). Click OK. Click Download to scanner. Click Download. Click OK. The Edit I/O Parameters window closes. The Downloading Scanlist from Scanner window appears. Wait for the Downloading to Scanner timer to finish. The scanner properties window closes.
7 8 9 10
1639504 05/2008
381
Use
The Edit I/O Parameters Screen
The controllers Edit I/O Parameters screen should resemble the following figure after you have customized it as described above:
Edit I/O Parameters : 04, TeSysT MMC R Strobed: Input Size: 0 Bytes Change of State / Cyclic Change of State Cyclic
Use Output Bit: Input Size: Polled: Input Size: Output Size: Poll Rate: 1 1 Bytes Bytes Every Scan Output Size: Heartbeat Rate:
1 1 250
Bytes Bytes msec
Advanced...
OK
Cancel
Restore I/O Sizes
Depending on your requirements, you can select one of three transmission modes: Polled Change of State Cyclic Note: The controller does not support Strobed I/O messages used for very simple I/O devices. You have to enter the number of input and output bytes produced by the controller. The master device needs this information to allocate data space for each network node. The number of input and output bytes the controller produces depends on the instances you select for the DeviceNet Interface object.
382
1639504 05/2008
Use
The tables below show the byte size of each assembly object you can select for I/O messaging. Output assembly data size (consumed by the controller):
Instance 2 3 4 5 100 101 102 103 Name Basic Overload Basic Motor Starter Extended Contactor Extended Motor Starter LTMR Control Registers PKW Request Object PKW Request and Extended Motor Starter PKW Request and LTMR Control Registers Number of bytes 1 1 1 1 6 8 10 14
Input assembly data size (produced by the controller):

Instance 50 51 52 53 54 110 111 112 113 Name Basic Overload Extended Overload Basic Motor Starter Extended Motor Starter 1 Extended Motor Starter 2 PKW Response Object PKW Response and Extended Motor Starter PKW Response and LTMR Monitoring Registers Number of bytes 1 1 1 1 1 8 10 16
LTMR Monitoring Registers (with dynamic configuration) 8
1639504 05/2008
383
Use
Create an EDS for the Controller

Step Action 1 2 3 4
Devices that do not correspond to specific EDS files during online network browsing will appear in the project view as Unrecognized Devices. If your controller is not recognized, you must create an EDS using the following procedure:
Comment You will be asked if you want to register the controller with the EDS Wizard. The Wizards welcome screen appears. The Options screen appears. RSNetWorx will upload the controllers identity information, displayed in the Device Description screen. The Input/Output screen appears.
In the project view, double-click the controller. Click Yes. Click Next. Select Create an EDS file and click Next.
5 6
Record the product name string, LTM1, and click Next. Check Polled and enter the appropriate values for input and output sizes. Also check COS and enter an input size value of 1. Click Next. Change the icon, if you wish, at the Change Graphic Image and click Next. Verify that the controller is to be registered and click Next. Click Finish. Add the controller to the Scanlist. See p. 381.
7 8 9 10
The Final Task Summary screen appears. The completion screen appears. The EDS Wizard closes.
Saving the Configuration
Save your configuration by selecting File Save from the RSNetworx menu. This is a standard Windows command.
384
1639504 05/2008
Use
PKW Objects
Overview The LTM R controller supports PKW (Periodically Kept in acyclic Words). The PKW feature consists of: 4 input words mapped in input assembly objects 111, 112 and 113 4 output words mapped in output assembly objects 101, 102 and 103 These 4 words tables enable a DeviceNet scanner to read or write any register using I/O messaging. As shown in the table below, the PKW area is located at the beginning of the corresponding assembly objects 112, 113, 102 and 103.
PKW word1 PKW word2 PKW PKW word3 PKW word4
(...)
1639504 05/2008
385
Use
PKW OUT Data
PKW OUT data requests from the DeviceNet scanner to the LTM R are mapped in assembly objects 101, 102 and 103. To access registers, select one of the following function codes: R_REG_16 (0x25) to read 1 register R_REG_32 (0x26) to read 2 registers W_REG_16 (0x2A) to write 1 register W_REG_32 (0x2B) to write 2 registers
Word 1 Register address Register number Word 2 MSB Toggle bit (bit 15) 0/1 Function bits (bits 8 to 14) R_REG_16 Code 0x25 R_REG_32 Code 0x26 W_REG_16 Code 0x2A W_REG_32 Code 0x2B LSB Not used (bits 0 to 7) 0x00 Data to write _ _ Data to write in register Data to write in register 1 _ _ _ Data to write in register 2 Word 3 Word 4
Any changes in the function code will trigger the handling of the request (unless Function code [bit 8 to bit 14] = 0x00). Note: The highest bit of function code (bit 15) is a toggle bit. It is changed for each consecutive request. This mechanism enables the request initiator to detect that a response is ready by polling bit 15 of the function code in word 2. When this bit in the OUT data becomes equal to the response emitted toggle bit in the IN data (when starting the request), then the response is ready.
386
1639504 05/2008
Use
PKW IN Data
PKW IN data response from the LTM R to the DeviceNet scanner are mapped in assembly objects 111, 112 and 113. The LTM R echoes the same register address and function code or, eventually, an error code.
Word 1 Register address Same register number as in the request Word 2 MSB Toggle bit (bit 15) Same as in the request Function bits (bits 8 to 14) Error Code 0x4E R_REG_16 Code 0x25 R_REG_32 Code 0x26 W_REG_16 Code 0x2A W_REG_32 Code 0x2B LSB Not used (bits 0 to 7) 0x00 Data to write Error code Data read in register Data read in register 1 _ _ _ Data read in register 2 _ _ Word 3 Word 4
If the initiator tries to write a TeSys T object or register to an unauthorized value, or tries to access an inaccessible register, an error code is returned (Function code = toggle bit + 0x4E). The exact error code can be found in words 3 and 4. The request is not accepted and the object/register remains at the old value. To re-trigger exactly the same command, you need to: 1. reset the Function code to 0x00, 2. wait for the response frame with the function code equal to 0x00, 3. re-set it to its previous value. This is useful for a limited master like an HMI. Another way of re-triggering exactly the same command is to invert the toggle bit in the function code byte. The response is valid when the toggle bit of the response is equal to the toggle bit written in the answer (this is a more efficient method, but it requires higher programming capabilities).
1639504 05/2008
387
Use
PKW Error Codes

1 3 4 7 8 10 11 12 13 16 20
Case of a write error:

Explanation external request: sends back an error frame register not managed (or the request needs super user access rights) external request: answer postponed one or both registers cannot be found register not authorized to be written written value not in the range of the register (word value is too high) written value not in the range of the register (word value is too low) written value not in the range of the register (MSB value is too high) written value not in the range of the register (MSB value is too low) written value not a valid value external request: sends back an error frame
Error Code Error Name FGP_ERR_REQ_STACK_FULL FGP_ERR_REGISTER_NOT_FOUND FGP_ERR_ANSWER_DELAYED FGP_ERR_NOT_ALL_REGISTER_FOUND FGP_ERR_READ_ONLY FGP_ERR_VAL_1WORD_TOOHIGH FGP_ERR_VAL_1WORD_TOOLOW FGP_ERR_VAL_2BYTES_INF_TOOHIGH FGP_ERR_VAL_2BYTES_INF_TOOLOW FGP_ERR_VAL_INVALID FGP_ERR_BAD_ANSWER
Case of a read error:

Error Code Error Name 1 3 4 7 FGP_ERR_REQ_STACK_FULL FGP_ERR_REGISTER_NOT_FOUND FGP_ERR_ANSWER_DELAYED FGP_ERR_NOT_ALL_REGISTER_FOUND Explanation external request: sends back an error frame register not managed (or the request needs super user access rights) external request: answer postponed one or both registers cannot be found
388
1639504 05/2008
Use
Object Dictionary
Overview The DeviceNet protocol using object modeling. Object modeling organizes related data and procedures into one entity: the object. An object is a collection of related services and attributes. Services are procedures an object performs. Attributes are characteristics of objects represented by values, which can vary. Typically, attributes provide status information or govern the operation of an object. The value associated with an attribute may or may not affect the behavior of an object. An objects behavior is an indication of how the object responds to particular events. Objects within a class are called object instances. An object instance is the actual representation of a particular object within a class. Each instance of a class has the same set of attributes, but has its own set of attribute values, which makes each instance in the class unique. The Object Dictionary describes the attribute values of each object in the device profile. LTM R Object Dictionary
Index 01h 02h 03h 04h 05h 29h 2Ch C6h C5h Object Identity Object Message Router Object DeviceNet Object Assembly Object Connection Object Control Supervisor Object Overload Object DeviceNet Interface Object
The general breakdown of the LTM R DeviceNet brick object dictionary is the same for all DeviceNet devices:
Description Identifiers, such as device type, vendor ID, and serial number. Provides a message connection point. Maintains physical connection to the DeviceNet network; allocates and de-allocates the master/slave connection set. Provides collection of other objects attributes (frequently used for I/O messaging). Allows explicit messaging to be conducted. Manages controller functions, operational states, and control. Implements overload behavior. Enables I/O messaging data to be selected.
PKW: Periodic Registers Service Objects Enables cyclic I/O messaging for manufacturer-specific registers.
These objects are described in detail in the following pages.
1639504 05/2008
389
Use
Identity Object
Description This object, present in all DeviceNet products, provides identification of, and general information about, the device.
Attribute ID 1 Access Get Name Revision Data Type UInt Value 01 Description -
Class Attributes
Instance Attributes
Attribute Access ID 1 2 3 Get Get Get Name Vendor ID Device type Product code Data Type Value UInt UInt UInt 243 16h Description 243 -> "Schneider Automation Inc." Motor Starter
Product Remote mode: 0x30: Without expansion module identification 0x31: With expansion module depends on the configuration 0x32 to 0x3F: Reserved Local mode: 0x130: Without expansion module 0x131: With expansion module
Get
Revision
Struct. of: UInt UInt Word UDInt
Product configuration 01 01
Product version
5 6
Get Get
Status Serial number
See the table below. Read from the controller during start-up in registers [70] to [74]: Control Unit Serial Number Read from the controller during start-up in registers [64] to [69]: Control Unit Identification
Get
Product name
Struct. of: USInt String
"LTM1"
390
1639504 05/2008
Use
Bit 0 1 2 3 4, 5, 6, 7
Definition Owned by Master (predefined Master/Slave connection) Reserved Configured Reserved Vendor Specific: 4: Warning 5: Trip (Fault) 6: Contactor state 7: Reverser contactor state Minor recoverable fault Minor unrecoverable fault Major recoverable fault Major unrecoverable fault
Values Provided by the stack 0 NOT(Control Unit In Configuration Mode [456.9]) 0 [455.3] [455.4] [455.1] & [704=1] [455.1] & [704=2] 0 0 1 [451] 15 [451] 15
8 9 10 11
Class and Instance Service
Service Code 0E hex 05 hex
Service Name Get_Attribute_Single Reset
Description Read 1 attribute Product reset
1639504 05/2008
391
Use
Message Router Object

Description The Message Router Object provides a messaging connection point through which a Client may address a service to any object class or instance in the physical device.
Class Attributes
Instance Attributes
Attribute ID Access 1 Get Name Object list: Number Classes Number available Number active Active connections Data Type UInt Value Description List of supported objects Number of supported classes List of supported classes Maximum number of connections supported Number of active connections List of active connections
2 3 4
Get Get Get
UInt UInt Struct. of: UInt UInt
Service Code 0E hex
Service Name Get_Attribute_Single
Description Read 1 attribute
392
1639504 05/2008
Use
DeviceNet Object
Overview The DeviceNet Object is used to provide the configuration and status of a physical attachment to the DeviceNet network. A produc can support only one DeviceNet Object per physical connection to the DeviceNet communication terminals.
Class Attributes
Instance Attributes
Attribute ID 1 2 Access Get Get Name MAC ID Baud rate Data Type USInt USInt Value 0 - 63 0-2 Description Read-only attribute 0: 125 k 1: 250 k 2: 500 k Read-only attribute Upon Bus-Off interrupt: 0: Hold the CAN chip in its bus-off state. 1: Reset the CAN chip and continue communicating. Number of times CAN was in bus-off state Allocation choice Master Address (255 not allocated)
Get/Set
BOI (Bus OFF Interrupt)
Bool
4 5
Get/Set Get
BusOff counter
USInt
0 - 255
Allocation information Byte - USInt 0 - 63
Class Service
Service Code 0E hex
Instance Service
Service Code 0E hex 19 hex 0E hex 0E hex Service Name Get_Attribute_Single Set_AttributesSingle Allocate Master/Slave Connection Set Release Master/Slave Connection Set Description Read 1 attribute Write 1 attribute Requests the use of the predefined Master/Slave Connection Set Indicates that the specified connections within the predefined Master/Slave Connection Set are no longer desired. These Connections are to be released (deleted). 393
1639504 05/2008
Use
Assembly Object
Description The Assembly Object binds attributes of multiple objects, which enables each objects data to be sent or received over a single connection. Assembly objects can be used to bind input data or output data. The terms "input" and "output" are defined from the network's point of view. An input sends (produces) data on the network, and an output receives (consumes) data from the network. Only static assemblies are supported. Class Attributes
Attribute ID 1 2 Access Get Get Name Revision Data Type UInt Value 02 13 Description -
Max instance UInt
Instance Attributes
Attribute ID 3
Access Get
Name Data
Data Type
Value
Description
See assembly data description below.
Service Code 0E hex
Output Assembly Data

Byte 0 Bit 7 Reserved
Instance 2: Basic Overload

Bit 6 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 3 Reserved Bit 2 FaultReset Bit 1 Reserved Bit 0 Reserved
Instance 3: Basic Motor Starter

Byte 0 Bit 7 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 3 Reserved Bit 2 FaultReset Bit 1 Reserved Bit 0 Run 1
Instance 4: Extended Contactor

Byte 0 Bit 7 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 3 Reserved Bit 2 Reserved Bit 1 Run 2 Bit 0 Run 1
394
1639504 05/2008
Use
Instance 5: Extended Motor Starter

Byte 0 Bit 7 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 3 Reserved Bit 2 FaultReset Bit 1 Run 2 Bit 0 Run 1
Note: FaultReset = Register 704.3 Run2 = Register 704.1 Run1 = Register 704.0 Instance 100: LTM R Control Registers This assembly contains several control registers commonly used with an LTM R device.
Byte 0 path: 6C : 01 : 05 (Register {704]) Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 path: 6C : 01 : 04 (Register {703]) MSB path: 6C : 01 : 01 (Register {700]) LSB MSB
LSB (least significant bit) MSB (most significant bit) LSB
Instance 101: PKW Request Object This assembly is vendor specific. It is used to implement the request object of PKW protocol.
Byte 7 Byte 6 Byte 5 Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 Byte 0 See p. 385 for details.
Instance 102: PKW Request and Extended Motor Starter This assembly is vendor specific.
Bytes 0 to 7 See Instance 101 above. Byte 8 Reserved (value=0) Byte 9 See Instance 5 above.
Instance 103: PKW Request and LTM R Control Registers This assembly is vendor specific.
Bytes 0 to 7 See Instance 101 above. Byte 8 to 13 See Instance 100 above.
1639504 05/2008
395
Use
Input Assembly Data

Byte 0 Bit 7 Reserved
Instance 50: Basic Overload

Bit 6 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 3 Reserved Bit 2 Reserved Bit 1 Reserved Bit 0 Faulted/Trip
Instance 51: Extended Overload

Byte 0 Bit 7 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 3 Reserved Bit 2 FaultReset Bit 1 Warning Bit 0 Faulted/Trip
Instance 52: Basic Motor Starter

Byte 0 Bit 7 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 3 Reserved Bit 2 Running1 Bit 1 Reserved Bit 0 Faulted/Trip
Instance 53: Extended Motor Starter 1

Byte 0 Bit 7 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 5 CntrlfromNet Bit 4 Ready Bit 3 Reserved Bit 2 Running1 Bit 1 Warning Bit 0 Faulted/Trip
Instance 54: Extended Motor Starter 2

Byte 0 Bit 7 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Running2 Bit 2 Running1 Bit 1 Warning Bit 0 Faulted/Trip CntrlfromNet Ready
Note: CntrlfromNet = NOT(Register 455.14) Ready = Register 455.0 Running2 = (Register 455.7) AND (Register 704.1) Running1 = (Register 455.7) AND (Register 704.0) Warning = Register 455.3 Fault/Trip = (Register 455.2) OR (Register 455.4) Instance 110: LTM R Monitoring Registers (with dynamic configuration) This assembly contains several monitoring registers commonly used with an LTM R device. You can choose registers by setting attributes 5-8 of the DeviceNet interface object. See p. 407 for more information.
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Register pointed using path: C6 : 01 : 05 LSB MSB Register pointed using path: C6: 01 : 06 LSB MSB Register pointed using path: C6 : 01 : 07 LSB MSB Register pointed using path: C6 : 01 : 08 LSB MSB
396
1639504 05/2008
Use
Instance 111: PKW Response Object This assembly is vendor specific. It is used to implement the response object of PKW protocol.
Byte 7 Byte 6 Byte 5 Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 Byte 0 See p. 385 for details.
Instance 112: PKW Request and Extended Motor Starter This assembly is vendor specific.
Bytes 0 to 7 See Instance 111 above. Byte 8 Reserved (value=0) Byte 9 See Instance 54 above.
Instance 113: PKW Request and LTM R Monitoring Registers This assembly is vendor specific.
Bytes 0 to 7 See Instance 111 above. Byte 8 to 15 See Instance 110 above.
1639504 05/2008
397
Use
Connection Object
Description Class Attributes
The Connection Object provides for and manages the run-time exchange of messages.
Instance 1 Attributes: Explicit Message Instance

Attribute ID 1 Access Get Name State Data Type USInt Value Description 0: Non-existent 3: Established 5: Deferred Delete Explicit Message Defines behavior of the connection xxxxxx = Node address xxxxxx = Node address Explicit messaging via Group 2 2.5 sec. (TimeOut) 1: Auto-Delete (Default) 3: Deferred Delete empty empty
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15 16
Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get/Set Get/Set Get Get Get Get
Instance_type TransportClass_trigger Produced_connection_id Consumed_connection_id Initial_comm_characteristics Produced_connection_size Consumed_connection_size Expected_packet_rate Watchdog_timeout_action Produced connection path length Produced connection path Consumed connection path length Consumed connection path
USInt USInt UInt UInt USInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt
0 83h 10xxxxxx 011 10xxxxxx 100 21h 7 7 2500 1 or 3 0 Null 0 Null
398
1639504 05/2008
Use
Instance 2 Attributes: Polled I/O Message Instance

Attribute ID 1 Access Get Name State Data Type USInt Value Description 0: Non-existent 1: Configuring 3: Established 4: TimeOut I/O Message Class 2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get/Set Get/Set
Instance_type TransportClass_trigger Produced_connection_id Consumed_connection_id Initial_comm_characteristics Produced_connection_size Consumed_connection_size Expected_packet_rate Watchdog_timeout_action
USInt USInt UInt UInt USInt UInt UInt UInt USInt
1 82h
01111xxx xxxxxx = Node address xxx 10xxxxxx 101 01h 4 4 0 0, 1 or 2 xxxxxx = Node address Group1/Group 2 0: Transition to TimeOut 1: Auto-delete 2: Auto-reset Minimum time between new data production
13 14 15 16 17
Get Get/Set Get Get/Set Get/Set
Produced connection path length Produced connection path Consumed connection path length Consumed connection path Production_inhibit_time
UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt
1639504 05/2008
399
Use
Instance 4 Attributes: Change-of-State/ Cyclic Message Instance

Attribute ID Access 1 Get Name State Data Type USInt Value Description 0: Non-existent 1: Configuring 3: Established 4: TimeOut I/O Message xxxxxx = Node address xxxxxx = Node address Group1/Group 2 0: Transition to TimeOut 1: Auto-delete 2: Auto-reset Not defined
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get/Set Get/Set
Instance_type TransportClass_trigger Produced_connection_id Consumed_connection_id Initial_comm_characteristics Produced_connection_size Consumed_connection_size Expected_packet_rate Watchdog_timeout_action
USInt USInt UInt UInt USInt UInt UInt UInt USInt
1 xx 01101xxx xxx 10xxxxxx 101 01h 4 4 0 0, 1 or 2
13 14 15 16 17
Get Get/Set Get Get/Set Get/Set
Produced connection path length Produced connection path Consumed connection path length Consumed connection path Production_inhibit_time
UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt
Class Service
Service Code 08 hex 0E hex
Service Name Create Get_Attribute_Single
Description Used to instantiate a Connection Object Read 1 attribute
Instance Service
Service Code 0E hex 10 hex 05 hex
Service Name Get_Attribute_Single Set_Attribute_Single Reset
Description Read 1 attribute Write 1 attribute Reset Inactivity/Watchdog timer
400
1639504 05/2008
Use
Control Supervisor Object

Description This object models all the management functions for devices within the "Hierarchy of Motor Control Devices".
Class Attributes
Max instance UInt
Instance Attributes
Attribute ID Access 3 4 6 Get/Set Get Get Name Run Fwd Run Rev State Data Type Description Bool Bool USInt 704.0 704.1 0 = Vendor Specific 1 = Startup 2 = Not_Ready 3 = Ready 4 = Enabled 5 = Stopping 6 = Fault_Stop 7 = Faulted 455.7 AND 704.0 455.7 AND 704.1 455.0 455.2 455.3 704.3 = 0 ->1 (rising edge) 451 460 NOT(455.14) Action on network loss: 0 = Fault + Stop ' 682 = 2 1 = Ignore ' 682 = 0 2 = Frozen ' 682 = 1 3 = Inchange ' 682 = 3 4 = Force FW ' 682 = 4 5 = Force RV ' 682 = 5 704.12
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Get Get Get Get Get Get/Set Get Get Get Get/Set
Running Fwd Running Rev Ready Faulted Warning FaultRst FaultCode WarnCode CtrlFromNet DNFaultMode
Bool Bool Bool Bool Bool Bool UInt UInt Bool UInt
17
Get/Set
ForceFault/Trip
Bool
1639504 05/2008
401
Use
Class Service
Service Code 0E hex
Instance Service
Service Code 0E hex 10 hex 05 hex Service Name Get_Attribute_Single Set_Attribute_Single Reset Description Read 1 attribute Write 1 attribute Reset Inactivity/Watchdog timer
Control Supervisor State Event
The following diagram shows the control supervisor state event matrix:
Switch Off
Non-Existant Switch On Main Power Off
Reset
Startup Initialization Complete Not_Ready Main Power On Ready
Fault Detected Faulted Fault Reset Fault Detected
Main Power Off Fault Detected Stop Complete
Fault_Stop Complete
Fault_Stop
Run
Stopping Stop Fault Detected
Enable
402
1639504 05/2008
Use
The following table describes the run/stop event matrix:

Event Nonexist Switch Off N/A Startup Transition to Nonexist N/A State (N/A = No action) Not_Ready Ready Transition to Transition Non-exist to Nonexist N/A N/A Enabled Transition to Nonexist N/A Stopping Transition to Nonexist N/A FaultStop Faulted
Transition Transition to Nonto Nonexist exist N/A N/A
Switch On
Transitio n to Startup N/A
Initialisation Complete Main Power On Run Stop Stop Complete Reset Main Power Off Fault Detected Fault_Stop Complete Fault Reset
Transition N/A to Not_Ready N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Transition to N/A Ready N/A N/A N/A Transition to Enable N/A N/A
N/A N/A
N/A Transition to Enable
N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A N/A N/A N/A
Transition N/A to Stopping N/A Transition to Startup Transition to Ready Transition to Startup Transition to Faulted
Transition to Transition Startup to Startup N/A
Transition Transition to Startup to Startup Transition N/A to Faulted N/A
Transition Transition to to Faulted Not_Ready
N/A
Transition to Faulted N/A N/A
Transition to Transition Faulted to Faulted N/A N/A N/A N/A
Transition Transition N/A to to Fault_Stop Fault_Stop N/A N/A N/A N/A Transition to Faulted N/A
N/A N/A
Transition to Not_Ready
Attribute 5 (NetCtrl) is used to request that Run Stop events be controlled from the network. You may inhibit these events, however, if you do not wish to allow Run Stop control from the network under certain circumstances, or if your application does not permit it. Only when attribute 15 (CtrlFromNet) is set to 1 by the device in response to a NetCtrl request, is Run Stop control actually enabled from the network.
1639504 05/2008
403
Use
If attribute 15 (CtrlFromNet) is 1, then the events Run and Stop are triggered by a combination of the Run1 and Run2 attributes, as shown in the following table. Note that Run1 and Run2 have different contexts for different device types. The following table shows the Run1 and Run2 contexts for the devices within the motor control hierarchy:
Drives and Servos Run1 Run2 RunFwd RunRev
If CtrlFromNet is 0, Run and Stop events must be controlled using local input(s) provided by the vendor.
Run1 0 0 -> 1 0 0 -> 1 1 1 -> 0 1 Run2 0 0 0 -> 1 0 -> 1 1 1 1 -> 0 Trigger Event Stop Run Run No action No action Run Run Run Type N/A Run1 Run2 N/A N/A Run2 Run1
Note: Local stop and run signals could override or be interlocked with the run/stop control through DeviceNet.
404
1639504 05/2008
Use
Overload Object
Description Class Attributes This object models all the functions specific to an AC motor overload protection device.
Max instance UInt
Instance Attributes
Attribute ID 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 127 128 129 Access Get Set/Get Set/Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Name NumAttr TripFLCSet TripClass AvgCurrent %PhImbal %Thermal IL1 Current IL2 Current IL3 Current Ground Current IL1 Current IL2 Current IL3 Current Ground Current IL1 Current Ratio IL2 Current Ratio IL3 Current Ratio Thermal Capacity Level Ground Current Current phase imbalance Time to trip Time to Reset Single / Three Ph FLC Setting Load Class Data Type UInt UInt USInt Int USInt USInt Int Int Int Int Int Int Int Int UInt UInt UInt UInt Int UInt UInt UInt Bool UInt UInt [652] [606] 65535x[501]+[500]/10 [471] [465] 65535x[503]+[504]/10 65535x[505]+[506]/10 65535x[507]+[506]/10 65535x[509]+[508]/10 Idem Att. 8 Idem Att. 9 Idem Att. 10 Idem Att. 11 [467] [468] [469] [466] [465] [Idem Att. 11 [471] [511] [450] if [601.14]=1, return 0 if [601.13]=1, return 1 [652] [606] Value Description Number of Attributes Supported % of FLC max Trip Class Setting (0 to 200) 0.1 A % Phase Imbalance % Thermal Capacity 0.1 A 0.1 A 0.1 A 0.1 A 0.1 A 0.1 A 0.1 A 0.1 A % of FLC % of FLC % of FLC % of FLC %TripLevel 0.1 A % Imbalance Seconds Seconds 0 = Single phase 1 = Three phases Seconds Seconds
IAV Average Current Ratio UInt
1639504 05/2008
405
Use Attribute ID 132 133 134 136 137 138 139 140 142 143 144 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 178 Access Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get Name Thermal Warn Level PL Inhibit Time PL Trip Delay GF Trip Delay GF Trip Level GF Warn Level Stall Enabled Time Stall Trip Level Jam Trip Delay Jam Trip Level Jam Warn Level UL Trip Delay UL Trip Level UL Warn Level CI Inhibit Time CI Trip Delay CI Trip Level CI Warn Level CT Ratio Data Type UInt USInt USInt USInt USInt USInt USInt UInt USInt UInt UInt USInt USInt USInt USInt USInt USInt USInt USInt 95 = Value [609] [613] [614] [610] [611] [612] [623] [624] [617] [618] [619] [620] [621] [622] [613] [614] [615] [616] [628]x[630] [629] Description %TripLevel Seconds Seconds 0.1...25.0 Seconds 1.0...5.0 A 1.0...5.0 A 0...250 Seconds 100...600 0.1...25.0 Seconds 0...600 % FLC 0...600 % FLC 0.1...25.0 Seconds 10...100 % FLC 10...100 % FLC 0...250 Seconds 0.1...25.0 Seconds 10...100 % FLC 10...100 % FLC
Note: In the table above: PL = Current Phase Loss GF = Ground Fault Stall = Long Start UL = Underload CI = Current Phase Imbalance
Class Service
Service Code 0E hex
Instance Service
Service Name Get_Attribute_Single Set_Attribute_Single
Description Read 1 attribute Write 1 attribute
406
1639504 05/2008
Use
DeviceNet Interface Object

Description This object enables you to select the data that will be exchanged on the network through I/O messaging. A single instance (instance 1) of the DeviceNet Interface Object is supported. The following instance attributes are supported:
Access Set/Get Name Poll-produced assembly instance Data Type Byte (0...7) Value 0: Instance 50: Basic Overload 1: Instance 51: Extended Overload 2: Instance 52: Basic Motor Starter 3: Instance 53: Extended Motor Starter 1 (EMS1) 4: Instance 54: Extended Motor Starter 2 (EMS2) (Default) 5: Instance 110: LTM1 Monitoring registers 6: Instance 111: PKW response object 7: Instance 112: PKW response + EMS2 8:Instance 113: PKW response + LTM1 monitoring 0: Instance 2: Basic Overload 1: Instance 3: Basic Motor Starter 2: Instance 4: Extended Contactor 3: Instance 5: Extended Motor Starter (EMS) 4: Instance 5: Extended Motor Starter (EMS) (Default) * 5: Instance 100: LTM1 control registers 6: Instance 101: PKW Request object 7: Instance 102: PKW Request + EMS 8: Instance 103: PKW Request + LTM1 control 0: Instance 50: Basic Overload 1: Instance 51: Extended Overload 2: Instance 52: Basic Motor Starter 3: Instance 53: Extended Motor Starter 1 (EMS1) 4: Instance 54: Extended Motor Starter 2 (EMS2) (Default) 5: Instance 110: LTM1 Monitoring registers 6: Instance 111: PKW response object 7: Instance 112: PKW response + EMS2 8: Instance 113: PKW response + LTM1 monitoring 0: AutoBaud disable 1: AutoBaud enable (Default) ** Register of word 0 (Default: 455) ***
Instance Attributes
Attribute ID 1
Set/Get
Poll-consumed assembly instance
Byte (0...7)
Set/Get
COS-produced assembly instance
Byte (0...7)
4 5
Set/Get Set/Get
AutoBaud enable LTM R monitoring Word 0
Bool UInt
1639504 05/2008
407
Use Attribute ID 6 7 8 Access Set/Get Set/Get Set/Get Name LTM R monitoring Word 1 LTM R monitoring Word 2 LTM R monitoring Word 3 Data Type UInt UInt UInt Value Register of word 1 (Default: 456) *** Register of word 2 (Default: 457) *** Register of word 3 (Default: 459) ***
Note: * The Extended Motor Starter (EMS) is repeated twice (value 3 and 4) in the Pollconsumed assembly list of values. This is done to be consistent with values 3 and 4 of the Poll-produced assembly list of values. ** The AutoBaud enable value (attribute 4) is read at power-up only. When this bit is cleared (when disabling auto-baud), the current baudrate is written to the register Network Port Baud Rate Setting [695]. Network Port Baud Rate Setting has priority over this bit in the event of inconsistency (checked at power up). In this case, the AutoBaud enable value is set according to the register Network Port Baud Rate Setting at power up. *** The configuration of the LTM R monitoring assembly (attributes 5 to 8) is read when the device is allocated to a master, i.e. when the device is connected. Any change that occurs after allocation will not take effect before the connection release/reallocation phases. Permitted values for these 4 attributes are 0 to 19999.
Instance Service
Service Name Get_Attribute_Single Set_Attribute_Single
Description Read 1 attribute Write 1 attribute
408
1639504 05/2008
Use
Register Map - Organization of Communication Variables

Introduction Communication variables are listed in tables. They belong to groups (identification, statistics, monitoring,...). They are associated with an LTM R Controller, which may or may not have an LTM E Expansion Module attached. Communication variables are grouped according to the following criteria:
Variable groups Identification variables Statistics variables Monitoring variables Configuration variables Command variables Custom Logic variables Register 00 to 99 100 to 449 450 to 539 540 to 699 700 to 799 1200 to 1399 DeviceNet addresses 64 : 01 : 32 to 64 : 01 : 62 65 : 01 : 01 to 67 : 01 : 82 68 : 01 : 01 to 68 : 01 : 54 69 : 01 : 01 to 6B : 01 : 32 6C : 01 : 01 to 6C : 01 : 0F 71 : 01 : 01 to 71 : 01 : 0A
Communication Variable Groups
Table Structure
Column 1 Register number (decimal)
Communication variables are listed in 5-column tables:

Column 2 DeviceNet address (class : instance : attribute) Column 3 Variable type: integer, word, word[n], DT_type (see p. 412) Column 4 Variable name and access via Read only or Read/ Write requests Column 5 Note: code for additional information
1639504 05/2008
409
Use
Note
The Note column gives a code for additional information. Variables without a code are available for all hardware configurations, and without functional restrictions. The code can be: numerical (1 to 9), for specific hardware combinations alphabetical (A to Z), for specific system behaviors.
If the note is... 1 2 3-9 If the note is... A B C D-Z Then the variable is... available for the LTM R + LTM EV40 combination always available but with a value equal to 0 if no LTM EV40 is connected Not used Then... the variable can be written only when the motor is off the variable can be written only in configuration mode the variable can be written only with no fault the variable is available for future exceptions
Unused Addresses
Unused addresses fall into 3 categories: Not significant, in Read only tables, means that you should ignore the value read, whether equal to 0 or not. Reserved, in Read/Write tables, means that you must write 0 in these variables. Forbidden, imeans that read or write requests are rejected, that these addresses are not accessible at all.
410
1639504 05/2008
Use
Data Formats
Overview The data format of a communication variable can be integer, Word, or Word[n], as described below. For more information about a variable size and format, see p. 412. Integers fall into the following categories: Int: signed integer using one register (16 bits) UInt: unsigned integer using one register (16 bits) DInt: signed double integer using 2 registers (32 bits) UDInt: unsigned double integer using 2 registers (32 bits) For all integer-type variables, the variable name is completed with its unit or format, if necessary. Example: Address 474, UInt, Frequency (x 0.01 Hz). Word Word: Set of 16 bits, where each bit or group of bits represents command, monitoring or configuration data. Example: Address 455, Word, System Status Register 1
bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 bits 8-13 bit 14 bit 15 System ready System on System fault System warning System tripped Fault reset authorized (Not significant) Motor running Motor average current ratio Control via HMI Motor starting (in progress)
Integer (Int, UInt, DInt, IDInt)
Word[n]
Word[n]: Data encoded on contiguous registers. Examples: Addresses 64 to 69, Word[6], Controller Commercial Reference (see DT_CommercialReference) Addresses 655 to 658, Word[4], Date and Time setting (see DT_DateTime).
1639504 05/2008
411
Use
Data Types
Overview Data types are specific variable formats which are used to complement the description of internal formats (for instance, in case of a structure or of an enumeration). The generic format of data types is DT_xxx. Here is the list of the most commonly used DT_xxx formats:
DT_xxx names DT_ACInputSetting DT_CommercialReference DT_DateTime DT_ExtBaudRate DT_ExtParity DT_FaultCode DT_FirmwareVersion DT_Language5 DT_OutputFallbackStrategy DT_PhaseNumber DT_ResetMode DT_WarningCode
List of Data Types
Note: The DT_xxx formats are described below.
DT_ACInput Setting
DT_ACInputSetting format is an enumeration that improves AC input detection:

Value 0 1 2 3 4 None (default) < 170 V 50 Hz < 170 V 60 Hz > 170 V 50 Hz > 170 V 60 Hz Description
412
1639504 05/2008
Use
DT_Commercial Reference
DT_CommercialReference format is Word[6] and indicates a Commercial Reference:

Register Register N Register N+1 Register N+2 Register N+3 Register N+4 Register N+5 character 1 character 3 character 5 character 7 character 9 character 11 MSB character 2 character 4 character 6 character 8 character 10 character 12 LSB
Example: Addresses 64 to 69, Word[6], Controller Commercial Reference. If Controller Commercial Reference = LTM R:
Register 64 65 66 67 68 69 L M R MSB T (space) LSB
DT_DateTime
DT_DateTime format is Word[4] and indicates Date and Time:

Register Register N Register N+1 Register N+2 Register N+3 15 Y M H S 12 11 Y M H S 8 7 Y D m 0 4 3 Y D m 0 0
Where: Y = year The format is 4 Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) digits. The value range is [2006-2099]. M = month The format is 2 BCD digits. The value range is [01-12]. D = day The format is 2 BCD digits. The value range is: [01-31] for months 01, 03, 05, 07, 08, 10, 12
1639504 05/2008
413
Use
[01-30] for months 04, 06, 09, 11 [01-29] for month 02 in a leap year [01-28] for month 02 in a non-leap year. H = hour The format is 2 BCD digits. The value range is [00-23]. m = minute The format is 2 BCD digits. The value range is [00-59]. S = second The format is 2 BCD digits. The value range is [00-59]. 0 = unused Data entry format and value range are:
Data entry format Minimum value Maximum value DT#YYYY-MM-DD-HH:mm:ss DT#2006-01-01:00:00:00 DT#2099-12-31-23:59:59 January 1, 2006 December 31, 2099
Note: If you give values outside the limits, the system will return an error.
Example: Addresses 655 to 658, Word[4], Date and Time setting. If date is September 4, 2008 at 7 a.m., 50 minutes and 32 seconds:
Register 655 656 657 658 15 2 0 0 3 12 11 0 9 7 2 8 7 0 0 5 0 4 3 8 4 0 0 0
With data entry format: DT#2008-09-04-07:50:32.
414
1639504 05/2008
Use
DT_ExtBaudRate
DT_ExtbaudRate depends on the bus used: DT_ModbusExtBaudRate format is an enumeration of possible baud rates with Modbus network:
Value 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 65535 2,400 bps 4,800 bps 9,600 bps 19,200 bps Autodetection (default) Description 1,200 bits/s (bps)
DT_ProfibusExtBaudRate format is an enumeration of possible baud rates with Profibus network:

Value 65535 Description Autobaud (default)
DT_DeviceNetExtBaudRate format is an enumeration of possible baud rates with DeviceNet network:

Value 0 1 2 3 250 kbps 500 kbps Autobaud (default) Description 125 kbits/s (kbps)
DT_CANopenExtBaudRate format is an enumeration of possible baud rates with CANopen network:

Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 kbps 20 kbps 50 kbps 125 kbps 250 kbps (default) 500 kbps 800 kbps 1000 kbps Autobaud Default Description
1639504 05/2008
415
Use
DT_ExtParity
DT_ExtParity depends on the bus used: DT_ModbusExtParity format is an enumeration of possible parities with Modbus network:
Value 0 1 2 None Even Odd Description
DT_FaultCode
DT_FaultCode format is an enumeration of fault codes:

Fault code 0 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 No error Ground current Thermal overload Long start Jam Current phase imbalance Undercurrent Test HMI port error HMI port communication loss Network port internal error External fault set by PCODE On-Off diagnostic Wiring diagnostic Overcurrent Current phase loss Current phase reversal Motor temp sensor Voltage phase imbalance Voltage phase loss Voltage phase reversal Undervoltage Overvoltage Underpower Overpower Under power factor Over power factor LTME configuration fault Temperature sensor short-circuit Description
416
1639504 05/2008
Use Fault code 35 36 46 47 48 49 51 55 56 57 58 60 64 65 66 67 100-104 109 555 CT reversal Start check Run checkback Stop check Stop checkback Controller internal temperature error Controller internal error (Stack overflow) Controller internal error (RAM error) Controller internal error (RAM checksum error) Controller internal error (Hardware watchdog fault) L2 current detected in single-phase mode Non volatile memory error Expansion module communication error Stuck reset button Logic function error Network port internal error Network port comm error Network port configuration error Description Temperature sensor open-circuit
DT_Firmware Version
DT_FirmwareVersion format is an XY000 array that describes a firmware revision: X = major revision Y = minor revision. Example: Address 76, UInt, Controller firmware version.
DT_Language5
DT_Language5 format is an enumeration used for language display:

Language code 1 2 4 8 16 English (default) Franais Espaol Deutsch Italiano Description
Example: Address 650, Word, HMI language.
1639504 05/2008
417
Use
DT_Output FallbackStrategy
DT_OutputFallbackStrategy format is an enumeration of motor output states when loosing communication.

Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 Description Hold LO1 LO2 Run LO1, LO2 Off LO1, LO2 On LO1 On LO2 On Only for overload, independent and custom operating modes For all modes except 2-step For all modes except 2-step Motor modes For 2-step mode only For all modes except 2-step
DT_Phase Number
DT_PhaseNumber format is an enumeration, with only 1 bit activated:

Value 1 2 1 phase 3 phases Description
DT_ResetMode
DT_ResetMode format is an enumeration of possible modes for thermal fault reset:

Value 1 2 4 Manual or HMI Remote by network Automatic Description
418
1639504 05/2008
Use
DT_Warning Code
DT_WarningCode format is an enumeration of warning codes:

Warning code 0 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 46 47 48 49 109 555 No warning Ground current Thermal overload Long start Jam Current phase imbalance Undercurrent HMI port LTM R internal temperature Diagnostic Wiring Overcurrent Current phase loss Motor temp sensor Voltage phase imbalance Voltage phase loss Undervoltage Overvoltage Underpower Overpower Under power factor Over power factor LTM E configuration Start check Run checkback Stop check Stop checkback Network port comm loss Network port configuration Description
1639504 05/2008
419
Use
Identification Variables
Identification Variables Identification variables are described below:
Variable type (Not significant) Word[6] Word[5] UInt UInt UInt Expansion commercial reference (See p. 413) Expansion serial number Expansion ID code Expansion firmware version (See p. 417) Expansion compatibility code (Not significant) Network port ID code Network port firmware version (See p. 417) Network port compatibility code Controller commercial reference (See p. 413) Controller serial number Controller ID code Controller firmware version (See p. 417) Controller compatibility code Current scale ratio (0.1 %) Current sensor max (Not significant) Current range max (x 0.1 A) (Not significant) Load CT ratio (x 0.1 A) Full load current max (maximum FLC range, FLC = Full Load Current) (x 0.1 A) (Forbidden) 1 1 1 1 1 Read-only variables Note, p. 410
Register DeviceNet address 0-34 64 : 01 : 03 64 : 01 : 23 35-40 64 : 01 : 24 64 : 01 : 29 41-45 64 : 01 :2A 64 : 01 : 2E 46 64 : 01 : 2F 47 64 : 01 : 30 48 49-60 61 62 63 64-69 70-74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82-94 95 96 97-99 64 : 01 : 31 64 : 01 : 32 64 : 01 : 3D 64 : 01 : 3E 64 : 01 : 3F 64 : 01 : 40 64 : 01 : 41 64 : 01 : 46 64 : 01 : 47 64 : 01 : 4B 64 : 01 :4 C 64 : 01 : 4D 64 : 01 :4E 64 : 01 : 4F 64 : 01 : 50 64 : 01 : 51 64 : 01 : 52 64 : 01 : 53 64 : 01 : 5D 64 : 01 : 60 64 : 01 : 61 64 : 01 : 62 64 : 01 : 64
Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Word[6] Word[5] Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt
Ulnt Ulnt
420
1639504 05/2008
Use
Statistics Variables
Statistics Overview Statistics variables are grouped according to the following criteria. Trip statistics are described in a main table and in an extension table.
Statistics variable groups Global statistics LTM monitoring statistics Last trip statistics and extension Trip n-1 statistics and extension Trip n-2 statistics and extension Trip n-3 statistics and extension Trip n-4 statistics and extension Register 100 to 121 122 to 149 150 to 179 300 to 309 180 to 209 330 to 339 210 to 239 360 to 369 240 to 269 390 to 399 270 to 299 420 to 429 DeviceNet addresses 65 : 1 : 1 to 65 : 1 : 16 65 : 1 : 17 to 65 : 1 : 32 66 : 1 : 1 to 66 : 1 : 1E 67 : 1 : 1 to 67 : 1 : 0A 66 : 1 : 1F to 66 : 1 : 3C 67 : 1 : 1F to 67 : 1 : 28 66 : 1 : 3D to 66 : 1 : 5A 67 : 1 : 3D to 67 : 1 : 46 66 : 1 : 5B to 66 : 1 : 78 67 : 1 : 5B to 67 : 1 : 64 66 : 1 : 79 to 66 : 1 : 96 67 : 1 : 79 to 67 : 1 : 82
1639504 05/2008
421
Use
Global Statistics
Register 100-101 102 103 104 105 106 107 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117-118 119-120 121
The global statistics are described below:

Variable type Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt UDlnt UDlnt lnt Read-only variables (Not significant) Ground current faults count Thermal overload faults count Long start faults count Jam faults count Current phase imbalance faults count Undercurrent faults count HMI port faults count Controller internal faults count Internal port faults count (Not significant) Network port config faults count Network port faults count Auto-resets count Thermal overload warnings count Motor starts count Operating time (s) Controller internal temperature max (C) Note, p. 410
DeviceNet address 65 : 01 : 01 - 65 : 01 : 02 65 : 01 : 03 65 : 01 : 04 65 : 01 : 05 65 : 01 : 06 65 : 01 : 07 65 : 01 : 08 65 : 01 : 0A 65 : 01 : 0B 65 : 01 : 0C 65 : 01 : 0D 65 : 01 : 0E 65 : 01 : 0F 65 : 01 : 10 65 : 01 : 11 65 : 01 : 12 - 65 : 01 : 13 65 : 01 : 14 - 65 : 01 : 15 65 : 01 : 16
422
1639504 05/2008
Use
LTM Monitoring Statistics

Register 122 123 124-125 126-127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143-144 145-146 147 148 149
The LTM monitoring statistics are described below:

Variable type Ulnt Ulnt Read-only variables Faults count Warnings count Motor LO1 closings count Motor LO2 closings count Diagnostic faults count (Reserved) Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Overcurrent faults count Current phase loss faults count Motor temperature sensor faults count Voltage phase imbalance faults count Voltage phase loss faults count Wiring faults count Undervoltage faults count Overvoltage faults count Underpower faults count Overpower faults count Under power factor faults count Over power factor faults count Load sheddings count Active power consumption (x 0.1kWh) Reactive power consumption (x 0.1 kVARh) Auto restart immediate count Auto restart delayed count Auto restart manual count 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note, p. 410
DeviceNet address 65 : 01 : 17 65 : 01 : 18
65 : 01 : 14 - 65 : 01 : 1A UDlnt 65 : 01 : 1B - 65 : 01 : 1C UDlnt 65 : 01 : 1C 65 : 01 : 1E 65 : 01 : 1F 65 : 01 : 20 65 : 01 : 21 65 : 01 : 22 65 : 01 : 23 65 : 01 : 24 65 : 01 : 25 65 : 01 : 26 65 : 01 : 27 65 : 01 : 28 65 : 01 : 29 65 : 01 : 2A 65 : 01 : 2B Ulnt
65 : 01 : 2C - 65 : 01 : 2D UDlnt 65 : 01 : 2E - 65 : 01 : 2F UDlnt 65 : 01 : 30 65 : 01 : 31 65 : 01 : 32 Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt
1639504 05/2008
423
Use
Last Fault (n-0) Statistics

Register 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162-165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173-179
The last fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 300 to 309.
Variable type Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Word[4] Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Read-only variables Fault code n-0 Motor full load current ratio n-0 (% FLC max) Thermal capacity level n-0 (% trip level) Average current ratio n-0 (% FLC) L1 current ratio n-0 (% FLC) L2 current ratio n-0 (% FLC) L3 current ratio n-0 (% FLC) Ground current ratio n-0 (x 0.1 % FLC min) Full load current max n-0 (x 0.1 A) Current phase imbalance n-0 (%) Frequency n-0 (x 0.1 Hz) Motor temperature sensor n-0 (x 0.1 ) Date and time n-0 (See p. 413) Average voltage n-0 (V) L3-L1 voltage n-0 (V) L1-L2 voltage n-0 (V) L2-L3 voltage n-0 (V) Voltage phase imbalance n-0 (%) Active power n-0 (x 0.1 kWh) Power factor n-0 (x 0.01) (Not significant) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Note, p. 410
DeviceNet address 66 : 01 : 01 66 : 01 : 02 66 : 01 : 03 66 : 01 : 04 66 : 01 : 05 66 : 01 : 06 66 : 01 : 07 66 : 01 : 08 66 : 01 : 09 66 : 01 : 0A 66 : 01 : 0B 66 : 01 : 0C 65 : 01 : 2D - 65 : 01 : 10 66 : 01 : 11 66 : 01 : 12 66 : 01 : 13 66 : 01 : 14 66 : 01 : 15 66 : 01 : 16 66 : 01 : 17 66 : 01 : 18 - 66 : 01 : 1E
424
1639504 05/2008
Use
N-1 Fault Statistics

Register 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192-195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203-209
The n-1 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 330 to 339.
DeviceNet address 66 : 01 : 1F 66 : 01 : 20 66 : 01 : 21 66 : 01 : 22 66 : 01 : 23 66 : 01 : 24 66 : 01 : 25 66 : 01 : 26 66 : 01 : 27 66 : 01 : 28 66 : 01 : 29 66 : 01 : 2A Variable type Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Read-only variables Fault code n-1 Motor full load current ratio n-1 (% FLC max) Thermal capacity level n-1 (% trip level) Average current ratio n-1 (% FLC) L1 current ratio n-1 (% FLC) L2 current ratio n-1 (% FLC) L3 current ratio n-1 (% FLC) Ground current ratio n-1 (x 0.1 % FLC min) Full load current max n-1 (x 0.1 A) Current phase imbalance n-1 (%) Frequency n-1 (x 0.1 Hz) Motor temperature sensor n-1 (x 0.1 ) Date and time n-1 (See p. 413) Average voltage n-1 (V) L3-L1 voltage n-1 (V) L1-L2 voltage n-1 (V) L2-L3 voltage n-1 (V) Voltage phase imbalance n-1 (%) Active power n-1 (x 0.1 kWh) Power factor n-1 (x 0.01) (Not significant) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Note, p. 410
66 : 01 : 2B - 66 : 01 : 2E Word[4] 66 : 01 : 2F 66 : 01 : 30 66 : 01 : 31 66 : 01 : 32 66 : 01 : 33 66 : 01 : 34 66 : 01 : 35 66 : 01 : 36 - 66 : 01 : 3C Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt
1639504 05/2008
425
Use

Register 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222-225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233-239
DeviceNet address 66 : 01 : 3D 66 : 01 : 3E 66 : 01 : 3F 66 : 01 : 40 66 : 01 : 41 66 : 01 : 42 66 : 01 : 43 66 : 01 : 44 66 : 01 : 45 66 : 01 : 46 66 : 01 : 47 66 : 01 : 48 Variable type Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Read-only variables Fault code n-2 Motor full load current ratio n-2 (% FLC max) Thermal capacity level n-2 (% trip level) Average current ratio n-2 (% FLC) L1 current ratio n-2 (% FLC) L2 current ratio n-2 (% FLC) L3 current ratio n-2 (% FLC) Ground current ratio n-2 (x 0.1 % FLC min) Full load current max n-2 (x 0.1 A) Current phase imbalance n-2 (%) Frequency n-2 (x 0.1 Hz) Motor temperature sensor n-2 (x 0.1 ) Date and time n-2 (See p. 413) Average voltage n-2 (V) L3-L1 voltage n-2 (V) L1-L2 voltage n-2 (V) L2-L3 voltage n-2 (V) Voltage phase imbalance n-2 (%) Active power n-2 (x 0.1 kWh) Power factor n-2 (x 0.01) (Not significant) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Note, p. 410
66 : 01 : 49 - 66 : 01 : 4C Word[4] 66 : 01 : 4D 66 : 01 : 4E 66 : 01 : 4F 66 : 01 : 50 66 : 01 : 51 66 : 01 : 52 66 : 01 : 53 66 : 01 : 54 - 66 : 01 : 5A Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt
426
1639504 05/2008
Use

240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252-255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263-269 66 : 01 : 5B
Variable type Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Read-only variables Fault code n-3 Motor full load current ratio n-3 (% FLC max) Thermal capacity level n-3 (% trip level) Average current ratio n-3 (% FLC) L1 current ratio n-3 (% FLC) L2 current ratio n-3 (% FLC) L3 current ratio n-3 (% FLC) Ground current ratio n-3 (x 0.1 % FLC min) Full load current max n-3 (0.1 A) Current phase imbalance n-3 (%) Frequency n-3 (x 0.1 Hz) Motor temperature sensor n-3 (x 0.1 ) Date and time n-3 (See p. 413) Average voltage n-3 (V) L3-L1 voltage n-3 (V) L1-L2 voltage n-3 (V) L2-L3 voltage n-3 (V) Voltage phase imbalance n-3 (%) Active power n-3 (x 0.1 kWh) Power factor n-3 (x 0.01) (Not significant) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Note, p. 410
Register DeviceNet address 66 : 01 : 5C3 66 : 01 : 5D 66 : 01 : 5E 66 : 01 : 5F 66 : 01 : 60 66 : 01 : 61 66 : 01 : 62 66 : 01 : 63 66 : 01 : 64 66 : 01 : 65 66 : 01 : 66
66 : 01 : 67 - 66 : 01 : 6A Word[4] 66 : 01 : 6B 66 : 01 : 6C 66 : 01 : 6D 66 : 01 : 6E 66 : 01 : 6F 66 : 01 : 70 66 : 01 : 71 66 : 01 : 72 - 66 : 01 : 78 Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt
1639504 05/2008
427
Use

Register 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282-285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293-299 66 : 01 : 79
DeviceNet address 66 : 01 : 7A 66 : 01 : 7B 66 : 01 : 7C 66 : 01 : 7D 66 : 01 : 7E 66 : 01 : 7F 66 : 01 : 80 66 : 01 : 81 66 : 01 : 82 66 : 01 : 83 66 : 01 : 84 Variable type Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Read-only variables Fault code n-4 Motor full load current ratio n-4 (% FLC max) Thermal capacity level n-4 (% trip level) Average current ratio n-4 (% FLC) L1 current ratio n-4 (% FLC) L2 current ratio n-4 (% FLC)) L3 current ratio n-4 (% FLC) Ground current ratio n-4 (x 0.1 % FLC min) Full load current max n-4 (x 0.1 A) Current phase imbalance n-4 (%) Frequency n-4 (x 0.1 Hz) Motor temperature sensor n-4 (x 0.1 ) Date and time n-4 (See p. 413) Average voltage n-4 (V) L3-L1 voltage n-4 (V) L1-L2 voltage n-4 (V) L2-L3 voltage n-4 (V) Voltage phase imbalance n-4 (x 1 %) Active power n-4 (x 0.1 kWh) Power factor n-4 (x 0.01) (Not significant) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Note, p. 410
66 : 01 : 85 - 66 : 01 : 88 Word[4] 66 : 01 : 89 66 : 01 : 8A 66 : 01 : 8B 66 : 01 : 8C 66 : 01 : 8D 66 : 01 : 8E 66 : 01 : 8F 66 : 01 : 90 - 66 : 01 : 96 Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt
Last Fault (n-0) Statistics Extension

Register 300-301 302-303 304-305 306-307 308-309 310
The last fault main statistics are listed at addresses 150-179.
DeviceNet address 67 : 01 : 01 - 67 : 01 : 02 67 : 01 : 03 - 67 : 01 : 04 67 : 01 : 05 - 67 : 01 : 06 67 : 01 : 07 - 67 : 01 : 08 67 : 01 : 09 - 67 : 01 : 0A 67 : 01 : 0B
Variable type UDlnt UDlnt UDlnt UDlnt UDlnt Ulnt
Read-only variables Average current n-0 (x 0.01 A) L1 current n-0 (x 0.01 A) L2 current n-0 (x 0.01 A) L3 current n-0 (x 0.01 A) Ground current n-0 (mA) Motor temperature sensor degree n-0 (C)
Note, p. 410
428
1639504 05/2008
Use
N-1 Fault Statistics Extension

Register 330-331 332-333 334-335 336-337 338-339 340
The n-1 fault main statistics are listed at addresses 180-209.
DeviceNet address 67 : 01 : 1F - 67 : 01 : 20 67 : 01 : 21 - 67 : 01 : 22 67 : 01 : 23 - 67 : 01 : 24 67 : 01 : 25 - 67 : 01 : 26 67 : 01 : 27 - 67 : 01 : 28 67 : 01 : 29
Note, p. 410

360-361 362-363 364-365 366-367 368-369 370
Register DeviceNet address 67 : 01 : 3D - 67 : 01 : 3E 67 : 01 : 3F - 67 : 01 : 40 67 : 01 : 41 - 67 : 01 : 42 67 : 01 : 43 - 67 : 01 : 44 67 : 01 : 45 - 67 : 01 : 46 67 : 01 : 47
Note, p. 410

Register 390-391 392-393 394-395 396-397 398-399 400
DeviceNet address 67 : 01 : 5B - 67 : 01 : 5C 67 : 01 : 5D - 67 : 01 : 5E 67 : 01 : 5F - 67 : 01 : 60 67 : 01 : 61 - 67 : 01 : 62 67 : 01 : 63 - 67 : 01 : 64 67 : 01 : 65
Note, p. 410
1639504 05/2008
429
Use

Register 420-421 422-423 424-425 426-427 428-429 430
DeviceNet address 67 : 01 : 79 - 67 : 01 : 7A 67 : 01 : 7B - 67 : 01 : 7C 67 : 01 : 7D - 67 : 01 : 7E 67 : 01 : 7F - 67 : 01 : 80 67 : 01 : 81 - 67 : 01 : 82 67 : 01 : 83
Note, p. 410
430
1639504 05/2008
Use
Monitoring Variables
Monitoring Variables Monitoring variables are described below:
Monitoring variable groups Monitoring of faults Monitoring of status Monitoring of warnings Monitoring of measurements Register 450 451 DeviceNet address 68 : 01 : 01 68 : 01 : 02 Variable type Ulnt Ulnt Registers 450 to 454 455 to 459 460 to 464 465 to 539 Read-only variables Minimum wait time (s) Fault code (code of the last fault, or of the fault that takes priority) (See p. 416.) Fault register 1 bits 0-1 (Reserved) bit 2 Ground current fault bit 3 Thermal overload fault bit 4 Long start fault bit 5 Jam fault bit 6 Current phase imbalance fault bit 7 Undercurrent fault bit 8 (Reserved) bit 9 Test fault bit 10 HMI port fault bit 11 Controller internal fault bit 12 Internal port fault bit 13 (Not significant) bit 14 Network port config fault bit 15 Network port fault DeviceNet addresses 68 : 01 : 01 to 68 : 01 : 05 68 : 01 : 06 to 68 : 01 : 0A 68 : 01 : 0B to 68 : 01 : 0F 68 : 01 : 10 to 68 : 01 : 5A Note, p. 410
452
68 : 01 : 03
Word
1639504 05/2008
431
Use
Register 453
DeviceNet address 68 : 01 : 04
Variable type Word
Read-only variables Fault register 2 bit 0 External system fault bit 1 Diagnostic fault bit 2 Wiring fault bit 3 Overcurrent fault bit 4 Current phase loss fault bit 5 Current phase reversal fault bit 6 Motor temperature sensor fault bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance fault bit 8 Voltage phase loss fault bit 9 Voltage phase reversal fault bit 10 Undervoltage fault bit 11 Overvoltage fault bit 12 Underpower fault bit 13 Overpower fault bit 14 Under power factor fault bit 15 Over power factor fault
Note, p. 410
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
454
68 : 01 : 05
Word
Fault register 3 bit 0 LTM E configuration fault bits 1-15 (Reserved)
432
1639504 05/2008
Use Register 455 DeviceNet address 68 : 01 : 06 Variable type Word Read-only variables System status register 1 bit 0 System ready bit 1 System on bit 2 System fault bit 3 System warning bit 4 System tripped bit 5 Fault reset authorized bit 6 Controller power bit 7 Motor running (with detection of a current, if greater than 10% FLC) bits 8-13 Motor average current ratio 32 = 100% FLC - 63 = 200% FLC bit 14 Control via HMI bit 15 Motor starting (start in progress) 0 = descending current is less than 150% FLC 1 = ascending current is greater than 10% FLC 456 68 : 01 : 07 Word System status register 2 bit 0 Auto-reset active bit 1 (Not significant) bit 2 Fault power cycle requested bit 3 Motor restart time undefined bit 4 Rapid cycle lockout bit 5 Load shedding bit 6 Motor speed 0 = FLC1 setting is used 1 = FLC2 setting is used bit 7 HMI port comm loss bit 8 Network port comm loss bit 9 Motor transition lockout bits 10-15 (Not significant) 1 Note, p. 410
1639504 05/2008
433
Use
Register 457
Variable type Word
Read-only variables Logic inputs status bit 0 Logic input 1 bit 1 Logic input 2 bit 2 Logic input 3 bit 3 Logic input 4 bit 4 Logic input 5 bit 5 Logic input 6 bit 6 Logic input 7 bit 7 Logic input 8 bit 8 Logic input 9 bit 9 Logic input 10 bit 10 Logic input 11 bit 11 Logic input 12 bit 12 Logic input 13 bit 13 Logic input 14 bit 14 Logic input 15 bit 15 Logic input 16
Note, p. 410
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
458
68 : 01 : 09
Word
Logic outputs status bit 0 Logic output 1 bit 1 Logic output 2 bit 2 Logic output 3 bit 3 Logic output 4 bit 4 Logic output 5 bit 5 Logic output 6 bit 6 Logic output 7 bit 7 Logic output 8 bits 8-15 (Reserved) 1 1 1 1
434
1639504 05/2008
Use Register 459 DeviceNet address 68 : 01 : 0A Variable type Word I/O status bit 0 Input 1 bit 1 Input 2 bit 2 Input 3 bit 3 Input 4 bit 4 Input 5 bit 5 Input 6 bit 6 Input 7 bit 7 Input 8 bit 8 Input 9 bit 9 Input 10 bit 10 Input 11 bit 11 Input 12 bit 12 Output 1 (13-14) bit 13 Output 2 (23-24) bit 14 Output 3 (33-34) bit 15 Output 4 (95-96, 97-98) 460 461 68 : 01 : 0B 68 : 01 : 0C UInt Word Warning code (See p. 419.) Warning register 1 bits 0-1 (Not significant) bit 2 Ground current warning bit 3 Thermal overload warning bit 4 (Not significant) bit 5 Jam warning bit 6 Current phase imbalance warning bit 7 Undercurrent warning bits 8-9 (Not significant) bit 10 HMI port warning bit 11 Controller internal temperature warning bits 12-14 (Not significant) bit 15 Network port warning Read-only variables Note, p. 410
1639504 05/2008
435
Use
Register 462
DeviceNet address 68 : 01 : 0D
Variable type Word
Read-only variables Warning register 2 bit 0 (Not significant) bit 1 Diagnostic warning bit 2 (Reserved) bit 3 Overcurrent warning bit 4 Current phase loss warning bit 5 Current phase reversal warning bit 6 Motor temperature sensor warning bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance warning bit 8 Voltage phase loss warning bit 9 (Not significant) bit 10 Undervoltage warning bit 11 Overvoltage warning bit 12 Underpower warning bit 13 Overpower warning bit 14 Under power factor warning bit 15 Over power factor warning
Note, p. 410
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
463
68 : 01 : 0E
Word
Warning register 3 bit 0 LTM E configuration warning bits 1-15 (Reserved)
464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 436
68 : 01 : 0F 68 : 01 : 10 68 : 01 : 11 68 : 01 : 12 68 : 01 : 13 68 : 01 : 14 68 : 01 : 15 68 : 01 : 16 68 : 01 : 17 68 : 01 : 18 68 : 01 : 19 68 : 01 : 1A 68 : 01 : 1B 68 : 01 : 1C
Ulnt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt Int UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt
Motor temperature sensor degree (C) Thermal capacity level (% trip level) Average current ratio (% FLC) L1 current ratio (% FLC) L2 current ratio (% FLC) L3 current ratio (% FLC) Ground current ratio (x 0.1 % FLC min) Current phase imbalance (%) Controller internal temperature (C) Controller config checksum Frequency (x 0.01 Hz) Motor temperature sensor (x 0.1 ) Average voltage (V) L3-L1 voltage (V) 1 1
1639504 05/2008
Use Register 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 DeviceNet address 68 : 01 : 1D 68 : 01 : 1E 68 : 01 : 1F 68 : 01 : 20 68 : 01 : 21 68 : 01 : 22 68 : 01 : 23 Variable type UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt Word Read-only variables L1-L2 voltage (V) L2-L3 voltage (V) Voltage phase imbalance (%) Power factor (x 0.01) Active power (x 0.1 kW) Reactive power (x 0.1 kVAR) Auto restart status register bit 0 Voltage dip occured bit 1 Voltage dip detection bit 2 Auto restart immediate condition bit 3 Auto restart delayed condition bit 4 Auto restart manual condition bits 5-15 (Not significant) 485-489 490 68 : 01 : 24 - 68 : 01 : 28 68 : 01 : 29 Word (Not significant) Network port status bit 0 Network port communicating bit 1 Network port connected bit 2 Network port self-testing bit 3 Network port self-detecting bit 4 Network port bad config bits 5-15 (Not significant) 491 492 493 494-499 500-501 502-503 504-505 506-507 508-509 510 511 68 : 01 : 2A 68 : 01 : 2B 68 : 01 : 2C 68 : 01 : 2D - 68 : 01 : 32 68 : 01 : 33 - 68 : 01 : 34 UDInt 68 : 01 : 35 - 68 : 01 : 36 UDInt 68 : 01 : 37 - 68 : 01 : 38 UDInt 68 : 01 : 39 - 68 : 01 : 3A UDInt 68 : 01 : 3B - 68 : 01 : 3C UDInt 68 : 01 : 3D 68 : 01 : 3E UInt UInt UInt UInt Network port baud rate (See p. 415.) (Not significant) Network port parity (See p. 416.) (Not significant) Average current (x 0.01 A) L1 current (x 0.01 A) L2 current (x 0.01 A) L3 current (x 0.01 A) Ground current (mA) Controller port ID Time to trip (x 1 s) 437 Note, p. 410 1 1 1 1 1 1
1639504 05/2008
Use
Register 512 513 514 515
DeviceNet address 68 : 01 : 3F 68 : 01 : 40 68 : 01 : 41 68 : 01 : 42
Variable type UInt UInt UInt Word
Read-only variables Motor last start current ratio (% FLC) Motor last start duration (s) Motor starts per hour count Phase imbalances register bit 0 L1 current highest imbalance bit 1 L2 current highest imbalance bit 2 L3 current highest imbalance bit 3 L1-L2 voltage highest imbalance bit 4 L2-L3 voltage highest imbalance bit 5 L3-L1 voltage highest imbalance bits 6-15 (Not significant)
Note, p. 410
1 1 1
516-523 524-539
68 : 01 : 43 - 68 : 01 : 5A 68 : 01 : 4B - 68 : 01 : 5A
(Reserved) (Forbidden)
438
1639504 05/2008
Use
Configuration Variables
Configuration Variables Configuration variables are described below:
Configuration variable groups Configuration Setting Register 540 DeviceNet address 69 : 01 : 01 Variable type UInt Registers 540 to 649 650 to 699 DeviceNet addresses 69 : 01 : 01 to 6A : 01 : 32 6B : 01 : 01 to 6B : 01 : 32 Note, p. 410 B
Read / Write variables Motor operating mode 2 = 2-wire overload 3 = 3-wire overload 4 = 2-wire independent 5 = 3-wire independent 6 = 2-wire reverser 7 = 3-wire reverser 8 = 2-wire 2-step 9 = 3-wire 2-step 10 = 2-wire 2-speed 11 = 3-wire 2-speed 256-511 = Custom logic program (0-255) Motor transition timeout (s) (Reserved) Controller AC inputs configuration register bits 0-3 Controller AC logic inputs configuration (See DT_DateTime, p. 413) bits 4-15 (Reserved)
541 542-544 545
69 : 01 : 02 69 : 01 : 03 - 6A : 01 : 05 69 : 01 : 06
UInt Word
1639504 05/2008
439
Use Register 546 DeviceNet address 69 : 01 : 07 Variable type UInt Read / Write variables Thermal overload configuration bits 0-2 Motor temperature sensor type: 0 = None 1 = PTC binary 2 = PT100 3 = PTC analog 4 = NTC analog bits 3-4 Thermal overload mode: 0 = Definite 1 = Inverse thermal bit 5 Motor temperature sensor display degree CF 0 = Celsius (default) 1 = Fahrenheit bits 6-15 (Reserved) 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 69 : 01 : 08 6A : 01 : 09 69 : 01 : 0A 69 : 01 : 0B 69 : 01 : 0C 6A : 01 : 0D 69 : 01 : 0E 69 : 01 : 0F 69 : 01 : 10 69 : 01 : 11 69 : 01 : 12 69 : 01 : 13 69 : 01 : 14 UInt UInt UInt UInt Word UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt Thermal overload fault definite timeout (s) (Reserved) Motor temperature sensor fault threshold (x 0.1 ) Motor temperature sensor warning threshold (x 0.1 ) Motor temperature sensor fault threshold degree (C) Motor temperature sensor warning threshold degree (C) Rapid cycle lockout timeout (s) (Reserved) Current phase loss timeout (x 0.1 s) Overcurrent fault timeout (s) Overcurrent fault threshold (% FLC) Overcurrent warning threshold (% FLC) Ground current fault configuration bit 0 Ground current mode bits 1-15 (Reserved) 560 561 562 563 564 565 440 69 : 01 : 15 69 : 01 : 16 69 : 01 : 17 69 : 01 : 18 69 : 01 : 19 69 : 01 : 1A UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt Ground CT primary Ground CT secondary External ground current fault timeout (x 0.01 s) External ground current fault threshold (x 0.01 A) External ground current warning threshold (x 0.01 A) Motor nominal voltage (V) 1 B Note, p. 410 B
1639504 05/2008
Use Register 546 DeviceNet address 69 : 01 : 07 Variable type UInt Read / Write variables Thermal overload configuration bits 0-2 Motor temperature sensor type: 0 = None 1 = PTC binary 2 = PT100 3 = PTC analog 4 = NTC analog bits 3-4 Thermal overload mode: 0 = Definite 1 = Inverse thermal bit 5 Motor temperature sensor display degree CF 0 = Celsius (default) 1 = Fahrenheit bits 6-15 (Reserved) 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 69 : 01 : 08 6A : 01 : 09 69 : 01 : 0A 69 : 01 : 0B 69 : 01 : 0C 6A : 01 : 0D 69 : 01 : 0E 69 : 01 : 0F 69 : 01 : 10 69 : 01 : 11 69 : 01 : 12 69 : 01 : 13 69 : 01 : 14 UInt UInt UInt UInt Word UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt Thermal overload fault definite timeout (s) (Reserved) Motor temperature sensor fault threshold (x 0.1 ) Motor temperature sensor warning threshold (x 0.1 ) Motor temperature sensor fault threshold degree (C) Motor temperature sensor warning threshold degree (C) Rapid cycle lockout timeout (s) (Reserved) Current phase loss timeout (x 0.1 s) Overcurrent fault timeout (s) Overcurrent fault threshold (% FLC) Overcurrent warning threshold (% FLC) Ground current fault configuration bit 0 Ground current mode bits 1-15 (Reserved) 560 561 562 563 564 565 69 : 01 : 15 69 : 01 : 16 69 : 01 : 17 69 : 01 : 18 69 : 01 : 19 69 : 01 : 1A UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt Ground CT primary Ground CT secondary External ground current fault timeout (x 0.01 s) External ground current fault threshold (x 0.01 A) External ground current warning threshold (x 0.01 A) Motor nominal voltage (V) 1 441 B Note, p. 410 B
1639504 05/2008
Use Register 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 DeviceNet address 69 : 01 : 1B 69 : 01 : 1C 69 : 01 : 1D 69 : 01 : 1E 69 : 01 : 1F 69 : 01 : 20 69 : 01 : 21 69 : 01 : 22 69 : 01 : 23 69 : 01 : 24 69 : 01 : 25 69 : 01 : 26 Variable type UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt Word Read / Write variables Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout starting (x 0.1 s) Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout running (x 0.1 s) Voltage phase imbalance fault threshold (% imb) Voltage phase imbalance warning threshold (% imb) Overvoltage fault timeout (x 0.1 s) Overvoltage fault threshold (% Vnom) Overvoltage warning threshold (% Vnom) Undervoltage fault timeout (x 0.1 s) Undervoltage fault threshold (% Vnom) Undervoltage warning threshold (% Vnom) Voltage phase loss fault timeout (x 0.1 s) Voltage dip configuration bit 0 Load shedding enable bit 1 Auto-restart enable bits 2-15 (Reserved) 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 442 69 : 01 : 27 69 : 01 : 28 69 : 01 : 29 69 : 01 : 2A 69 : 01 : 2B 69 : 01 : 2C 69 : 01 : 2D 69 : 01 : 2E 69 : 01 : 2F 69 : 01 : 30 69 : 01 : 31 69 : 01 : 32 69 : 01 : 33 69 : 01 : 34 69 : 01 : 35 69 : 01 : 36 69 : 01 : 37 UInt UInt UInt UInt Ulnt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt Load shedding timeout (s) Voltage dip threshold (% Vnom) Voltage dip restart timeout (s) Voltage dip restart threshold (% Vnom) Auto restart immediate timeout (x 0.1 s) Motor nominal power (x 0.1 kW) Overpower fault timeout (s) Overpower fault threshold (% Pnom) Overpower warning threshold (% Pnom) Underpower fault timeout (s) Underpower fault threshold (% Pnom) Underpower warning threshold (% Pnom) Under power factor fault timeout (x 0.1 s) Under power factor fault threshold (x 0.01 PF) Under power factor warning threshold (x 0.01 PF) Over power factor fault timeout (x 0.1 s) Over power factor fault threshold (x 0.01 PF) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note, p. 410 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1639504 05/2008
Use Register 595 596 597-599 600 601 DeviceNet address 69 : 01 : 38 69 : 01 : 39 69 : 01 : 3A - 69 : 01 : 3C 6A : 01 : 01 6A : 01 : 02 Ulnt Word Variable type UInt UInt Read / Write variables Over power factor warning threshold (x 0.01 PF) Auto restart delayed timeout (s) (Reserved) HMI keypad password General configuration register 1 bit 0 Controller system config required: 0 = exit the configuration menu 1 = go to the configuration menu bits 1-7 (Reserved) Control mode configuration, bits 8-10 (one bit is set to 1): bit 8 Config via HMI keypad enable bit 9 Config via HMI engineering tool enable bit 10 Config via network port enable bit 11 Motor star-delta bit 12 Motor phases sequence: 0=ABC 1=ACB bits 13-14 Motor phases (See DT_Phase Number, p. 418) bit 15 Motor auxiliary fan cooled (default = 0) 602 6A : 01 : 03 Word General configuration register 2 bits 0-2 Fault reset mode (See p. 418) bit 3 HMI port parity setting: 0 = none 1 = even (default) bits 4-8 (Reserved) bit 9 HMI port endian setting bit 10 Network port endian setting bit 11 HMI motor status LED color bits 12-15 (Reserved) 603 604 605 606 607
1639504 05/2008
Note, p. 410 1
6A : 01 : 04 6A : 01 : 05 6A : 01 : 06 6A : 01 : 07 6A : 01 : 08
Ulnt Ulnt Ulnt
HMI port address setting HMI port baud rate setting (bps) (Reserved) Motor trip class (s) (Reserved) 443
Use Register 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 DeviceNet address 6A : 01 : 09 6A : 01 : 0A 6A : 01 : 0B 6A : 01 : 0C 6A : 01 : 0D 6A : 01 : 0E 6A : 01 : 0F 6A : 01 : 10 6A : 01 : 11 6A : 01 : 12 6A : 01 : 13 6A : 01 : 14 6A : 01 : 15 6A : 01 : 16 6A : 01 : 17 6A : 01 : 18 6A : 01 : 19 6A : 01 : 1A 6A : 01 : 1B UInt Variable type Ulnt Ulnt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt Read / Write variables Thermal overload fault reset threshold (% trip level) Thermal overload warning threshold (% trip level) Internal ground current fault timeout (x 0.1 s) Internal ground current fault threshold (% FLCmin) Internal ground current warning threshold (% FLCmin) Current phase imbalance fault timeout starting (x 0.1 s) Current phase imbalance fault timeout running (x 0.1 s) Current phase imbalance fault threshold (% imb) Current phase imbalance warning threshold (% imb) Jam fault timeout (s) Jam fault threshold (% FLC) Jam warning threshold (% FLC) Undercurrent fault timeout (s) Undercurrent fault threshold (% FLC) Undercurrent warning threshold (% FLC) Long start fault timeout (s) Long start fault threshold (% FLC) (Reserved) HMI display contrast setting bits 0-7 HMI display contrast setting HMI display brightness setting 627 628 629 630 6A : 01 : 1C 6A : 01 : 1D 6A : 01 : 1E 6A : 01 : 1F UInt UInt UInt UInt Contactor rating (0.1 A) Load CT primary Load CT secondary Load CT multiple passes (passes) B B B Note, p. 410
444
1639504 05/2008
Use Register 631 DeviceNet address 6A : 01 : 20 Variable type Word Read / Write variables Fault enable register 1 bits 0-1 (Reserved) bit 2 Ground current fault enable bit 3 Thermal overload fault enable bit 4 Long start fault enable bit 5 Jam fault enable bit 6 Current phase imbalance fault enable bit 7 Undercurrent fault enable bit 8 (Reserved) bit 9 Test fault enable 0 = disable 1 = enable (default) bit 10 HMI port fault enable bits 11-14 (Reserved) bit 15 Network port fault enable 632 6A : 01 : 21 Word Warning enable register 1 bit 0 (Not significant) bit 1 (Reserved) bit 2 Ground current warning enable bit 3 Thermal overload warning enable bit 4 (Reserved) bit 5 Jam warning enable bit 6 Current phase imbalance warning enable bit 7 Undercurrent warning enable bits 8-9 (Reserved) bit 10 HMI port warning enable bit 11 Controller internal temperature warning enable bits 12-14 (Reserved) bit 15 Network port warning enable Note, p. 410
1639504 05/2008
445
Use Register 633 DeviceNet address 6A : 01 : 22 Variable type Word Read / Write variables Fault enable register 2 bit 0 (Reserved) bit 1 Diagnostic fault enable bit 2 Wiring fault enable bit 3 Overcurrent fault enable bit 4 Current phase loss fault enable bit 5 Current phase reversal fault enable bit 6 Motor temperature sensor fault enable bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance fault enable bit 8 Voltage phase loss fault enable bit 9 Voltage phase reversal fault enable bit 10 Undervoltage fault enable bit 11 Overvoltage fault enable bit 12 Underpower fault enable bit 13 Overpower fault enable bit 14 Under power factor fault enable bit 15 Over power factor fault enable 634 6A : 01 : 23 Word Warning enable register 2 bit 0 (Reserved) bit 1 Diagnostic warning enable bit 2 (Reserved) bit 3 Overcurrent warning enable bit 4 Current phase loss warning enable bit 5 (Reserved) bit 6 Motor temperature sensor warning enable bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance warning enable bit 8 Voltage phase loss warning enable bit 9 (Reserved) bit 10 Undervoltage warning enable bit 11 Overvoltage warning enable bit 12 Underpower warning enable bit 13 Overpower warning enable bit 14 Under power factor warning enable bit 15 Over power factor warning enable 635-6 637 6A : 01 : 24 - 6A : 01 : 25 6A : 01 : 26 UInt (Reserved) Auto-reset attempts group 1 setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note, p. 410
446
1639504 05/2008
Use Register 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646-649 650 DeviceNet address 6A : 01 : 27 6A : 01 : 28 6A : 01 : 29 6A : 01 : 2A 6A : 01 : 2B 6A : 01 : 2C 6A : 01 : 2D 6A : 01 : 2E 6A : 01 : 2F - 6A : 01 : 32 6B : 01 : 01 Word Variable type UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt UInt Read / Write variables Auto-reset group 1 timeout Auto-reset attempts group 2 setting Auto-reset group 2 timeout Auto-reset attempts group 3 setting Auto-reset group 3 timeout Motor step 1 to 2 timeout Motor step 1 to 2 threshold HMI port fallback setting (See p. 418) (Reserved) HMI language setting register: bit 0-4 HMI language setting (See p. 417) bits 5-15 (Not significant) 651 6B : 01 : 02 Word HMI display items register 1 bit 0 HMI display average current enable bit 1 HMI display thermal capacity level enable bit 2 HMI display L1 current enable bit 3 HMI display L2 current enable bit 4 HMI display L3 current enable bit 5 HMI display ground current enable bit 6 HMI display motor status enable bit 7 HMI display current phase imbalance enable bit 8 HMI display operating time enable bit 9 HMI display I/O status enable bit 10 HMI display reactive power enable bit 11 HMI display frequency enable bit 12 HMI display starts per hour enable bit 13 HMI display control channel enable bit 14 HMI display start statistics enable bit 15 HMI motor temperature sensor enable 652 653 6B : 01 : 03 6B : 01 : 04 Ulnt Ulnt Motor full load current ratio, FLC1 (% FLCmax) Motor high speed full load current ratio, FLC2 (% FLCmax) Note, p. 410
1639504 05/2008
447
Use Register 654 DeviceNet address 6B : 01 : 05 Variable type Word Read / Write variables HMI display items register 2 bit 0 HMI display L1-L2 voltage enable bit 1 HMI display L2-L3 voltage enable bit 2 HMI display L3-L1 voltage enable bit 3 HMI display average voltage enable bit 4 HMI display active power enable bit 5 HMI display power consumption enable bit 6 HMI display power factor enable bit 7 HMI display average current ratio enable bit 8 HMI display L1 current ratio enable bit 9 HMI display L2 current ratio enable bit 10 HMI display L3 current ratio enable bit 11 HMI display thermal capacity remaining enable bit 12 HMI display time to trip enable bit 13 HMI display voltage phase imbalance enable bit 14 HMI display date enable bit 15 HMI display time enable 655-658 659 6B : 01 : 06 - 6B : 01 : 09 Word[4] 6B : 01 : 0A Word[4] Date and time setting (See p. 413) HMI display items register 3 bit 0 HMI display temperature sensor degree CF bits 1-15 (Reserved) 660-681 682 6B : 01 : 0B - 6B : 01 : 20 6B : 01 : 21 Ulnt (Reserved) Network port fallback setting (See p. 418) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note, p. 410
448
1639504 05/2008
Use Register 683 DeviceNet address 6B : 01 : 22 Variable type Ulnt Read / Write variables Control setting register bits 0-1 (Reserved) bits 2-3 Control remote local default mode 0 = remote 1 = local bit 4 Control remote local buttons enable 0 = disable 1 = enable bits 5-6 Control remote channel setting 0 = network 1 = terminal strip 2 = HMI bit 7 (Reserved) bit 8 Control local channel setting 0 = terminal strip 1 = HMI bit 9 Control direct transition 0 = stop required during transition 1 = stop not required during transition bit 10 Control transfer mode 0 = bump 1 = bumpless bit 11 Stop terminal strip disable 0 = enable 1 = disable bit 12 Stop HMI disable 0 = enable 1 = disable bits 13-15 (Reserved) 684-689 690-694 695 696 697-699 6B : 01 : 23 - 6B : 01 : 28 6B : 01 : 29 - 6B : 01 : 2D 6B : 01 : 2E 6B : 01 : 2F 6B : 01 : 30 - 6B : 01 : 32 Ulnt Ulnt (Forbidden) (Reserved) Network port baud rate setting (bps) (See DT_ExtBaudRate, p. 415) Network port address setting (Not significant) Note, p. 410
1639504 05/2008
449
Use
Command Variables
Command Variables
Register 700 6C : 01 : 01
Command variables are described below:

Variable type Word Read / Write variables Logic outputs command register bit 0 Logic output 1 command bit 1 Logic output 2 command bit 2 Logic output 3 command bit 3 Logic output 4 command bit 4 Logic output 5 command bit 5 Logic output 6 command bit 6 Logic output 7 command bit 7 Logic output 8 command bits 8-15 (Reserved) 1 1 1 1 Note, p. 410
DeviceNet address
701-703 704
6C : 01 : 02 - 6C : 01 : 04 6C : 01 : 05 Word
(Reserved) Control register 1 bit 0 Motor run forward command bit 1 Motor run reverse command bit 2 (Reserved) bit 3 Fault reset command bit 4 (Reserved) bit 5 Self test command bit 6 Motor low speed command bits 7-15 (Reserved)
705
6C : 01 : 06
Word
Control register 2 bit 0 Clear all command bit 1 Clear statistics command bit 2 Clear thermal capacity level command bit 3 Clear controller settings command bit 4 Clear network port settings command bits 5-15 (Reserved)
706-709 710-799
6C : 01 : 07 - 6C : 01 : 0A 6C : 01 : 08 - 6C : 01 : 64
(Reserved) (Forbidden)
450
1639504 05/2008
Use
Custom Logic Variables

Custom Logic Variables
Register 1200
Custom logic variables are described below:

Variable type Word Read-only variables Custom logic status register bit 0 Custom logic run bit 1 Custom logic stop bit 2 Custom logic reset bit 3 (Reserved) bit 4 Custom logic transition bit 5 Custom logic phase reverse bit 6 Custom logic network control bit 7 Custom logic FLC selection bit 8 Custom logic external fault bit 9 Custom logic auxiliary 1 LED bit 10 Custom logic auxiliary 2 LED bit 11 Custom logic stop LED bit 12 Custom logic LO1 bit 13 Custom logic LO2 bit 14 Custom logic LO3 bit 15 Custom logic LO4 Note, p. 410
1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206-1249
71 : 01 : 02 71 : 01 : 03 71 : 01 : 04 71 : 01 : 05 71 : 01 : 06 71 : 01 : 0C - 71 : 01 : 32
Word Word Word Word Word
Custom logic version Custom logic memory space Custom logic memory used Custom logic temporary space Custom logic non volatile space (Reserved)
1639504 05/2008
451
Use
Register 1250
Variable type Word
Read-Write variables Custom logic setting register 1 bit 0 (Reserved) bit 1 Logic input 3 external ready enable bits 2-15 (Reserved)
Note, p. 410
1251-1269 1270
71 : 01 : 34 - 71 : 01 : 46 71 : 01 : 47 Word
(Reserved) Custom logic command register 1 bit 0 Custom logic external fault command bits 1-15 (Reserved)
1271-1279 Register 1280
71 : 01 : 48 - 71 : 01 : 50 DeviceNet address 71 : 01 : 51 Variable type Word
(Reserved) Read-only variables Custom logic monitoring register 1 bit 0 Custom logic external fault bit 1 Custom logic system ready bits 2-15 (Reserved) Note, p. 410
1281-1300 Register 1301-1399
71 : 01 : 52 - 71 : 01 : 65 DeviceNet address 71 : 01 : 66 - 71 : 01 : C8 Variable type Word[99]
(Reserved) Read-Write variables General purpose registers for logic functions Note, p. 410
452
1639504 05/2008
Maintenance
At a Glance
Overview This chapter describes the maintenance and self-diagnostic features of the LTM R controller and the expansion module.
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems. Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program, install, alter, and apply this product. Follow all local and national safety codes and standards. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic Detecting Problems Troubleshooting Preventive Maintenance Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module Communication Warnings and Faults Page 454 455 457 460 461
1639504 05/2008
453
Maintenance
Detecting Problems
Overview The LTM R controller and the expansion module perform self-diagnostic checks at power-up and during operation. Problems with either the LTM R controller or expansion module can be detected using: Power and Alarm LEDs on the LTM R controller Power and Input LEDs on the expansion module LCD Display on either a Magelis XBTN410 HMI device or a TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit connected to the LTM R controllers HMI port PowerSuite software running on a PC connected to the LTM R controllers HMI port Device LEDs The LEDs on the LTM R controller and expansion module will indicate the following problems:
LTM R LED Power Off On On On On Alarm Solid red Solid red Flashing red (2x per second) Flashing red (5x per second) PLC Alarm LTM E LED Power Solid red Internal fault Protection fault Protection warning Load shed or rapid cycle Internal fault Problem
Magelis XBT HMI Device
The Magelis XBTN410 HMI automatically displays information about a fault or warning, including LTM R controller self-diagnostic faults and warnings, when it occurs. For information about the display of faults and warnings when the HMI is used in a 1-to-1 configuration, see p. 314. For information about the display of faults and warnings when the HMI is used in a 1-to-many configuration, see p. 348.
LTM CU Control Operator Unit
The TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit automatically displays information about a fault or warning. For more information, see Faults and Warnings Display in TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit Users Manual.
PowerSuite
PowerSuite software displays a visual array of active faults and warnings, including LTM R controller self-diagnostic faults and warnings, when these faults occur. For information about this display of active faults and warnings, see p. 360.
454
1639504 05/2008
Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Self-Diagnostic Tests
Type Major internal faults Error Internal temperature fault
The LTM R controller performs self-diagnostic tests at power-up and during operation. These tests, the errors they detect, and the steps to take in response to a problem are described below:
Action This fault indicates a warning at 80C, a minor fault at 85C, and a major fault at 100C. Take steps to reduce ambient temperature, including: add an auxiliary cooling fan remount the LTM R controller and expansion module to provide more surrounding free space. If the condition persists: 1 Cycle power. 2 Wait 30 s. 3 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.
CPU failure Program checksum error RAM test error Stack overflow Stack underflow Watchdog timeout Minor internal faults Configuration checksum (EEROM) error
These faults indicate a hardware failure. Take the following steps: 1 Cycle power. 2 Wait 30 s. 3 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.
Invalid configuration error Indicates either a bad checksum (Config checksum error) or good checksum but bad data (Invalid config error). Both caused by hardware failure. Take the following steps: 1 Cycle power and wait 30 s. 2 Reset the configuration settings to factory settings. 3 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller. These faults indicate a hardware failure. Take the following steps: 1 Cycle power and wait 30 s. 2 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller. Check the following: relay outputs all wiring, including: control wiring circuit, including all electromechanical devices power wiring circuit, including all components load CT wiring. After all checks are complete: 1 Reset the fault. 2 If the fault persists, cycle power and wait 30 s. 3 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.
Internal network communications failure A/D out of range error Diagnostic errors Start command check Stop command check Stop check back Run check back
1639504 05/2008
455
Maintenance
Type Wiring/ config errors
Error CT reversal error
Action Correct the polarity of the CTs. Be sure that: all external CTs face the same direction all load CT wiring passes through windows in the same direction After the check is complete: 1 Perform a fault reset. 2 If the fault persists, cycle power and wait 30 s. 3 If the fault still persists, replace the LTM R controller.
Current/Voltage phase reversal error Phase configuration error
Check: L1, L2 and L3 wiring connection to be sure wires are not crossed Motor Phases Sequence parameter setting (ABC versus ACB) After all checks are complete: 1 Perform a fault reset. 2 If the fault persists, cycle power and wait 30 s. 3 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.
PTC connection error
Check for: short circuit or open circuit in the motor temp sensor wiring wrong type of motor temp sensing device improper configuration of parameters for selected device. After all checks are complete: 1 Perform a fault reset. 2 If the fault persists, cycle power and wait 30 s. 3 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.
Voltage phase loss error
Check for: improper wiring, such as loose terminations blown fuse cut wire single-phase motor configured for 3-phase operation failure to wire a single phase motor through both A and C load CT windows failure of power source (for example, utility power failure). After all checks are complete: 1 Perform fault reset. 2 If the fault persists, cycle power and wait 30 s. 3 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.
456
1639504 05/2008
Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance
Overview The following protective measures should be performed between major system checks, to help maintain your system and protect it against irrecoverable hardware or software failure: continuously review operating statistics save LTM R controller parameter configuration settings to a backup file maintain the LTM R controllers operating environment periodically perform a LTM R controller self test check the LTM R controller internal clock to ensure accuracy. Statistics The LTM R controller collects the following types of information: real-time voltage, current, power, temperature, I/O and fault data a count of the number of faults, by fault type, that occurred since last power-up a time-stamped history of the state of the LTM R controllerdisplaying measures of voltage, current, power, and temperatureat the moment that each of the previous 5 faults occurred. Use either PowerSuite software, a Magelis XBTN410 HMI, or a TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit to access and review these statistics. Analyze this information to determine whether the actual record of operations indicates a problem. Configuration Settings In the event of irrecoverable LTM R controller failure, you can quickly restore configuration settings if you saved these settings to a file. When the LTM R controller is first configuredand every subsequent time any configuration settings are changeduse PowerSuite software to save the parameter settings to a file. To save a configuration file: Select File Print To File. To restore the saved configuration file: 1. Open the saved file: Select File Open (then navigate to and open the file.) 2. Download the configuration to the new controller: 3. Select Link Transfer Device to PC. Environment Like any other electronic device, the LTM R controller is affected by its physical environment. Provide a friendly environment by taking common-sense preventive measures, including: Scheduling periodic examinations of battery packs, fuses, power strips, batteries, surge suppressors, and power supplies. Keeping the LTM R controller, the panel, and all devices clean. An unobstructed flow of air will prevent dust build-up, which can lead to a short-circuit condition. Remaining alert to the possibility of other equipment producing electromagnetic radiation. Be sure no other devices cause electromagnetic interference with the LTM R controller.
1639504 05/2008
457
Maintenance
Self Test with Motor Off
Perform a self test by either: holding down the Test/Reset button on the face of the LTM R controller for more than 3 seconds and up to 15 seconds, or setting the Self Test Command parameter. A self test can be performed only if: no faults exist the Test Fault Enable parameter is set (default). The LTM R controller performs the following checks during a self test: watchdog check RAM check During the self-test sequence, the LTM R controller calibrates the thermal memory time constant, which keeps track of time while it is not powered. If any of the above tests fails, a minor internal fault occurs. If not, the self test continues and the LTM R controller performs: LTM E expansion module test (if it is connected to an expansion module). If this test fails, the LTM R controller experiences a minor internal fault. internal communication test. If this test fails, the LTM R controller experiences a minor internal fault LED test: turns all LEDs off, then turns each LED on in sequence: HMI communication activity LED Power LED Fallback LED PLC communication activity LED At the end of the test, all LEDs return to their initial state. output relay test: opens all relays, and restores them to their original state only after a reset command executes, or power is cycled. If current is measured during the relay self test, the LTM R controller experiences a minor internal fault. During the LTM R self test, a "self test" string displays on the HMI device. During a self test, the LTM R controller sets the Self Test Command parameter to 1. When the self test finishes, this parameter is reset to 0.
458
1639504 05/2008
Maintenance
Self Test with Motor On
Perform a self test by either: the Test/Reset button on the face of the LTM R controller, or Menus command from the HMI connected to the RJ45 port. PowerSuite software PLC. When the motor is On, performing a self test simulates a thermal fault, in order to check if the default relay is working correctly. It triggers a Thermal Overload fault. During a self test, the LTM R controller sets the Self Test Command parameter to 1. When the self test finishes, this parameter is reset to 0.
Internal Clock
To ensure an accurate record of faults, be sure to maintain the LTM R controllers internal clock. The LTM R controller time stamps all faults, using the value stored in the Date And Time Setting parameter. Internal clock accuracy is +/-1 second per hour. If power is continuously applied for 1 year, the internal clock accuracy is +/-30 minutes per year. If power is turned Off for 30 minutes or less, the LTM R controller retains its internal clock settings, with accuracy of +/- 2 minutes. If power is turned Off for more than 30 minutes, the LTM R controller resets its internal clock to the time when power was turned Off.
1639504 05/2008
459
Maintenance
Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module

Overview Questions to consider in advance of replacing either an LTM R controller or an LTM E expansion module are: is the replacement device the same model as the original? have the configuration settings of the LTM R controller been saved, and are they available to be transferred to its replacement? Be sure the motor is turned off before replacing either the LTM R controller or the LTM E expansion module. Replacing the LTM R Controller The time to plan for the replacement of an LTM R controller is: when the LTM R controller settings are initially configured, and any time that one or more of its settings are subsequently re-configured Because setting values may not be accessible when the LTM R controller is replacedfor example, in case of device failureyou should create a record of setting values whenever they are made. Using PowerSuite software, all of the LTM R controllers configured settings except for date and timecan be saved to a file. Once saved, you can use PowerSuite software to transfer these settings either to the original LTM R controller or to its replacement. Note: Only configured settings are saved. Historical statistical data is not saved, and therefore cannot be applied to a replacement LTM R controller. For information on how to use PowerSuite software to create, save and transfer configuration setting files, see p. 354. Replacing the Expansion Module Retiring Devices The primary consideration in replacing an LTM E expansion module, is to replace it with the same model24Vdc or 110-240Vacas the original.
Both the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module contain electronic boards that require particular treatment at the end of their useful life. When retiring a device be sure to observe all applicable laws, regulations and practices.
460
1639504 05/2008
Maintenance
Communication Warnings and Faults

Introduction Communication warnings and faults are managed in a standard way, like any other types of warnings and faults. The presence of a fault is signalled by various indicators: State of the LEDs (1 LED is dedicated to communication: MNS, see DeviceNet Communication Checking, p. 259) State of the output relays Warning Message(s) displayed on HMI screen Presence of an exception code (such as a report from the PLC) PLC Communication Loss A communication loss is managed like any other fault. The LTM R controller monitors the communication with the PLC. Using an adjustable network idle time (timeout), the LTM R controller watchdog function can report a network loss (firmware watchdog). In the event of a network loss, the LTM R controller can be configured to take certain actions. These depend on the control mode that the LTM R controller was operating in prior to the network loss. If PLC-LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is in network control mode, the LTM R controller enters the fallback state. If PLC- LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is in local control mode, and then the control mode is changed to network control, the LTM R controller enters the fallback state. If PLC-LTM R controller communication is restored while the control mode is set to network control, the LTM R controller exits the fallback state. If the control mode is changed to local control, the LTM R exits from the fallback state, regardless of the state of PLC-controller communications. The table below defines the available actions that the LTM R controller may take during a communication loss that the user may select when configuring the LTM R controller.
1639504 05/2008
461
Maintenance
Network Communication Loss Actions:

LTM R controller output control mode prior to network loss Local Terminal Strip Available LTM R actions after PLC - LTM R controller network loss Fault and Warning control possibilities: - Signal nothing - Activate a warning - Activate a fault - Activate a fault and warning Fault and Warning control possibilities: - Signal nothing - Activate a warning - Activate a fault - Activate a fault and warning Fault and Warning control possibilities: - Signal nothing - Activate a warning - Activate a fault - Activate a fault and warning - The behavior of the LO1 and LO2 relays depends on the motor controller mode and on the fallback strategy chosen
Local RJ45
Remote
HMI Communication Loss
The LTM R controller monitors the communication with any approved HMI device. Using a fixed network idle time (timeout), the LTM R controller watchdog function can report a network loss. In the event of a communication loss, the LTM R controller can be configured to take certain actions. These depend on the control mode that the LTM R controller was operating in prior to the communication loss. If HMI-controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is in Local RJ45 control mode, the LTM R controller enters the fallback state. If HMI-LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is not in Local RJ45 control mode, and then the control mode is changed to Local RJ45 control, the LTM R controller enters the fallback state. If HMI-controller communication is restored while the control mode is set to Local RJ45 control, the LTM R exits from the fallback state. If the control mode is changed to Local Terminal Strip or Network control, the LTM R exits from the fallback state, regardless of the state of HMI-controller communications. The table below defines the available actions that the LTM R controller may take during a communication loss. Select one of these actions when configuring the LTM R controller.
462
1639504 05/2008
Maintenance
Local RJ45 Communication Loss Actions:

LTM R controller output control mode prior to network loss Local Terminal Strip Available LTM R controller actions after HMI - LTM R controller network loss Fault and Warning control possibilities: - Signal nothing - Activate a warning - Activate a fault - Activate a fault and warning Fault and Warning control possibilities: - Signal nothing - Activate a warning - Activate a fault - Activate a fault and warning Fault and Warning control possibilities: - Signal nothing - Activate a warning - Activate a fault - Activate a fault and warning - The behavior of the LO1 and LO2 relays depends on the motor controller mode and on the fallback strategy chosen
Local RJ45
Remote
Note: For details about the communication loss and the fallback strategy to follow, see p. 59.
1639504 05/2008
463
Maintenance
464
1639504 05/2008
Appendices
At a Glance
What's in this Appendix?
The appendix contains the following chapters:

Chapter A B C Chapter Name Technical Data Configurable Parameters Wiring Diagrams Page 467 477 495
1639504 05/2008
465
Appendices
466
1639504 05/2008
Technical Data
At a Glance
Overview This appendix presents technical data related to the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module. This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller Technical Specifications of the LTM E Expansion Module Characteristics of the Metering and Monitoring Functions Page 468 472 475
1639504 05/2008
467
Technical Data
Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller

Technical Specifications
Certification1 Conformity to Standards European community directives Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
The LTM R controller meets the following specifications:

UL, CSA, CE, CTICK, CCC, NOM, GOST, IACS E10 (BV, LROS, DNV, GL, RINA, ABS, RMRos), ATEX IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA C22.2 no.14, IACS E10 CE marking, satisfies the essential requirements of the low voltage (LV) machinery and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) directives. According to IEC/EN 60947-1 overvoltage category III, degree of pollution: 3 220 V power, input and output circuits 24 V power, input and output circuits communication circuits PTC and GF circuits 690 V 690 V 4.8 kV 0.91 kV 0.91 kV 0.91 kV 100 kA IP20 "TH" Cycle humidity Salt spray 12 cycles 48 hr -40+80 C (-40176 F) -20+60 C (-4140 F) 4,500 m (14,763 ft) (2,000 m (6,561 ft)
According to UL508, CSA C22-2 no. 14 According to IEC60947-1 8.3.3.4.1 paragraph 2
Withstand to shortcircuit Degree of protection Protective treatment
According to IEC60947-4-1 According to 60947-1 (protection against direct contact) IEC/EN 60068 IEC/EN 60068-2-30 IEC/EN 60068-2-11
Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude
Storage Operation Derating accepted without derating
1. Some certifications are in progress. 2. Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction. 3. NOTICE: This product has been designed for use in environment A. Use of this product in environment B may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbance, which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures.
468
1639504 05/2008
Technical Data Fire resistance According to UL 94 According to IEC 695-2-1 (Parts supporting live components) (other components) Half-sine mechanical shock pulse = 11 ms Resistance to vibration According to CEI 60068-2-272 According to CEI 60068-2-62 Panel mounted DIN rail mounted Through air Over surface V2 960 C (1,760 F) 650 C (1,202 F) 15 gn 4 gn 1 gn 8 kV level 3 6 kV level 3 10 V/m level 3 On power lines and relay outputs all other circuits Immunity to radioelectric fields Surge immunity According to EN61000-4-63 Common mode 4 kV (12 /9 F) 1 kV (12 /9 F) 2 kV (12 /9 F) 2 kV (12 /18 F) 1 kV (42 /0.5 F) 4 kV level 4 2 kV level 3 10 V rms level 3 Differential mode 2 kV (2 /18 F) 0.5 kV (2 /18 F) 1 kV (2 /18 F) 0.5 kV (42 /0.5 F)
Immunity to According to EN61000-4-2 electrostatic discharge Immunity to radiated fields Immunity to fast transient bursts According toEN61000-4-3 According to EN61000-4-4
According to IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Power lines and relay outputs 24 Vdc inputs and power 100-240 Vac inputs and power Communication Temperature sensor (IT1/IT2)
1. Some certifications are in progress. 2. Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction. 3. NOTICE: This product has been designed for use in environment A. Use of this product in environment B may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbance, which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures.
1639504 05/2008
469
Technical Data
Control Voltage Characteristics

Control Voltage Power consumption Control voltage range Overcurrent protection
The LTM R controller has the following control voltage characteristics:

24 Vdc According to IEC/EN 60947-1 According to IEC/EN 60947-1 56...127 mA 20.4...26.4 Vdc 24 V fuse 0.5 A gG 3 ms According to IEC/EN 61000-4-11 70% of UC min. for 500 ms 100-240 Vac 8...62.8 mA 93.5...264 Vac 100-240 V fuse 0.5 A gG 3 ms 70% of UC min. for 500 ms
Resistance to Microbreaks Resistance to voltage dips
Logic Inputs Characteristics

Nominal input values Voltage Current Input limit values At state 1 Voltage Current At state 0 Response time IEC 1131-1 conformity Type of Input Change to state 1 Change to state 0 Voltage Current 24 Vdc 7 mA 15 V maximum 2 mA min to 15 mA max. 5 V maximum 15 mA maximum 15 ms 5 ms Type 1 Resistive 100-240 Vac 3.1 mA at 100Vac 7.5 mA at 240 Vac 79 V < V < 264 V 2 mA min. at 110 Vac to 3 mA min. at 220 Vac 0V < V < 40 V 15 mA maximum 25 ms 25 ms Type 1 Capacitive
470
1639504 05/2008
Technical Data
Logic Outputs Characteristics
Rated insulation voltage AC rated thermal load DC rated thermal load AC 15 rating DC 13 rating Associated fuse protection Maximum operating rate Maximum frequency Response time closing Response time opening Contact rating
300 V 250 Vac / 5 A 30 Vdc / 5 A 480 VA, 500,000 operations, Ie max = 2 A 30 W, 500,000 operations, Ie max = 1.25 A gG at 4 A 1800 cycles / hr 2 Hz (2 cycles / s) < 10 ms < 10 ms B300
Altitude Derating
The following table provides the deratings to apply for dielectric strengths and maximum operating temperature according to altitude.
2,000 m (6,561.68 ft) 1 1 3,000 m (9,842.52 ft) 0.93 0.93 3,500 m (11,482.94 ft) 0.87 0.92 4,000 m (13,123.36 ft) 0.8 0.9 4,500 m (14,763.78 ft) 0.7 0.88
Corrective factors for altitude Dielectric Strength Ui Max. Operating Temperature
1639504 05/2008
471
Technical Data
Technical Specifications of the LTM E Expansion Module

Technical Specifications
Certifications1 Conformity to Standards European community directives Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
The LTM E expansion module meets the following specifications:

UL, CSA, CE, CTICK, CCC, NOM, GOST, IACS E10 (BV, LROS, DNV, GL, RINA, ABS, RMRos), ATEX IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL 508 - CSA C22-2, IACSE10 CE marking. Satisfies the essential requirements of the low voltage (LV) machinery and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) directives. According to IEC/EN 60947-1 overvoltage category III, degree of pollution: 3 220 V inputs circuits 24 V inputs circuits communication circuits voltage input circuits According to 60947-1 (protection against direct contact) IEC/EN 60068 IEC/EN 60068-2-30 IEC/EN 60068-2-11 Cycle Humidity Salt spray >40 mm (1.57 inches) spacing <40mm (1.57 inches) but >9 mm (0.35 inches) spacing <9 mm (0.35 inches) spacing 690 V UI on voltage inputs 690 V UI on voltage inputs 4.8 kV 0.91 kV 0.91 kV 7.3 kV IP20 "TH" 12 Cycles 48 hr -40+80 C (-40176 F) -20+60 C (-4140 F) -20+55 C (-4131 F)
According to UL508, CSA C22-2 no. 14 According to IEC60947-1 8.3.3.4.1 Paragraph 2
Degree of protection Protective treatment
Ambient air temperature around the device
Storage Operation2
-20+45 C (-4113 F) 4500 m (14763 ft) 2000 m (6561 ft)
Maximum operating altitude
derating are accepted without derating
1. Some certifications are in progress. 2. The maximum rated ambient temperature of the LTM E expansion module depends on the installation spacing with the LTM R controller. 3. Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction. 4. NOTICE: This product has been designed for use in environment A. Use of this product in environment B may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbance, which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures. 472
1639504 05/2008
Technical Data Fire resistance According to UL 94 According to IEC 695-2-1 (Parts supporting live components) (other components) Half-sine mechanical shock pulse = 11 ms Resistance to vibration According to CEI 60068-2-273 According to CEI 60068-2-63 Through air Over surface V2 960 C (1760 F) 650 C (1202 F) 30 g 3 axis and 6 directions 5 gn 8 kV Level 3 6 kV Level 3 10V/m Level 3 All circuits 4 kV Level 4 2 kV on all other circuits 10 V rms Level 3 Common mode 4 kV (12 ) 1 kV (12 ) 1 kV (12 ) Differential mode 2 kV (2 ) 0.5 kV (2 )
Immunity to According to EN61000-4-2 electrostatic discharge Immunity to radiated fields Immunity to fast transient bursts Immunity to radioelectric fields Surge Immunity According toEN61000-4-3 According to EN61000-4-4 According to EN61000-4-64 According to IEC/EN 61000-4-5 100-240 Vac inputs 24 V dc inputs Communication
1. Some certifications are in progress. 2. The maximum rated ambient temperature of the LTM E expansion module depends on the installation spacing with the LTM R controller. 3. Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction. 4. NOTICE: This product has been designed for use in environment A. Use of this product in environment B may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbance, which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures.
1639504 05/2008
473
Technical Data
Logic Inputs Characteristics

Control voltage Nominal input values Voltage Current Input limit values At state 1 Voltage Current At state 0 Response time IEC 1131-1 conformity Type of Input Change to state 1 Change to state 0 Voltage Current 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 7 mA 15 V maximum 2 mA min to 15 mA max. 5 V maximum 15 mA maximum 15 ms (input only) 5 ms (input only) Type 1 Resistive 115-230 Vac 100-240 Vac 3.1 mA at 100Vac 7.5 mA at 240 Vac 79 V < V < 264 V 2 mA min. at 110 Vac to 3 mA min. at 220 Vac 0V < V < 40 V 15 mA maximum 25 ms (input only) 25 ms (input only) Type 1 Capacitive
Altitude Derating
The following table provides the deratings to apply for dielectric strengths and maximum operating temperature according to altitude.
2000 m (6561.68 ft) 1 1 3000 m (9842.52 ft) 0.93 0.93 3500 m (11482.94 ft) 0.87 0.92 4000 m (13123.36 ft) 0.8 0.9 4500 m (14763.78 ft) 0.7 0.88
Corrective factors for altitude Dielectric Strength Ui Max. Operating Temperature
474
1639504 05/2008
Technical Data
Characteristics of the Metering and Monitoring Functions

Measurement
Parameter L1 current (A) L2 current (A) L3 current (A) L1 current ratio (% FLC) L2 current ratio (% FLC) L3 current ratio (% FLC) Ground current ratio (% FLCmin) Accuracy1 +/- 1 % for 8 A and 27 A models +/- 2 % for 100 A models Value saved on power loss No
Internal ground current: +/- 10 to 20 % for ground current greater than: 0.1 A on 8 A models 0.2 A on 27 A models 0.3 A on 100 A models External ground current: greater of +/- 5 % or +/0.01 A +/- 1 % for 8 A and 27 A models +/- 2 % for 100 A models +/- 1.5 % for 8 A and 27 A models +/- 3 % for 100 A models +/- 1 % +/- 10 % +/- 1 % +/- 2 % +/- 4 % +/- 2 % +/- 1 %
No
Average current (A) Average current ratio (% FLCmin) Current phase imbalance (% imb) Thermal capacity level (% trip level) Time to trip (s) Minimum wait time (s) Motor temperature sensor () Controller internal temperature (C) Frequency (Hz) L1-L2 voltage (V) L2-L3 voltage (V) L3-L1 voltage (V) Voltage phase imbalance (% imb) Average voltage (V) Power factor (cos ) Active power (kW) Reactive power (kVAR) Active power consumption (kWh)
No No No No No No No No No
+/- 1.5 % +/- 1 % +/- 3 % +/- 5 % +/- 5 % +/- 5 %
No No No No No No No
Reactive power consumption (kVARh) +/- 5 %
1.. Note: The accuracy levels presented in this table are typical accuracy levels. Actual accuracy levels may be lower or greater than these values.
1639504 05/2008
475
Technical Data
Motor History
Parameter Accuracy Value saved on power loss Yes
Motor starts count Motor LO1 closings count Motor LO2 closings count Motor starts per hour count Load sheddings count Motor last start current ratio (% FLC) Motor last start duration (s) Operating time (s) Controller internal temperature max (C)
+/- 1
+ 0/- 5 mn +/- 1
Yes Yes
+/- 1 % for 8 A and 27 A models Yes +/- 2 % for 100 A models +/- 1 % +/- 4 C No No No
476
1639504 05/2008
Configurable Parameters
At a Glance
Overview The configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module are described below. The sequence of parameter configuration depends on the configuration tool utilized, either an HMI device or PowerSuite software. Parameters are grouped according to PowerSuite setting tabs. To help you find the link with the variable tables in the Use chapter, each parameter has its corresponding register number attached.
WARNING
RISK OF UNINTENDED CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION When modifying parameter settings of the LTM R controller: Be especially careful if you change parameter settings when the motor is running. Disable network control of the LTM R controller to prevent unintended parameter configuration and operation. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic Motor and Control Settings Thermal Settings Current Settings Voltage Settings Power Settings Communication and HMI Settings Page 478 481 483 485 488 490
1639504 05/2008
477
Motor and Control Settings

Motor Operating Mode
Parameter Motor nominal voltage Motor phases sequence Motor phases Motor nominal power Motor operating mode Setting Range 110690 V A-B-C A-C-B 3-phase motor single-phase motor 0.1999.9 kW in increments of 0.1 kW Overload - 2-wire Overload - 3-wire Independent - 2-wire Independent - 3-wire Reverser - 2-wire Reverser - 3-wire Two-Step - 2-wire Two-Step - 3-wire Two-Speed - 2-wire Two-Speed - 3-wire Custom On / Off 0...999.9 s 0...999.9 s in increments of 0.1 s 20...800 % FLC in increments of 1 % 0.1...999.9 s 0 = disabled 1 = enabled 1...1,000 A in increments of 0.1 A Factory Setting 400 V A-B-C 3-phase motor 7.5kW Independent 3-wire Register / Bit 565 601.12 601.13 583 540
Control direct transition Motor transition timeout Rapid cycle lockout timeout Motor step 1 to 2 threshold Motor step 1 to 2 timeout Motor star-delta Contactor rating
Off 1s 0s 150 % 5s 0 810 A
683.9 541 553 644 643 601.11 627
478
1639504 05/2008
Control Mode
Parameter Control remote channel setting Setting Range 0=Network 1=Terminal strip 2=HMI Terminal strip HMI Bump Bumpless Enable Disable Enable Disable Factory Setting Terminal strip Bump Enable Enable Register / Bit 683.5 683.6 683.8 683.10 683.11 683.12
Control local channel setting Control transfer mode Stop terminal strip disable Stop HMI disable
Fault Auto-Reset
Parameter Auto-reset attempts group 1 setting Auto-reset group 1 timeout Auto-reset attempts group 2 setting Auto-reset group 2 timeout Auto-reset attempts group 3 setting Auto-reset group 3 timeout Setting Range 0=manual, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5=unlimited number of reset attempts 0...9,999 s in 1 s increments 0=manual, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5=unlimited number of reset attempts 0...9,999 s in 1 s increments 0=manual, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5=unlimited number of reset attempts 0...9,999 s in 1 s increments Factory Setting Register / Bit 5 480 s 0 1200 s 0 60 s 637 638 639 640 641 642
1639504 05/2008
479
Load Current Transformer

Parameter Load CT ratio Setting Range Internal 10:1 15:1 30:1 50:1 100:1 200:1 400:1 800:1 Other Ratio Factory Setting Internal Register / Bit 95 (Read only)
Load CT multiple passes (access only if Load CT ratio = Internal)
1...100 passes in increments 1 of 1
630 628 629
Load CT primary 1...65,535 in increments of 1 1 (access only if Load CT ratio = Other Ratio) Load CT secondary 1...500 in increments of 1 (access only if Load CT ratio = Other Ratio) 1
Ground Current Transformer

Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting Register / Bit 560 561 Ground CT primary 165,535 in increments of 1 1 (access only if Ground current ratio = Other Ratio) Ground CT secondary 165,535 in increments of 1 1 (access only if Ground current ratio = Other Ratio)
Diagnostic
Parameter Diagnostic warning enable Diagnostic fault enable Wiring fault enable Setting Range Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Factory Setting Enable Enable Enable Register / Bit 634.1 633.1 633.2
480
1639504 05/2008
Thermal Settings
Thermal Overload
Parameter Thermal overload mode Motor trip class Motor auxiliary fan cooled Motor full load current ratio (FLC1) Motor high speed full load current ratio (FLC2) Thermal overload fault enable Thermal overload warning enable Thermal overload warning threshold Thermal overload fault reset threshold Long start fault timeout Thermal overload fault definite timeout Setting Range Definite Inverse thermal 5 - 30 in increments of 5 Enable / Disable 5...100 % of FLCmax, in increments of 1 % 5...100 % of FLCmax, in increments of 1 % Enable / Disable Enable / Disable 10...100 % of thermal capacity in increments of 1 % 35...95 % of thermal capacity 1...200 s in increments of 1 s 1...300 s in increments of 1 s Factory Setting Inverse thermal None Disable 5 % FLCmax 5 % FLCmax Enable Enable 85 % of thermal capacity 75 % of thermal capacity 10 s 10 s Register / Bit 546.3-4 606 601.15 652 653 631.3 632.3 609 608 623 547
1639504 05/2008
481
Motor Temperature Protection

Parameters Motor temperature sensor type Setting range None PTC Binary PT100 PTC Analog NTC Analog Enable / Disable 20...6,500 in increments of 0.1 20...6,500 in increments of 0.1 0...200 C in increments of 1 C 0...200 C in increments of 1 C Factory setting None Register / Bit 546.0-2
Motor temperature sensor fault enable Motor temperature sensor fault threshold Motor temperature sensor warning threshold Motor temperature sensor fault threshold degree Motor temperature sensor warning threshold degree
Disable Disable 200 200 0 0
633.6 634.6 549 550 551 552
Motor temperature sensor warning enable Enable / Disable
482
1639504 05/2008
Current Settings
Ground Current Mode
Parameters Ground Current fault enable Ground Current warning enable Internal ground current fault timeout Internal ground current fault threshold Internal ground current warning threshold External ground current fault timeout External ground current fault threshold Setting range Enable / Disable Enable / Disable 0.5...25 s in increments of 0.1 s Factory setting Enable Enable 1s Register / Bit 631.2 632.2 610 611 612 562 563 564
20...500 % of FLCmin in increments of 1 % 30 % of FLCmin 20...500 % of FLCmin in increments of 1 % 30 % of FLCmin 0.1...25 s in increments of 0.01 s 0.01...20 A in increments of 0.01 A 0.5 s 1A 1A
External ground current warning threshold 0.01...20 A in increments of 0.01 A

Parameters Current phase imbalance fault enable Setting range Enable / Disable Factory setting Enable 0.7 s 5s 10 % Disable 10 % Register / Bit 631.6 613 614 615 632.6 616
Current phase imbalance fault timeout starting 0.2...20 s in increments of 0.1 s Current phase imbalance fault timeout running 0.2...20 s in increments of 0.1 s Current phase imbalance fault threshold Current phase imbalance warning enable Current phase imbalance warning threshold 10...70 % of the calculated imbalance in increments of 1 % Enable / Disable 10...70 % of the calculated imbalance in increments of 1 %
Current Phase Loss

Parameters Current phase loss fault enable Current phase loss timeout Current phase loss warning enable Setting range Enable / Disable 0.1...30 s in increments of 0.1 s Enable / Disable Factory setting Enable 3s Enable Register / Bit 633.4 555 634.4
1639504 05/2008
483
Current Phase Reversal

Parameters Setting range Factory setting Disable Register / Bit 633.5 Current phase reversal fault enable Enable / Disable
Long Start
Parameters Long start fault enable Long start fault timeout Long start fault threshold Setting range Enable / Disable 1...200 s in increments of 1 s 100...800 % of FLC in increments of 10 % Factory setting Enable 10 s 100 % of FLC Register / Bit 631.4 623 624
Jam
Parameters Jam fault enable Jam fault timeout Jam fault threshold Jam warning enable Jam warning threshold Setting range Enable / Disable 1...30 s in increments of 1 s 100...800 % of FLC in increments of 1 % Enable / Disable 100...800 % of FLC in increments of 1 % Factory setting Enable 5s 200 % of FLC Disable 200 % of FLC Register / Bit 631.5 617 618 632.5 619
Undercurrent
Parameters Undercurrent fault enable Undercurrent fault timeout Undercurrent fault threshold Undercurrent warning enable Setting range Enable / Disable 1...200 s in increments of 1 s 30...100 % of FLC in increments of 1 % Enable / Disable Factory setting Disable 10 s 50 % of FLC Disable 50 % of FLC Register / Bit 631.7 620 621 632.7 622
Undercurrent warning threshold 30...100 % of FLC in increments of 1 %
Overcurrent
Parameters Overcurrent fault enable Overcurrent fault timeout Overcurrent fault threshold Overcurrent warning enable Overcurrent warning threshold Setting range Enable / Disable 1...250 s in increments of 1 s 20...800 % of FLC in increments of 1 % Enable / Disable 20...800 % of FLC in increments of 1 % Factory setting Disable 10 s 80 % of FLC Disable 80 % of FLC Register / Bit 633.3 556 557 634.3 558
484
1639504 05/2008
Voltage Settings
Voltage Phase Imbalance
Parameters Voltage phase imbalance fault enable Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout starting Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout running Voltage phase imbalance fault threshold Voltage phase imbalance warning enable Voltage phase imbalance warning threshold Setting range Enable / Disable Factory setting Register / Bit Disable 633.7 566 567 568 634.7 569
0.2...20 s in increments of 0.1 s 0.7 s 0.2...20 s in increments of 0.1 s 2 s 3...15 % of the calculated 10 % imbalance imbalance in increments of 1 % Enable / Disable 3...15 % calculated imbalance in increments of 1 % Disable 10 % imbalance
Voltage Phase Loss

Parameters Voltage phase loss fault enable Voltage phase loss fault timeout Voltage phase loss warning enable Setting range Enable / Disable 0.1...30 s in increments of 0.1 s Enable / Disable Factory setting Enable 3s Enable Register / Bit 633.8 576 634.8

Parameters Voltage phase reversal fault enable Setting range Enable / Disable Factory setting Enable Register / Bit 633.9
1639504 05/2008
485
Undervoltage
Parameters Undervoltage fault enable Undervoltage fault timeout Undervoltage fault threshold Undervoltage warning enable Setting range Enable / Disable 0.2...25 s in increments of 0.1 s 70... 99 % of Motor nominal voltage in increments of 1 % Enable / Disable Factory setting Disable 3s Register / Bit 633.10 573
85 % of Motor nominal voltage 574 Disable 634.10
Undervoltage warning threshold 70... 99 % of Motor nominal voltage in increments of 1 %
85 % of Motor nominal voltage 575
Overvoltage
Parameters Overvoltage fault enable Overvoltage fault timeout Overvoltage fault threshold Overvoltage warning enable Overvoltage warning threshold Setting range Enable / Disable 0.2...25 s in increments of 0.1 s 101...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in increments of 1 % Enable / Disable 101...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in increments of 1 % Factory setting Disable 3s Register / Bit 633.11 570
110 % of Motor nominal voltage 571 Disable 634.11
110 % of Motor nominal voltage 572
486
1639504 05/2008
Voltage Dip Management

Parameters Voltage dip mode Setting range None Load shedding Auto-restart 50...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in increments of 1 % 1...9,999 s in increments of 1 s 0...9,999 s in increments of 1 s 65...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in increments of 1 % 0...301 s in increments of 1 s Factory setting None Register / Bit 577.0-1
Voltage dip threshold Load shedding timeout Voltage dip restart timeout Voltage dip restart threshold
65 % 10 s 2s 90 % 2 4
579 578 580 581 582 596
Auto restart immediate timeout 0...4 s in increments of 0.1 s Auto restart delayed timeout
1639504 05/2008
487
Power Settings
Underpower
Parameters Underpower fault enable Underpower fault timeout Underpower fault threshold Underpower warning enable Setting range Enable / Disable 1...100 s in increments of 1 s 20...800 % of Motor nominal power in increments of 1 % Enable / Disable Factory setting Disable 60 s 20 % of Motor nominal power Disable 20 % of Motor nominal power Register / Bit 633.12 587 588 634.12 589
Underpower warning threshold 20...800 % of Motor nominal power in increments of 1 %
Overpower
Parameters Overpower fault enable Overpower fault timeout Overpower fault threshold Overpower warning enable Setting range Enable / Disable 1...100 s in increments of 1 s 20...800 % of Motor nominal power in increments of 1 % Enable / Disable Factory setting Disable 60 s 150 % of Motor nominal power Disable 150 % of Motor nominal power Register / Bit 633.13 584 585 634.13 586
Overpower warning threshold 20...800 % of Motor nominal power in increments of 1 %
488
1639504 05/2008
Under power Factor

Parameters Under power factor fault enable Under power factor fault timeout Under power factor fault threshold Under power factor warning enable Under power factor warning threshold Setting range Enable / Disable 1...25 s in increments of 0.1 s 0...1 in increments of 0.01 Enable / Disable 0...1 in increments of 0.01 Factory setting Disable 10 s 0.60 Disable 0.60 Register / Bit 633.14 590 591 634.14 592
Over power Factor

Parameters Over power factor fault enable Over power factor fault timeout Over power factor fault threshold Over power factor warning enable Over power factor warning threshold Setting range Enable / Disable 1...25 s in increments of 0.1 s 0...1 in increments of 0.01 Enable / Disable 0...1 in increments of 0.01 Factory setting Disable 10 s 0.90 Disable 0.90 Register / Bit 633.15 593 594 634.15 595
1639504 05/2008
489
Communication and HMI Settings

Network
Parameter Config via network port enable Network port fallback setting Setting Range Enable / Disable Hold Run LO1, LO2 off LO1, LO2 on LO1 off LO2 off Enable / Disable Enable / Disable 0 = Little endian 1 = Big endian Factory Setting Enable LO1, LO2 off Register / Bit 601.10 682
Network port fault enable Network port warning enable Network port endian setting
Disable Disable 1
631.15 632.15 602.10
490
1639504 05/2008
HMI
Parameter HMI port address setting
1
Setting Range 1...247 19,200 9600 4800 1200 Even / None Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Hold Run LO1, LO2 off LO1, LO2 on LO1 off LO2 off Enable / Disable Enable / Disable 0000...9,999 0 = Little endian 1 = Big endian
Factory Setting 1 19,200
Register / Bit 603 604
HMI port baud rate setting1
HMI port parity setting1 Config via HMI engineering tool enable Config via HMI keypad enable HMI port fallback setting
Even Enable Enable LO1, LO2 off
602.3 601.9 601.8 645
HMI port fault enable HMI port warning enable HMI keypad password HMI port endian setting
Disable Disable 0000 (not protected) 1
631.10 632.10 600 602.9
1 Address, baud rate, and parity settings are only considered if there is no communication during 5 s, or immediately after a power off.
1639504 05/2008
491
Display
Parameter Contactor rating Fault reset mode Setting Range 11,000 A Manual Remote Automatic English Franais Espaol Deutsch Italiano 0...5 Year: 20062099 Month: January February March April May June July August September October November December Day: 131 Hour: 023 Minute: 059 Second: 059 HMI motor status LED color 0 = red 1 = green Thermal and Overload HMI display thermal capacity level enable HMI display thermal capacity remaining enable HMI display time to trip enable HMI display control channel enable HMI motor temperature sensor enable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 651.1 654.11 654.12 651.13 651.15 Factory Setting 810 A Manual Register / Bit 627 602.0-2
HMI language setting
English
650.0-4
HMI display contrast setting Date and time setting
5 2006 January
626 655...658
1 0 0 0 0 602.11
492
1639504 05/2008
Configurable Parameters Parameter HMI display average current enable HMI display L1 current enable HMI display L2 current enable HMI display L3 current enable HMI display L1 current ratio enable HMI display L2 current ratio enable HMI display L3 current ratio enable HMI display average current ratio enable HMI display start statistics enable HMI display ground current enable HMI display average voltage enable HMI display L1-L2 voltage enable HMI display L2-L3 voltage enable HMI display L3-L1 voltage enable Setting Range Current Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Voltage Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Status HMI display date enable HMI display time enable HMI display operating time enable HMI display frequency enable HMI display starts per hour enable HMI display motor status enable HMI display I/O status enable HMI display power factor enable HMI display active power enable HMI display reactive power enable HMI display power consumption enable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Power Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable / Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable 654.6 654.4 651.10 654.5 Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 654.14 654.15 651.8 651.11 651.12 651.6 651.9 Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 654.3 654.0 654.1 654.2 654.13 Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 651.0 651.2 651.3 651.4 654.8 654.9 654.10 654.7 651.7 651.14 654.5 Factory Setting Register / Bit
HMI display current phase imbalance enable Enable / Disable
HMI display voltage phase imbalance enable Enable / Disable
1639504 05/2008
493
494
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
At a Glance
Overview The LTM R operatig mode wiring diagrams can be drawn according to IEC or NEMA standard. This chapter contains the following sections:
Section C.1 C.2 Topic IEC Format Wiring Diagrams NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Page 496 515
1639504 05/2008
495
Wiring Diagrams
C.1
At a Glance
Overview
Overload Independent Reverser Two-Step
IEC Format Wiring Diagrams
This section contains the wiring diagrams corresponding to the 5 pre-configured operating modes:
Monitoring of the motor load where control (start/stop) of the motor load is achieved by a mechanism other than the controller Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage non-reversing motor starting applications Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage reversing motor starting applications Reduced voltage starting motor applications, including: Wye-Delta Open Transition Primary Resistor Open Transition Autotransformer Two-speed motor applications for motor types, including: Dahlander (consequent pole) Pole Changer
Two-Speed
Each application is described individually, with:

1 complete application diagram (including power and control) 3 partial diagrams (control logic input wiring variants) 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control selectable 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control selectable

Topic Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams Two-Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams Two-Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams Page 497 501 503 505 507 509 511 513
496
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:
KM1
+/~ -/~ Stop Start KM1 KM1
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
1639504 05/2008
497
Wiring Diagrams
Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

3
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:
KM1 +/~ -/~

Stop Start
KM1
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
498
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
3
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram:
KM1 +/~ -/~ Stop Start KM1
Network
Terminal strip
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
M
KM1
1639504 05/2008
499
Wiring Diagrams
Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
3
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram:
KM1 +/~ -/~
Network
Terminal Local strip
Stop Start
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R LTMR O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
M
KM1
500
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
3
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:
KM1 +/~ -/~ Start Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
KM1
1639504 05/2008
501
Wiring Diagrams
Start/Stop
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
L: Terminal strip control O: Off N: Network control Start
L ON
Stop
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
L: Terminal strip control O: Off N: Network control
L ON
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
502
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams

3
KM2
KM1 +/~ -/~ Start FW Start RV Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
KM2
KM1 KM2
M
1
KM1
The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O.1 and O.2.
1639504 05/2008
503
Wiring Diagrams
FW: Forward O: Off RV: Reverse
FW O RV
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
L: Terminal strip control O: Off N: Network control FW: Forward RV: Reverse Start FW
L ON
Start RV
Stop
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
L: Terminal strip control O: Off N: Network control FW: Forward RV: Reverse
FW RV
L ON
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
504
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams

3
KM2
KM3
KM1
+/~ -/~ Start Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
KM3 KM1
KM3 KM1 KM2
KM1 KM3
The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O.1 and O.2.
1639504 05/2008
505
Wiring Diagrams
Start/Stop
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
The following application diagram features 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram:
L ON
Stop
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
The following application diagram features 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram:
L ON
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
506
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams

KM2
KM1
+/~ -/~ Start Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
KM1
KM2
1639504 05/2008
507
Wiring Diagrams
Start/Stop
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
L ON
Stop
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
L ON
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
508
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams

KM2
KM3
+/~ -/~ Start Stop
KM1
A1 A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
KM1 KM2
KM3 KM1
KM1 KM3
M
1 The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O.1 and O.2.
1639504 05/2008
509
Wiring Diagrams
Start/Stop
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
L ON
Stop
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
L ON
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
510
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
Two-Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams

KM2
KM1
KM3 +/~ -/~ Low Speed High Speed Stop
A1 A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
1
LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
O.4
13
14
23
24
33 34
KM2 KM1
KM1 KM2
KM2 KM3
A Dahlander application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows. The controller can also be placed upstream of the contactors. If this is the case, and if the Dahlander motor is used in variable torque mode, all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size. The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O.1 and O.2.
1639504 05/2008
511
Wiring Diagrams
LS: Low Speed O: Off HS: High Speed
LS O HS
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
L: Terminal strip control O: Off N: Network control LS: Low Speed HS: High Speed Start LS
L ON
Start HS
Stop
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
L: Terminal strip control O: Off N: Network control LS: Low Speed HS: High Speed
LS HS
L ON
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
512
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
Two-Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams

3
KM2
KM1
+/~ -/~ Low Speed High Speed Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
1
LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
O.4
13
14
23
24
33
34
KM2 KM1
KM1 KM2
A pole-changing application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows. The controller can also be placed upstream of the contactors. If this is the case, all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size. The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller firmware interlocks O.1 and O.2.
1639504 05/2008
513
Wiring Diagrams
LS: Low Speed O: Off HS: High Speed
LS O HS
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
L: Terminal strip control O: Off N: Network control LS: Low Speed HS: High Speed Start LS
L ON
Start HS
Stop
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
L: Terminal strip control O: Off N: Network control LS: Low Speed HS: High Speed
LS HS
L ON
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
514
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
C.2
At a Glance
Overview
Overload Independent Reverser Two-Step
NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams
This section contains the wiring diagrams corresponding to the 5 pre-configured operating modes:
Monitoring of the motor load where control (start/stop) of the motor load is achieved by a mechanism other than the controller Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage non-reversing motor starting applications Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage reversing motor starting applications Reduced voltage starting motor applications, including: Wye-Delta Open Transition Primary Resistor Open Transition Autotransformer Two-speed motor applications for motor types, including: Dahlander (consequent pole) Pole Changer
Two-Speed
Each application is described individually, with:

1 complete application diagram (including power and control) 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control
3 partial diagrams 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control (control logic input wiring variants) 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control selectable 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control selectable

Topic Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Single Winding (Consequent Pole) Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Separate Winding Page 516 520 522 524 526 528 530 532
1639504 05/2008
515
Wiring Diagrams
Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams

3 L1 L2 L3
+/~
-/~
Stop
Start M
M
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13 T1 T2 T3
14
23
24
33
34
516
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams

3 L1
L2
L3
+/~
-/~
OFF
ON
M
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13 T1 T2 T3
14
23
24
33
34
1639504 05/2008
517
Wiring Diagrams
3 L1 L2
+/~ -/~ L3
H: Hand (Terminal strip control) O: Off A: Automatic (Network control) M M M
A1 A2 A3
H O A I I I
Stop
H O A A1 A2 A3
Start M
M
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
T1
T2
T3
518
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
3 L1 L2
+/~ -/~ L3
H: Hand (Terminal strip control) O: Off A: Automatic (Network control) M M M

H O A A1 A2 A3
A1 A2 A3
H O A I I I
M
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
T1
T2
T3
1639504 05/2008
519
Wiring Diagrams
Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams

3 L1 L2 L3
+/~
-/~
Start
Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13 T1 T2 T3
14
23
24
33
34
520
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
OFF ON
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
H: Hand (Terminal strip control) O: Off A: Automatic (Network control)
H O A I I I H O A A1
Stop Start
A1 A2 A3
A2 A3
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
A1 A2 H O A I I H O A A1 A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
1639504 05/2008
521
Wiring Diagrams
Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams

3 L1 L2 L3 +/~ -/~
Forward Reverse
Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13 T1 T2 T3
14
23
24
33
34
F R
522
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
F: Forward O: Off R: Reverse
O A1 A2 A1 A2 F I O R I
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
H O A I I I O
A A1 A2 A3
Stop Forward Reverse
A1 A2 A3
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
H: Hand (Terminal strip control) O: Off A: Automatic (Network control) F: Forward R: Reverse
F R H O A A1 A2 A1 A2 H O A I I
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
1639504 05/2008
523
Wiring Diagrams
Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams

3 L1 L2 L3
+/~
-/~
2M 2M 2M
1M 1M 1M
Start
Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13 T6 T4 T5 T1 T2 T3
14
23
24
33
34
T4 T2 2M T1 T6 T5 T3 S
2M 1M S
524
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
OFF ON
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
The following application diagram features 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram:
H O A A1 A1 A2 A3 H O A I I I
Stop Start
A2 A3
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
The following application diagram features 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control selectable wiring diagram:
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
1639504 05/2008
525
Wiring Diagrams
Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams

L1
3 L2 L3
+/~
-/~
RES
RES
RES
Start
Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13 T1 T2 T3
14
23
24
33
34
A
M
526
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
OFF ON
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
Stop Start
A2 A3
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
H: Hand (Terminal Strip Control) O: Off A: Automatic (Network Control)
O.4
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
1639504 05/2008
527
Wiring Diagrams
Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams

3 L1 L2 L3
+/~
-/~
R 2S 100 84 65 50 0 1S 2S
R 2S 100 84 65 50 0 1S
Start
Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13 T1 T2 T3
14
23
24
33
34
R
1S
2S 1S
528
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
OFF ON
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
Stop Start
A2 A3
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
1639504 05/2008
529
Wiring Diagrams
Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Single Winding (Consequent Pole)

3 L1 L2 L3
+/~
-/~
HIGH HIGH HIGH
LOW LOW LOW
LOW HIGH
Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
T4 T1 T2 T6 T3 T5
LOW HIGH
HIGH LOW
530
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
L: Low Speed O: Off H: High Speed
O A1 A2 L I O H I
H A1 A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
H: Hand (Terminal strip control) O: Off A: Automatic (Network control) STOP
A1 A2 A3 H O A I I I H O A A1 A2 A3
LOW HIGH
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
LOW HIGH H O A A1 A2 A1 A2 H O A I I
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
1639504 05/2008
531
Wiring Diagrams
Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Separate Winding

3 L1 L2 L3
+/~
-/~
HIGH HIGH HIGH
LOW LOW LOW
LOW HIGH
Stop
A1
A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4 LTM R O.1 O.2 O.3
13
14
23
24
33
34
T4 T1 T2 T6 T3 T5
LOW HIGH
HIGH LOW
532
1639504 05/2008
Wiring Diagrams
L: Low Speed O: Off H: High Speed
A1 A2 L I O H I
H A1 A2
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
H: Hand (Terminal strip control) O: Off A: Automatic (Network control) STOP
H O A A1 I I A2 A3 I H O A A1 A2 A3
LOW HIGH
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
LOW HIGH H O A A1 A2 A1 A2 H O A I I
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
I.5
I.6
97
98
95
96
O.4
1639504 05/2008
533
Wiring Diagrams
534
1639504 05/2008
Glossary
active power
Also known as real power, active power is the rate of producing, transferring or using electrical energy. It is measured in watts (W) and often expressed in kilowatts (kW) or megawatts (MW). Describes inputs (e.g. temperature) or outputs (e.g. motor speed) that can be set to a range of values. Contrast with discrete. The product of current and voltage, apparent power consists of both active power and reactive power. It is measured in volt-amperes and often expressed in kilovoltamperes (kVA) or megavolt-amperes (MVA).
analog
apparent power
CANopen
An open industry standard protocol used on the internal communication bus. The protocol allows the connection of any standard CANopen device to the island bus. current transformer.
CT
definite time
A variety of TCC or TVC where the initial magnitude of the trip time delay remains a constant, and does not vary in response to changes in the value of the measured quantity (e.g. current). Contrast with inverse thermal. In the broadest terms, any electronic unit that can be added to a network. More specifically, a programmable electronic unit (e.g. PLC, numeric controller or robot) or I/O card. DeviceNet is a low-level, connection-based network protocol that is based on CAN, a serial bus system without a defined application layer. DeviceNet, therefore, defines a layer for the industrial application of CAN. Deutsches Institut fr Normung. The European organization that organizes the creation and maintenance of dimensional and engineering standards.
535
device
DeviceNet
DIN
1639504 05/2008
Glossary
DIN rail
A steel mounting rail, made pursuant to DIN standards (typically 35 mm wide), that allows for easier "snap-on" mounting of IEC electrical devices, including the LTM R controller and the expansion module. Contrast with screw mounting of devices to a control panel by drilling and tapping holes. Describes inputs (e.g. switches) or outputs (e.g. coils) that can be only On or Off. Contrast with analog. double-pole/single-throw. A switch that connects or disconnects 2 circuit conductors in a single branch circuit. A DPST switch has 4 terminals, and is the equivalent of 2 single-pole/single-throw switches controlled by a single mechanism, as depicted below:
discrete
DPST
endian setting (big endian)
big endian means that the high-order byte/word of the number is stored in memory at the lowest address, and the low-order byte/word at the highest address (the big end comes first). little endian means that the low-order byte/word of the number is stored in memory at the lowest address, and the high-order byte/word at the highest address (the little end comes first).
endian setting (little endian)
FLC
full load current. Also known as rated current. The current the motor will draw at the rated voltage and rated load. The LTM R controller has 2 FLC settings: FLC1 (Motor Full Load Current Ratio) and FLC2 (Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio), each set as a percentage of FLC max. Motor Full Load Current Ratio. FLC parameter setting for low or single speed motors. Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio. FLC parameter setting for high-speed motors. Full Load Current Max. Peak current parameter. Minimum Full Load Current. The smallest amount of motor current the LTM R controller will support. This value is determined by the LTM R controller model.
FLC1
FLC2
FLCmax FLCmin
hysteresis
A valueadded to lower limit threshold settings or subtracted from upper limit threshold settingsthat retards the response of the LTM R controller before it stops measuring the duration of faults and warnings.
536
1639504 05/2008
Glossary
inverse thermal
A variety of TCC where the initial magnitude of the trip time delay is generated by a thermal model of the motor and varies in response to changes in the value of the measured quantity (e.g. current). Contrast with definite time.
Modbus
Modbus is the name of the master-slave/client-server serial communications protocol developed by Modicon (now Schneider Automation, Inc.) in 1979, which has since become a standard network protocol for industrial automation.
nominal power
Motor Nominal Power. Parameter for the power a motor will produce at rated voltage and rated current. Motor Nominal Voltage. Parameter for rated voltage. negative temperature coefficient. Characteristic of a thermistora thermally sensitive resistorwhose resistance increases as its temperature falls, and whose resistance decreases as its temperature rises. Type of RTD.
nominal voltage NTC
NTC analog
PLC power factor
programmable logic controller. Also called cosine phi (or ), power factor represents the absolute value of the ratio of active power to apparent power in AC power systems. An open bus system that uses an electrical network based on a shielded 2-wire line or an optical network based on a fiber-optic cable. Type of RTD. positive temperature coefficient. Characteristic of a thermistora thermally sensitive resistorwhose resistance increases as its temperature rises, and whose resistance decreases as its temperature falls. Type of RTD. Type of RTD.
Profibus
PT100 PTC
PTC analog PTC binary
1639504 05/2008
537
Glossary
reset time
Time between a sudden change in the monitored quantity (e.g. current) and the switching of the output relay. root mean square. A method of calculating average AC current and average AC voltage. Because AC current and AC voltage are bi-directional, the arithmetic average of AC current or voltage always equals 0. resistance temperature detector. A thermistor (thermal resistor sensor) used to measure the temperature of the motor. Required by the LTM R controllers Motor Temp Sensor motor protection function.
rms
RTD
TCC
trip curve characteristic. The type of delay used to trip the flow of current in response to a fault condition. As implemented in the LTM R controller, all motor protection function trip time delays are definite time, except for the Thermal Overload function, which also offers inverse thermal trip time delays. trip voltage characteristic. The type of delay used to trip the flow of voltage in response to a fault condition. As implemented by the LTM R controller and the expansion module, all TVCs are definite time.
TVC
538
1639504 05/2008
Index
B C A
attempts group 3 setting, 207, 296, 337, 446, 479 count, 65, 303 group 1 timeout, 206, 296, 337, 446, 479 group 2 timeout, 207, 296, 337, 446, 479 group 3 timeout, 207, 296, 337, 446, 479 average current n-0, 305, 344, 428 n-1, 345, 429 n-2, 429 n-3, 429 n-4, 430 ratio, 335 average current ratio, 68, 332 n-0, 305, 424 n-1, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 average voltage, 45, 68 n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428
A
active, 535 active power, 47, 48, 68, 335, 437 consumption, 49 n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 altitude derating controller, 471 LTM E expansion module, 474 apparent power, 47 assembly object, 394 auto resets count, 422 auto restart delayed condition, 437 delayed count, 304, 423 delayed timeout, 144, 300, 442, 487 enable, 441 immediate condition, 437 immediate count, 304, 423 immediate timeout, 144, 300, 441, 487 manual condition, 437 manual count, 304, 423 status register, 437 automatic restart, 143 auto-reset attempts group 1 setting, 206, 296, 337, 445, 479 attempts group 2 setting, 207, 296, 337, 446, 479
1639504 05/2008
B
baud range for devices, 249 baud rate, 367 bumpless transfer mode, 337
539
Index
C
CAN bus cable length, 249 CANopen, 535 clear all command, 357 closings count motor LO1, 423 motor LO2, 423 command clear all, 52, 254, 290, 291, 306, 361, 449 clear controller settings, 306, 334, 361, 449 clear network port settings, 306, 361, 449 clear statistics, 64, 306, 334, 361, 449 clear thermal capacity level, 84, 206, 297, 306, 361, 449 fault reset, 333, 449 logic outputs register, 449 motor low speed, 193, 449 motor run forward, 179, 183, 187, 193, 449 motor run reverse, 183, 187, 193, 449 self test, 306, 449, 458, 459 statistics, 52 commissioning first power-up, 254 introduction, 252 Sys Config menu, 292 verify configuration, 265 verify wiring, 262 communications link, 357 config via HMI engineering tool enable, 253, 302, 442, 491 HMI keypad enable, 253, 302, 442, 491 HMI network port enable, 253 network port enable, 301, 442, 490 configurable settings, 79 configuration DeviceNet master, 370 configuration checksum, 59 configuration file, 198 creating, 354 manage, 354 saving, 356 transfer, 355 configuration software
540
configuration functions, 357 EDS, 369 installation, 351 power-up, 354 Quick Watch window, 359 connect PC to LTM R controller, 357 connection object, 398 contactor rating, 292, 443, 478, 492 control direct transition, 186, 193, 292, 295, 448, 478 local channel setting, 337 principles, 170 register 1, 449 register 2, 449 setting register, 448 transfer mode, 448, 479 control channels, 158, 159 HMI, 160 network, 160 selecting, 159 terminal strip, 160 control circuit 2-wire, 172 3-wire, 172 control local channel setting, 296, 448, 479 control remote channel setting, 448, 479 local buttons enable, 448 local default mode, 448 control supervisor object, 401 control transfer mode, 160, 296 control via HMI, 433 control voltage characteristics LTM R controller, 470 control wiring, 172 controller AC inputs configuration register, 439 AC logic inputs configuration, 439 altitude derating, 471 commercial reference, 310, 346, 420 compatibility code, 420 config checksum, 436 firmware version, 310, 420 ID code, 420 internal fault, 51
1639504 05/2008
Index
internal faults count, 67, 304 internal temperature, 52, 436 internal temperature max, 72, 303, 343, 422 internal temperature warning enable, 52 port ID, 437 power, 433 serial number, 420 system config required, 254, 281, 293, 306, 442 controller AC inputs configuration register, 293 controller internal faults count, 343 counters communication loss, 67 internal faults, 67 current average, 40, 437 ground, 437 L1, 437 L2, 437 L3, 437 phase imbalance, 335 range max, 420 scale ratio, 420 sensor max, 420 current highest imbalance L1, 438 L2, 438 L3, 438 current phase imbalance, 41, 68, 91, 436 fault enable, 94, 297, 338, 483 fault threshold, 94, 297, 338, 443, 483 fault timeout running, 94, 297, 338, 443, 483 fault timeout starting, 94, 297, 338, 443, 483 faults count, 66, 303, 343 n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 warning enable, 94, 297, 338, 483 warning threshold, 94, 297, 338, 443, 483 current phase loss, 95 fault enable, 96, 298, 338, 483 fault timeout, 298
1639504 05/2008
faults count, 66, 303 timeout, 96, 338, 440, 483 warning enable, 96, 298, 338, 483 current phase reversal, 98 fault enable, 98, 298, 338, 484 faults count, 66 phase sequence, 98 current ratio average, 40, 436 ground, 436 L1, 37, 436 L2, 37, 436 L3, 37, 436 custom logic auxiliary 1 LED, 450 auxiliary 2 LED, 450 external fault, 450 FLC selection, 450 LO1, 450 LO2, 450 LO3, 450 LO4, 450 memory space, 450 memory used, 450 network control, 450 non volatile space, 450 phase reverse, 450 reset, 450 run, 450 status register, 450 stop, 450 stop LED, 450 temporary space, 450 transition, 450 version, 450 custom logic command external fault, 451 register 1, 451 custom logic monitoring external fault, 451 register 1, 451 system ready, 451 custom logic setting register 1, 451 custom operating mode, 198
541
Index
D
date and time, 68 n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 setting, 292, 294, 447, 492 definite, 535 DeviceNet baud rate, 367 CAN-based networks, 248 data exchange, 249 device profile, 369 drop line, 249 explicit message, 365 I/O message, 365 network architecture, 249 network length, 249 network model, 249 network topology, 248 node address, 367 physical layer, 248 trunk line, 249 DeviceNet interface object, 407 diagnostic fault, 66 fault enable, 53, 300, 480 faults count, 66, 304 warning enable, 53, 300, 480 diagnostic faults communication loss, 59 wiring faults, 57
compatibility code, 420 firmware version, 310, 420 ID code, 420 serial number, 420 external ground current, 111 fault threshold, 112, 298, 339, 440, 483 fault timeout, 112, 298, 339, 440, 483 warning threshold, 112, 298, 339, 440, 483
F
fallback control transition, 161 fault controller internal, 431 current phase imbalance, 431 current phase loss, 432 current phase reversal, 432 diagnostic, 432 external system, 432 ground current, 431 HMI port, 431 internal port, 431 jam, 431 long start, 431 LTM E configuration, 432 motor temperature sensor, 432 network port, 431 network port config, 431 over power factor, 432 overcurrent, 432 overpower, 432 overvoltage, 432 register 1, 431 register 2, 432 register 3, 432 test, 431 thermal overload, 431 under power factor, 432 undercurrent, 431 underpower, 432 undervoltage, 432 voltage phase imbalance, 432 voltage phase loss, 432 voltage phase reversal, 432 wiring, 432
1639504 05/2008
E
EDS, 369 electronic data sheet basic, 369 EDS, 369 endian, 536 error codes PKW, 388 expansion commercial reference, 310, 346, 420
542
Index
fault code, 68, 212, 431 n-0, 305, 424 n-1, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 fault counters protection, 66 fault enable current phase imbalance, 444 current phase loss, 445 current phase reversal, 445 diagnostic, 445 ground current, 444 HMI port, 444 jam, 444 long start, 444 motor temperature sensor, 445 network port, 444 over power factor, 445 overcurrent, 445 overpower, 445 overvoltage, 445 register 1, 444 register 2, 445 test, 306, 444, 458 thermal overload, 444 under power factor, 445 undercurrent, 444 underpower, 445 undervoltage, 445 voltage phase imbalance, 445 voltage phase loss, 445 voltage phase reversal, 445 wiring, 445 fault management, 199 introduction, 200 fault power cycle requested, 433 fault reset authorized, 433 auto-reset active, 433 fault reset mode, 296, 333, 337, 442, 492 automatic, 205 manual, 203 remote, 210 fault statistics, 63
1639504 05/2008
history, 68 faults count, 64, 303, 343, 423 controller internal, 304, 422 current phase imbalance, 303, 422 current phase loss, 303, 423 diagnostic, 304, 423 ground current, 303, 422 HMI port, 304, 422 internal port, 304, 422 jam, 303, 422 long start, 303, 422 motor temperature sensor, 303, 423 network port, 304, 422 network port config, 304, 422 network port internal, 304 over power factor, 304, 423 overcurrent, 303, 423 overpower, 304, 423 overvoltage, 304, 423 thermal overload, 303, 422 under power factor, 304, 423 undercurrent, 303, 422 underpower, 304, 423 undervoltage, 304, 423 voltage phase imbalance, 303, 423 voltage phase loss, 304, 423 wiring, 423 FDR data backup command, 306 data restore command, 306 file transfer device to PC, 355 PC to device, 355 first power-up, 254 FLC, 165, 193, 536 FLC settings, 257 FLC1, 193 FLC2, 193 FLCmax, 257 FLCmin, 257 frequency, 43, 68, 436 n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428
543
Index
full load current max, 68, 420 n-0, 424 n-1, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 full load current settings, 257
G
general configuration register 1, 442 register 2, 442 general purpose registers for logic functions, 451 ground CT primary, 38, 111, 292, 440, 480 secondary, 38, 111, 292, 440, 480 ground current, 38, 107 fault configuration, 440 fault enable, 107, 298, 339, 483 faults count, 66, 303, 343 mode, 38, 107, 108, 111, 292, 339, 440 n-0, 305, 428 n-1, 429 n-2, 429 n-3, 429 n-4, 430 ratio, 38, 335 warning enable, 107, 298, 339, 483 ground current ratio, 68 n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428
H
hardware configuration, 269 LTM R controller alone, 270 HMI display brightness setting, 443 display contrast setting, 443 keypad password, 306 language setting, 292, 294, 311, 446 language setting register, 446
544
motor temperature sensor enable, 492 HMI display active power enable, 312, 447, 493 average current enable, 312, 446, 493 average current ratio enable, 312, 447, 493 average voltage enable, 312, 447, 493 contrast setting, 492 control channel enable, 311, 492 control mode enable, 446 current phase imbalance enable, 312, 446, 493 date enable, 311, 447, 493 frequency enable, 311, 446, 493 ground current enable, 312, 446, 493 I/O status enable, 311, 446, 493 items register 1, 446 items register 2, 447 L1 current enable, 312, 446, 493 L1 current ratio enable, 312, 447, 493 L1-L2 current enable, 312 L1-L2 voltage enable, 447, 493 L2 current enable, 312, 446, 493 L2 current ratio enable, 312, 447, 493 L2-L3 voltage enable, 312, 447, 493 L3 current enable, 312, 446, 493 L3 current ratio enable, 312, 447, 493 L3-L1 voltage enable, 312, 447, 493 motor status enable, 311, 446, 493 motor temperature sensor enable, 312, 446 operating time enable, 311, 446, 493 power consumption enable, 447, 493 power factor enable, 312, 447, 493 reactive power enable, 312, 446, 493 start statistics enable, 312, 446, 493 starts per hour enable, 311, 446, 493 temperature sensor degree CF, 312 thermal capacity level enable, 311, 446, 492 thermal capacity remaining enable, 311, 447, 492 time enable, 311, 447, 493 time to trip enable, 311, 447, 492 voltage phase imbalance enable, 312, 447, 493 HMI display items register 3, 447 HMI display temperature sensor degree CF, 447 HMI keypad password, 442, 491
1639504 05/2008
Index
HMI keys independent operating mode, 181 overload operating mode, 178 reverser operating mode, 185 two-speed operating mode, 196 two-step operating mode, 191 HMI language setting, 492 HMI motor status LED color, 442, 492 HMI port address setting, 302, 442, 491 baud rate setting, 302, 334, 442, 491 comm loss, 433 endian setting, 442, 491 fallback setting, 59, 302, 446, 491 fault enable, 59, 302, 342 fault time, 491 faults count, 67, 304, 343 parity setting, 302, 334, 442, 491 warning enable, 59, 302, 491 hysteresis, 80, 536
L
L1 current n-0, 305, 428 n-1, 429 n-2, 429 n-3, 429 n-4, 430 L1 current highest imbalance, 92 L1 current ratio, 68, 335 n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 L1-L2 highest imbalance, 127 L1-L2 voltage, 68 n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 L2 current n-0, 305, 428 n-1, 429 n-2, 429 n-3, 429 n-4, 430 L2 current highest imbalance, 92 L2 current ratio, 68, 335 n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 L2-L3 highest imbalance, 127 L2-L3 voltage, 68 n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 L3 current n-0, 305, 428 n-1, 429 n-2, 429
545
I
I/O status, 435 internal clock, 459 internal ground current, 108 fault threshold, 109, 339, 443, 483 fault timeout, 109, 339, 443, 483 warning threshold, 109, 339, 443, 483 internal port faults count, 67, 304, 343 introduction, 15 inverse, 537
J
jam, 101 fault enable, 102, 298, 338, 484 fault threshold, 102, 298, 338, 443, 484 fault timeout, 102, 298, 338, 443, 484 faults count, 66, 303 warning enable, 102, 298, 338, 484 warning threshold, 102, 298, 338, 443, 484
1639504 05/2008
Index
n-3, 429 n-4, 430 L3 current highest imbalance, 92 L3 current ratio, 68, 335 n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 L3-L1 highest imbalance, 127 L3-L1 voltage, 68 n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 line currents, 37 load CT multiple passes, 292, 443, 480 primary, 292, 443, 480 ratio, 291, 292, 420, 480 secondary, 292, 443, 480 load shedding, 140, 433 enable, 342, 441 restart threshold, 342 restart timeout, 342 threshold, 342 timeout, 141, 300, 342, 441, 487 load sheddings count, 70, 304, 423 logic file, 198 logic input 3 external ready enable, 296, 451 logic input behavior, 172 independent operating mode, 181 overload operating mode, 178 reverser operating mode, 185 two-speed operating mode, 196 two-step operating mode, 191 logic inputs characteristics LTM R controller, 470 LTM E expansion module, 474 logic output behavior, 173 independent operating mode, 181 overload operating mode, 178 reverser operating mode, 185 two-speed operating mode, 196
546
two-step operating mode, 191 logic outputs characteristics LTM R controller, 471 long start, 99 fault enable, 100, 298, 338, 484 fault threshold, 100, 165, 298, 338, 443, 484 fault timeout, 90, 100, 165, 297, 298, 338, 443, 481, 484 faults count, 66, 303, 343 LTM E expansion module technical specifications, 472 LTM R controller physical description, 26 technical specifications, 468
M
MAC-ID, 367 Magelis XBT L1000 programming software file transfer, 277 install, 275 software application files, 276 Magelis XBTN410 programming, 274 Magelis XBTN410 (1-to-1), 278 editing values, 287 fault and warning display, 285, 314 HMI display, 311 keypad control, 316 LCD, 281 main menu, 293 menu structure, 290 navigating the menu structure, 286 physical description, 279 product ID, 310 scrolling variable list, 283 services, 306 settings, 294 statistics, 302 Sys Config menu, 292 Magelis XBTN410 (1-to-many), 318 command lines, 323 editing values, 325 fault management, 348 home page, 331 keypad, 320
1639504 05/2008
Index
LCD, 321 menu structure - level 2, 332 menu structure overview, 330 monitoring, 347 motor starter page, 335 navigating the menu structure, 324 physical description, 319 product ID page, 346 remote reset page, 333 reset to defaults page, 334 service commands, 349 settings page, 336 starters currents page, 332 starters status page, 332 statistics page, 342 value write command, 328 XBTN reference page, 334 maintenance, 453 detecting problems, 454 troubleshooting, 455 measurement characteristics, 475 metering and monitoring functions, 35 minimum wait time, 431 Modbus, 537 mode thermal overload, 481 motor auxiliary fan cooled, 82, 86, 292, 295, 442, 481 average current ratio, 433 custom operating mode, 198 full load current ratio, 68, 86, 90, 193, 297, 338, 446 full load current ratio (FLC1), 481 full load power, 149, 151 high speed full load current ratio, 86, 90, 193, 297, 338, 446 last start current, 343, 438 last start current ratio, 71, 303 last start duration, 72, 303, 343, 438 LO1 starts count, 70, 303 LO2 starts count, 70, 303 lockout timeout, 439 nominal power, 295, 337, 441, 478 nominal voltage, 134, 137, 292, 295,
1639504 05/2008
440, 478 operating mode, 291, 292, 439, 478 phases, 57, 292, 442, 478 phases sequence, 133, 292, 295, 442, 478 predefined operating mode, 171 restart time undefined, 433 running, 433 speed, 433 star-delta, 292, 442, 478 starting, 433 starts count, 70, 303 starts per hour count, 70, 438 step 1 to 2 threshold, 187, 292, 295, 478 step 1 to 2 timeout, 187, 292, 295, 478 temperature sensor, 43, 335 temperature sensor fault threshold, 440 temperature sensor type, 440 temperature sensor warning threshold, 440 transition lockout, 433 transition timeout, 186, 187, 193, 292, 295, 478 trip class, 86, 297, 442, 481 motor control functions, 157 motor full load current max n-0, 305, 344 n-1, 345 motor full load current ratio n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 motor high speed full load current ratio (FLC2), 481 motor history, 69 characteristics, 476 last start max current, 71 last start time, 72 motor operating time, 72 motor starts, 70 motor starts per hour, 70 motor operating mode independent, 171 overload, 171 reverser, 171 two-speed, 171
547
Index
two-step, 171 motor phases sequence, 98 motor predefined operating mode independent, 179 overload, 176 reverser, 183 two-speed, 193 two-step, 187 motor protection functions, 79 current phase imbalance, 91 current phase loss, 95 current phase reversal, 98 external ground current, 111 ground current, 107 internal ground current, 108 jam, 101 long start, 99 motor temperature sensor, 114 motor temperature sensor-NTC analog, 122 motor temperature sensor-PT100, 117 motor temperature sensor-PTC analog, 120 motor temperature sensor-PTC binary, 115 operation, 79 over power factor, 155 overcurrent, 105 overpower, 151 overvoltage, 137 thermal overload, 82 thermal overload - definite time, 88 thermal overload - inverse thermal, 83 under power factor, 153 undercurrent, 103 underpower, 149 undervoltage, 134 voltage phase imbalance, 127 voltage phase loss, 130 voltage phase reversal, 133 motor running, 74 motor starting, 74 motor starts count, 343, 422 motor step 1 to 2 threshold, 446 timeout, 446 motor temperature sensor, 68, 114, 436 display degree CF, 118 fault enable, 114, 295, 337, 482
548
fault threshold, 121, 123, 295, 337, 482 fault threshold degree, 118, 440 faults count, 66, 303 n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 PT100, 117 type, 57, 114, 115, 120, 122, 292, 482 warning, 114 warning enable, 295, 337, 482 warning threshold, 121, 123, 295, 337, 482 warning threshold degree, 118, 440 motor temperature sensor degree, 436 n-0, 305, 428 n-1, 429 n-2, 429 n-3, 429 n-4, 430 motor temperature sensor display degree CF, 440
N
network length, 249 network port address setting, 293, 301, 448, 490 auto synchro setting, 301 bad config, 437 baud rate, 437 baud rate setting, 301, 448, 490 comm loss, 433 comm loss timeout, 490 commercial reference, 310 communicating, 437 compatibility code, 420 config faults count, 67, 304, 343 connected, 437 control interval setting, 301 endian setting, 442, 490 fallback setting, 59, 301, 447, 490 fault enable, 59, 301, 342, 490 faults count, 67, 304, 343 FDR synchro setting, 301 firmware version, 310, 420
1639504 05/2008
Index
frame type setting, 301 gateway setting, 293, 301 ID code, 420 internal faults count, 67, 304, 343 IP address setting, 293, 301 master IP setting, 293, 301 parity, 437 parity setting, 301, 490 self-detecting, 437 self-testing, 437 status, 437 subnet mask setting, 293, 301 warning enable, 59, 301, 490 nominal, 537 nominal power, 478 NTC analog, 122
O
object DeviceNet interface, 407 objects assembly, 394 connection, 398 control supervisor, 401 DeviceNet, 393 identity, 390 message router, 392 overload, 405 on level current, 165 operating modes, 169 custom, 198 independent, 179 introduction, 171 overload, 176 reverser, 183 two speed, 193 two-step, 187 operating states, 158, 162 chart, 163 not ready, 162 protection functions, 164 ready, 162 run, 162 start, 162 operating time, 72, 303, 343, 422
1639504 05/2008
over power factor, 155 fault enable, 156, 300, 341, 489 fault threshold, 156, 300, 341, 441, 489 fault timeout, 156, 300, 341, 441, 489 faults count, 66, 304 warning enable, 156, 300, 341, 489 warning threshold, 156, 300, 341, 442, 489 overcurrent, 105 fault enable, 106, 339, 484 fault threshold, 106, 339, 440, 484 fault timeout, 106, 339, 440, 484 faults count, 66, 303 warning enable, 106, 339, 484 warning threshold, 106, 339, 440, 484 overload object, 405 overpower, 151 fault enable, 152, 300, 341, 488 fault threshold, 152, 300, 341, 441, 488 fault timeout, 152, 300, 441, 488 fault timeout starting, 341 faults count, 66, 304 warning enable, 152, 300, 341, 488 warning threshold, 152, 300, 341, 441, 488 overvoltage, 137 fault enable, 138, 299, 340, 486 fault threshold, 138, 299, 340, 441, 486 fault timeout, 138, 299, 340, 441, 486 faults count, 66, 304 warning enable, 138, 299, 340, 486 warning threshold, 138, 299, 340, 441, 486
P
parameters configurable, 477 password HMI keypad, 306 Periodic Registers Service Objects, 385 phase imbalances register, 438 physical description expansion module, 31 LTM R controller, 26 PKW, 385 Periodic Registers Service Objects, 385 PKW error codes, 388 PLC, 537
549
Index
power consumption active, 423 reactive, 423 power factor, 46, 68, 335, 437 n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 PowerSuite software control commands, 361 fault management, 360 fault monitoring, 360 metering and monitoring, 357 navigation, 352 settings branch, 353 user interface, 351 predefined operating modes control wiring and fault management, 174 preventive maintenance, 457 configuration settings, 457 environment, 457 statistics, 457 producer/consumer model, 249 protection functions, 77 communication, 202 configuration, 164, 201 current, 164, 202 customized, 77 diagnostic, 164, 201 faults, 78 internal, 164, 201 motor temperature sensor, 164, 202 operating states, 164 power, 148, 164, 202 thermal and current, 81 thermal overload, 164, 202 voltage, 126, 164, 202 warnings, 78 wiring, 164, 201 PT100, 117 PTC analog, 120 PTC binary, 115
R
rapid cycle lockout, 124, 433 lockout timeout, 124, 300, 307, 342, 440, 478 reactive power, 48, 335, 437 consumption, 49 replacement expansion module, 460 LTM R controller, 460 reset, 538 reset to defaults, 357 RSNetworx, 370
S
scrolling parameter display (1-to-1), 311 self test, 361, 458, 459 start cycle, 165 stop HMI disable, 479 terminal strip disable, 479 stop HMI disable, 296, 448 stop terminal strip disable, 296, 448 system fault, 332, 433 on, 332, 433 ready, 433 tripped, 433 warning, 433 system and device monitoring faults, 50 system and device monitoring faults control command diagnostic errors, 53 system operating status, 73 minimum wait time, 74 motor state, 74 system ready, 74 system selection guide, 22 system status logic inputs, 434 logic outputs, 434 register 1, 433 register 2, 433
1639504 05/2008
Q
Quick Watch window, 359
550
Index
T
TCC, 538 technical specifications LTM E expansion module, 472 LTM R controller, 468 TeSys T Motor Management System, 15 thermal capacity level, 42, 68, 83, 86, 307, 335, 436 n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 thermal overload, 82 configuration, 440 definite time, 88 fault, 86 fault definite timeout, 90, 297, 440, 481 fault enable, 82, 297, 338, 481 fault reset mode, 200, 291 fault reset threshold, 86, 201, 297, 338, 443, 481 fault reset timeout, 201, 307 faults count, 66, 86, 89, 303, 343 inverse thermal, 83 mode, 82, 292, 440 time to trip, 61 warning, 86 warning enable, 82, 297, 338, 481 warning threshold, 86, 90, 297, 338, 443, 481 warnings count, 86, 89, 303, 343 time stamp, 459 time to trip, 61, 335, 437
fault threshold, 104, 298, 339, 443, 484 fault timeout, 104, 298, 339, 443, 484 faults count, 66, 303, 343 warning enable, 104, 298, 339, 484 warning threshold, 104, 298, 339, 443, 484 underpower, 149 fault enable, 150, 300, 341, 488 fault threshold, 150, 300, 341, 441, 488 fault timeout, 150, 300, 341, 441, 488 faults count, 66, 304 warning enable, 150, 300, 341, 488 warning threshold, 150, 300, 341, 441, 488 undervoltage, 134 fault enable, 135, 299, 340, 486 fault threshold, 135, 299, 340, 441, 486 fault timeout, 135, 299, 340, 441, 486 faults count, 66, 304 warning enable, 135, 299, 340, 486 warning threshold, 135, 299, 340, 441, 486 use, 267 LTM R controller alone, 268 programming the Magelis XBTN410, 274
V
voltage average, 45, 335, 436 L1-L2, 44, 335, 437 L2-L3, 44, 335, 437 L3-L1, 44, 335, 436 phase imbalance, 335, 437 voltage dip configuration, 300, 441 detection, 437 mode, 487 occured, 437 restart threshold, 141, 144, 300, 441, 487 restart timeout, 141, 144, 441, 487 threshold, 141, 144, 300, 441, 487 voltage dip mode, 144, 300 voltage highest imbalance L1-L2, 438 L2-L3, 438 L3-L1, 438 voltage imbalance, 45 voltage mode, 141
551
U
under power factor, 153 fault enable, 154, 300, 341, 489 fault threshold, 154, 300, 341, 441, 489 fault timeout, 154, 300, 341, 441, 489 faults count, 66, 304 warning enable, 154, 300, 341, 489 warning threshold, 154, 300, 341, 441, 489 undercurrent, 103 fault enable, 104, 298, 339, 484
1639504 05/2008
Index
voltage phase imbalance, 45, 68, 127 fault enable, 129, 299, 340, 485 fault threshold, 129, 299, 340, 441, 485 fault timeout running, 129, 299, 340, 441, 485 fault timeout starting, 129, 299, 340, 441, 485 faults count, 66, 303 n-0, 305, 344, 424 n-1, 345, 425 n-2, 426 n-3, 427 n-4, 428 warning enable, 129, 299, 340, 485 warning threshold, 129, 299, 340, 441, 485 voltage phase loss, 130 fault enable, 131, 299, 340, 485 fault timeout, 131, 299, 340, 441, 485 faults count, 66, 304 warning enable, 131, 299, 340, 485 voltage phase reversal, 133 fault enable, 133, 299, 340, 485 faults count, 66, 98, 133
W
warning controller internal temperature, 435 current phase imbalance, 435 current phase loss, 436 current phase reversal, 436 diagnostic, 436 ground current, 435 HMI port, 435 jam, 435 LTM E configuration, 436 motor temperature sensor, 436 network port, 435 over power factor, 436 overcurrent, 436 overpower, 436 overvoltage, 436 register 1, 435 register 2, 436 register 3, 436 thermal overload, 435 under power factor, 436 undercurrent, 435
552
underpower, 436 undervoltage, 436 voltage phase imbalance, 436 voltage phase loss, 436 warning code, 435 warning enable controller internal temperature, 444 current phase balance, 444 current phase loss, 445 diagnostic, 445 ground current, 444 HMI port, 444 jam, 444 motor temperature sensor, 445 network port, 444 over power factor, 445 overcurrent, 445 overpower, 445 overvoltage, 445 register 1, 444 register 2, 445 thermal overload, 444 under power factor, 445 undercurrent, 444 underpower, 445 undervoltage, 445 voltage phase imbalance, 445 voltage phase loss, 445 warnings count, 65, 303, 423 thermal overload, 303, 422 wiring fault, 57 fault enable, 57, 300, 480 faults count, 67, 304
1639504 05/2008
You can download this technical publication and other technical information from our website at http://www.schneider-electric.com. Visit http://www.schneider-electric.com for your nearest Schneider Electric affiliate.
2008 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.
05/2008

Manual Tesys T DeviceNet

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Manual Tesys T DeviceNet

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

TeSys T LTM R DeviceNet Motor Management Controller

Metering and Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Motor Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Configurable Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

About the Book

About the Book

About the Book

About the Book

Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System

What's in this Chapter?

Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System

Examples of Supported Machine Segments

The motor management system supports the following machine segments:

Energy and Infrastructure

TeSysT Motor Management System

LTM E Expansion Module

HMI Device: Magelis XBTN410 HMI

HMI Device: LTM CU Control Operator Unit

LTM CU Control Operator Unit Functional description

Telemecanique current transformers

Primary 100 200 400 800

Inside diameter mm 35 35 35 35 in 1.38 1.38 1.38 1.38

Reference number LT6CT1001 LT6CT2001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT8001

External ground current transformers measure ground fault conditions.

System Selection Guide

LTM R with LTM E X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Phase Current Inputs

Windows for phase current measurement

Features of the Front Face

The LTM R controller front face includes the following features:

MNS Test / Reset

HMI Device/ Expansion Module/PC Port

LTM R controller LED descriptions:

solid red off red green

Plug-in Terminals and Pin Assignments

Relay Output Terminals

Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module

The LTM E expansion module LEDs indicate the following behaviors:

Plug-in Terminals and Pin Assignments

Metering and Monitoring Functions

What's in this Chapter?

Metering and Monitoring Functions

What's in this Section?

This section contains the following topics:

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Line Current Ratio Line Current Ratio Formulas

Line Current Ratio Characteristics

The line current ratio function has the following characteristics:

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Ground CT Primary Ground CT Secondary

External Ground Current Formula

The external ground current value depends on the parameter settings:

Calculated measurement External ground current

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Ground Current Characteristics

The ground current function has the following characteristics:

Resolution Refresh interval

Ground Current Ratio Ground Current Ratio Formulas

Ground Current Ratio Characteristics

The ground current ratio function has the following characteristics:

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Average Current Characteristics